Page 1

Table of Contents Full Report: The Economic Elite Vs. The People of the United States of America


March 9th, 2010, By David DeGraw

Is it time for law abiding American citizens to stop paying taxes, start a new government?


By David DeGraw, AmpedStatus Report

UN Policy Paper Describes Incremental Steps Toward World Government


Jurriaan Maessen

CAFR: US agencies have billions, trillions in investments while crying budget deficits May 22, 2010

LA County Nonpartisan Examiner

Oregon legislator reads CAFR, finds billions, ends budget deficit crisis; California can do same! June 11, 3:45 PM


Carl Herman

LA County Nonpartisan Examiner


Carl Herman

Secretary of State's Office Finds $3.3 billion in Available Funds! June 11th, 2010


CAFR: UC budget fully funded with one-fifth of one percent of State of California investments


May 24, 7:58 AM LA County Nonpartisan Examiner Carl Herman

CAFR Reports available online


The PR Firm from Hell -- Submitted: Jul 01, 2009, by: Lloyd Carter


Why Just About Everything You Hear About California's Water Crisis Is Wrong, Wrong, Wrong


By Yasha Levine, January 8, 2010

Wolf Cries, Howling About Drought, All Wet -- Officials Exaggerated Severity of Drought


Posted on 17 September 2010 , By Patrick Porgans and Lloyd G. Carter

Mother Jones Article Promotes Corporate Agribusiness Astroturfing


Submitted by Tim Stroshane on Mon, 01/04/2010 - 10:42pm

The Cancer Truth - Jeff Rense Interviews with Ty Bollinger (September 22, 2009)


The Marijuana Conspiracy - The Reason Hemp is Illegal, March 20th, 2009 by Dan Hughes


Watch the Hemp Revolution and Run from the Cure


Unplug the Signal: The Truth Will Not Be Televised


Nathan Janes, Pupaganda, February 24, 2010

Who Owns The Media? The 6 Monolithic Corporations That Control Almost Everything We Watch, Hear and Read


Why is it so difficult to see the propaganda that is all around us?


September 26, 2010 Watch: PSYWAR – the documentary

The time has arrived: is rebellion at hand?


By Greg Evensen September 27, 2010

The Gulf Oil Disaster Is War On We, The People -- 30 Facts Evidencing The Rothschild League of Bankers Planned The Gulf Oil Crisis By Leonard G. Horowitz And Sherri Kane


Make No Mistake – America Has Been SOLD By The NWO -- Was America Sold?


By Nancy Levant -- 7-3-9

State of California Selects Buyer for State Buildings


Former appointees seek halt of Schwarzenegger building sale


Tyranny’s Last Stand: The Tipping Point is Here


Michael Edwards, Activist Post -- October 4, 2010



Meditations on 9/11 Truth by Catherine Austin Fitts

Corporation Nation, June 28, 2010 by anticorruptionsociety by AL Whitney


Fluoride, Teeth, and the Atomic Bomb by Chris Bryson & Joel Griffiths


Sheep For Slaughter: Is the Elite really trying to KILL us? Eric Blair


National Ocean Council, by Cassandra Anderson


From Global Depression to Global Governance -- Andrew Gavin Marshall


Government Prepares To Seize Private Pensions -- Paul Joseph Watson, Prison Planet dot com


Fraudulent Financial System, researched by Ginny Lynn


Randy Kelton Returns: How to Take Back What They Took From You, plus - Mortgage Crime dot com




Cold Fusion – A Story of Suppressed Technology


The Regents Club - Conflicts of interest are nothing new at the University of California


Peter Byrne | October 2010

The American Dream – A great animated movie about our monetary system


Let’s Reclaim History As We Go Into 2011, And the Unknown Future


Tax Exempt Foundations and Think Tanks: The Process of Invisible Power Old-Thinker News - December 11, 2010


Websites for additional research, storable food and survival equipment


Important You Tube Presentations and Tips to Improve Your Health


We must end the corrupt practices of the elite bankers and create State run banks that operate for the benefit of the people. Read on!

Dedicated to millions of homeless Americans who are but a step ahead of the rest of us.

John Kraintz: I have noticed in this homeless community they don’t have one banker.


"The courts must be called to our aid, debts must be collected, bonds and mortgages foreclosed as rapidly as possible. When, through the process of the law, the common people have lost their homes, they will be more tractable and easily governed through the influence of the strong arm of the government applied to a central power of imperial wealth under the control of the leading financiers. People without homes will not quarrel with their leaders." ~ The Banker's Manifesto 1892

Full Report: The Economic Elite Vs. The People of the United States of America Posted on March 9th, 2010 at 11:59 am By David DeGraw, AmpedStatus Report

This report was originally released as a six-part series. The first part was published on February 15, 2010. The last part was published on February 27, 2010. ——-I: Casualties of Economic Terrorism, Surveying the Damage

——-II: The Rise of the Economic Elite ——-III: Exposing Our Enemy: Meet the Economic Elite ——-IV: The Financial Coup d‘Etat ——-V: Overcoming the Divide and Conquer Strategy ——-VI: How to Fight Back and Win: Common Ground Issues That Must Be Won > Support this work by ordering the full report in book format. > Download full report with graphics and links. > Download printer-friendly version.

“The American oligarchy spares no pains in promoting the belief that it does not exist, but the success of its disappearing act depends on equally strenuous efforts on the part of an American public anxious to believe in egalitarian fictions and unwilling to see what is hidden in plain sight.” – Michael Lind, To Have and to Have Not

It’s time for 99% of Americans to mobilize and aggressively move on common sense political reforms. Yes,

of course, we all have very strong differences of opinion on many issues. However, like our Founding Fathers before us, we must put aside our differences and unite to fight a common enemy.

It has now become evident to a critical mass that the Republican and Democratic parties, along with all three branches of our government, have been bought off by a well-organized Economic Elite who are tactically destroying our way of life. The harsh truth is that 99% of the US population no longer has political representation. The US economy, government and tax system is now blatantly rigged against us. Current statistical societal indicators clearly demonstrate that a strategic attack has been launched and an analysis of current governmental policies prove that conditions for 99% of Americans will continue to deteriorate. The Economic Elite have engineered a financial coup and have brought war to our doorstep. . . and make no mistake, they have launched a war to eliminate the US middle class. To those who feel I am using extreme rhetoric, I ask you to please take a few minutes of your time to hear me out and research the evidence put forth. The facts are there for the unprejudiced, rational and reasoned mind to absorb. It is the unfortunate reality of our current crisis. Unless we all unite and organize on common ground, our very way of life and the ideals that our country was founded upon will continue to unravel. Before exposing exactly who the Economic Elite are, and discussing common sense ways in which we can defeat them, let‘s take a look at how much damage they have already caused. I: Casualties of Economic Terrorism, Surveying the Damage The devastating numbers across-the-board on the economic front are staggering. I‘ll go through some of them here, many we have already become all too familiar with. We hear some of these numbers all the time, so much so that it appears as if we have already begun ― to normalize the unthinkable.‖ You may be sick of hearing them, but behind each number is an enormous amount of individual suffering, American lives and families who are struggling worse than they ever have. America is the richest nation in history, yet we now have the highest poverty rate in the industrialized world with an unprecedented number of Americans living in dire straits and over 50 million citizens already living in poverty. The government has come up with clever ways to downplay all of these numbers, but we have over 50 million people who need to use food stamps to eat, and a stunning 50% of US children will use a food stamp to eat at some point in their childhood. Approximately 20,000 people are added to this total every day. In 2009, one out of five US households didn‘t have enough money to buy food. In households with children, this number rose to 24%, as the hunger rate among US citizens has now reached an all time high. We also currently have over 50 million US citizens without healthcare. 1.4 million Americans filed for bankruptcy in 2009, a 32% increase from 2008. As bankruptcies continue to skyrocket, medical bankruptcies are responsible for over 60% of them, and over 75% of the medical bankruptcies filed are from people who have healthcare insurance. We have the most expensive healthcare system in the world, we are forced to pay twice as much as other countries and the overall care we get in return ranks 37th in the world. In total, Americans have lost $5 trillion from their pensions and savings since the economic crisis began and $13 trillion in the value of their homes. During the first full year of the crisis, workers between the age of 55 60, who have worked for 20 - 29 years, have lost an average of 25% off their 401k. ― Personal debt has risen from 65% of income in 1980 to 125% today.‖ Over five million US families have already lost their homes, in total 13 million US families are expected to lose their home by 2014, with 25% of current mortgages underwater. Deutsche Bank has an even grimmer prediction: ― The percentage of ‗underwater‘ loans may rise to 48 percent, or 25 million homes.‖ Every day 10,000 US homes enter foreclosure. Statistics show that an

increasing number of these people are not finding shelter elsewhere, there are now over 3 million homeless Americans, the fastest growing segment of the homeless population is single parents with children. One place more and more Americans are finding a home is in prison. With a prison population of 2.3 million people, we now have more people incarcerated than any other nation in the world - the per capita statistics are 700 per 100,000 citizens. In comparison, China has 110 per 100,000, France has 80 per 100,000, Saudi Arabia has 45 per 100,000. The prison industry is thriving and expecting major growth over the next few years. A recent report from the Hartford Advocate titled ― Incarceration Nation‖ revealed that ―anew prison opens every week somewhere in America.‖ Mass Unemployment The government unemployment rate is deceptive on several levels. It doesn‘t count people who are ― involuntary part-time workers,‖ meaning workers who are working part-time but want to find full-time work. It also doesn‘t count ―disc ouraged workers,‖ meaning long-term unemployed people who lost hope and don‘t consistently look for work. As time goes by, more and more people stop consistently looking for work and are discounted from the unemployment figure. For instance, in January, 1.1 million workers were eliminated from the unemployment total because they were ― officially‖ labeled ― discouraged workers.‖ So instead of the number rising, we will hear deceptive reports about unemployment leveling off. On top of this, the Bureau of Labor Statistics recently discovered that 824,000 job losses were never accounted for due to a ― modeling error‖ in their data. Even in their initial January data there appears to be a huge understating, with the newest report saying the economy lost 20,000 jobs. TrimTabs employment analysis, which has consistently provided more accurate data, ― estimated that the U.S. economy shed 104,000 jobs in January.‖ When you factor in all these uncounted workers — ― involuntary part-time‖ and ― discouraged workers‖ — the unemployment rate rises from 9.7% to over 20%. In total, we now have over 30 million US citizens who are unemployed or underemployed. The rarely cited ― employment-participation‖ rate, which reveals the percentage of the population that is currently in the workforce, has now fallen to 64%. Even based on the ― official‖ unemployment rate, just to get back to the unemployment level of 4.6% that we had in 2007, we need to create over 10 million new jobs, and most every serious economist will tell you that these jobs are not coming back. In fact, we are still consistently shedding jobs, on just one day, January 27th, several companies announced new cuts of more than 60,000 jobs. Due to the length of this crisis already, millions of Americans are reaching a point where the unemployment benefits that they have been surviving off of are coming to an end. More workers have already been out of work longer than at any point since statistics have been recorded, with over six million now unemployed for over six months. A record 20 million Americans qualified for unemployment insurance benefits last year, causing 27 states to run out of funds, with seven more also expected to go into the red within the next few months. In total, 40 state programs are expected to go broke. Most economists believe that the unemployment rate will remain high for the foreseeable future. What will happen when we have millions of laid-off workers without any unemployment benefits to save them? Working More for Less The millions struggling to find work are just part of the story. Due to the fact that we now have a record high six people for every one job opening, companies have been able to further increase the workload on their remaining employees. They have been able to increase the amount of hours Americans are working, reduce wages and drastically cut back on benefits. Even though Americans were already the most productive workers in the world

before the economic crisis, in the third quarter of 2009, average worker productivity increased by an annualized rate of 9.5%, at the same time unit labor cost decreased by 5.2%. This has led to record profits for many companies. Of the 220 companies in the S&P 500 who have reported fourth-quarter results thus far, 78% of them had ― better-than-expected profits‖ with earnings 17% above expectations, ― the highest for any quarter since Thomson Reuters began tracking data.‖ According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the national median wage was only $32,390 per year in 2008, and median household income fell by 3.6% while the unemployment rate was 5.8%. With the unemployment rate now at 10%, median income has been falling at a 5% rate and is expected to continue its decline. Not surprisingly, Americans‘ job satisfaction level is now at an all time low. There are also a growing number of employed people who, despite having a job, are still living in poverty. There are at least 15 million workers who now fall into this rapidly growing category. $32,390 a year is not going to get you far in today‘s economy, and half of the country is making less than that. This is why many Americans are now forced to work two jobs to provide for their family to hopefully make ends meet. A Crime Against Humanity The mainstream news media will numb us to this horrifying reality by endlessly talking about the latest numbers, but they never piece them together to show you the whole devastating picture, and they rarely show you all the immense individual suffering behind them. This is how they ― normalize the unthinkable‖ and make us become passive in the face of such a high casualty count. Behind each of these numbers, is a tremendous amount of misery, the physical toll is only outdone by the severe psychological toll. Anyone who has had to put off medical care, or who couldn‘t get medical care for one of their family members due to financial circumstances, can tell you about the psychological toll that is on top of the physical suffering. Anyone who has felt the stress of wondering how they were going to get their child‘s next meal or their own, or the stress of not knowing how you are going to pay the mortgage, rent, electricity or heat bill, let alone the car payment, gas, phone, cable or internet bill. There are now well over 150 million Americans who feel stress over these things on a consistent basis. Over 60% of Americans now live paycheck to paycheck. These are all basic things that every person should be able to easily afford in a technologically advanced society such as ours. The reason why we struggle with these things is because the Economic Elite have robbed us all. This amount of suffering in the United States of America is literally a crime against humanity. II: The Rise of the Economic Elite ― The war against working people should be understood to be a real war…. Specifically in the U.S., which happens to have a highly class-conscious business class…. And they have long seen themselves as fighting a bitter class war, except they don‘t want anybody else to know about it.‖ — Noam Chomsky As a record number of US citizens are struggling to get by, many of the largest corporations are experiencing record-breaking profits, and CEOs are receiving record-breaking bonuses. How could this be happening; how did we get to this point? The Economic Elite have escalated their attack on US workers over the past few years; however, this attack began to build intensity in the 1970s. In 1970, CEOs made $25 for every $1 the average worker made. Due to technological advancements, production and profit levels exploded from 1970 - 2000. With the lion‘s share of

increased profits going to the CEOs, this pay ratio dramatically rose to $90 for CEOs to $1 for the average worker. As ridiculous as that seems, an in-depth study in 2004 on the explosion of CEO pay revealed that, including stock options and other benefits, CEO pay is more accurately $500 to $1. Paul Buchheit, from DePaul University, revealed, ― From 1980 to 2006 the richest 1% of America tripled their after-tax percentage of our nation‘s total income, while the bottom 90% have seen their share drop over 20%.‖ Robert Freeman added, ― Between 2002 and 2006, it was even worse: an astounding three quarters of all the economy‘s growth was captured by the top 1%.‖ Due to this, the United States already had the highest inequality of wealth in the industrialized world prior to the financial crisis. Since the crisis, which has hit the average worker much harder than CEOs, the gap between the top one percent and the remaining 99% of the US population has grown to a record high. The economic top one percent of the population now owns over 70% of all financial assets, an all-time record. As mentioned before, just look at the first full year of the crisis when workers lost an average of 25 percent off their 401k. During the same time period, the wealth of the 400 richest Americans increased by $30 billion, bringing their total combined wealth to $1.57 trillion, which is more than the combined net worth of 50% of the US population. Just to make this point clear, 400 people have more wealth than 155 million people combined. Meanwhile, 2009 was a record-breaking year for Wall Street bonuses, as firms issued $150 billion to their executives. 100% of these bonuses are a direct result of our tax dollars, so if we used this money to create jobs, instead of giving it to a handful of top executives, we could have paid an annual salary of $30,000 to 5 million people. So while US workers are now working more hours and have become dramatically more productive and profitable, our pay is actually declining and all the dramatic increases in wealth are going straight into the pockets of the Economic Elite. If our income had kept pace with compensation distribution rates established in the early 1970s, we would all be making at least three times as much as we are currently making. How different would your life be if you were making $120,000 a year, instead of $40,000? So it should come as no surprise to see that we now have the highest inequality of wealth in the industrialized world and the highest inequality of wealth in our nation‘s history. The backbone of America, a hard-working middle class that has made our country a world leader, has been devastated. Now that we have a better understanding of how our income has been suppressed over the past forty years, let‘s take a look at how the economy has been designed to take the limited money we receive and put it into the hands of the Economic Elite as well. Costs of Living Outside of the workplace, in almost all our costs of living the system is now blatantly rigged against us. Let‘s take a look at it, starting with our tax system. In total, the average US citizen is forced to give up approximately 30% of our income in taxes. This tax system is now strategically designed to flow straight into the hands of the Economic Elite. A huge percentage of our tax

dollars ultimately ends up in their pockets. The past decade proves that — whether it‘s the Republicans or the Democrats running the government — our tax money is not going into our community; it is going into the pockets of the billionaires who have bought off both parties - it is obscene. For an example of how this system flows to the Economic Elite, just look at the Wall Street ―ba ilout.‖ The real size of the bailout is estimated to be $14 trillion - and could end up costing trillions more than that. By now you are probably also sick of hearing about the bailout, but stop and think about this for a moment… Do you comprehend how much $14 trillion is? What could be accomplished with this money is almost beyond common comprehension. And this is just the tip of the iceberg that has hit us. On top of the trillions given to the Wall Street elite, we already have a record $12.3 trillion in national debt - and we now have to pay $500 billion in interest to the Economic Elite on this debt every year, yet another way they are milking us dry. When you add in unfunded liabilities owed, like social security payments, we actually owe a stunning $74 trillion. That adds up to a debt of $242,000 for every man, woman and child in America. Trillions more, 25% of taxpayer dollars allocated to military spending goes unaccounted for every year, not to mention the billions spent on overcharging and outright fraud. During the War on Terror, the Economic Elite have used our tax money to build a private army that has more soldiers deployed than the US military - a congressional study revealed that 69% of the ― US‖ fighting forces deployed throughout the world in our name are in fact private mercenaries, 80% of them are foreign nationals. Private contractors regularly get paid three to five times more than our soldiers, and have been repeatedly caught overcharging and committing fraud on a massive scale. A congressional investigation revealed this and strongly recommended that we seize wasting tax dollars on these private military contractors. However, under Obama, there has actually been a drastic increase in total tax dollars spent on them. In 2009, just over $1 trillion tax dollars were spent on the military. It‘s safe to say that at least $350 billion of that was needlessly wasted. When you research our tax system you see an unprecedented level of waste and fraud rampant throughout most expenditures. Our tax system is a national disaster of epic proportions. It is literally an organized criminal operation that continues to rob us in broad daylight, with zero accountability. Politicians and mainstream ―ne ws‖ outlets will not tell you this, but most every serious economist knows that due to so much theft and debt created in the tax system, the only way to fix things, other than stopping the theft and seizing the trillions that have been stolen, will be for the government to cut important social funding and drastically raise our taxes. Other than the record national debt, many states are running record deficits and ― barreling toward economic disaster, raising the likelihood of higher taxes, more government layoffs and deep cuts in services.‖ Our nation‘s biggest state economies, like California and New York, are the ones in most trouble. To merely say that things will not be improving economically is to be a delusional optimist. The truth that you will not hear: we have been hit by an economic deathblow and the United States lays in ruins. It‘s not just this criminal tax system; the theft is now built into all our costs of living. Trillions more in our spending on food and fuel have been stolen due to fraudulent stock transactions and overcharging. Just ten years ago, in 2000, American families paid 7% of our income on food and fuel. We now pay 20%. This drastic increase is primarily driven by fraudulent market manipulation that drives up stock prices. Congress uncovered this in 2006, as part of the Enron investigation. They found that companies

manipulated the oil market to create major spikes in stock values, but then Congress didn‘t do anything about it. Nothing to see here, just move on. As mentioned before, we have the most expensive health care system in the world and we are forced to pay twice as much as other countries, and the overall care we get in return ranks 37th in the world. On average, US citizens are now paying a record high 8% of their income on medical care. One of the reasons why foreclosure rates are so high is because the percentage of income Americans pay on their housing has risen to 34%. So for these basic necessities - taxes, food, fuel, shelter and medical bills - we have already lost 92% of our limited income. Then factor in ever-increasing interest rates on credit cards, student loans, rising prices for cable, internet, phone, bank fees, etc., etc., etc…. We are being robbed and gouged in all costs of living, in every aspect of our life. No wonder bankruptcies are skyrocketing and the number of people suffering from psychological depression has reached an epidemic level. The American worker is screwed over every step of the way, and it all starts with the explosion in the cost of a college education. This is one of the Economic Elite‘s most devastating weapons. To have any chance of succeeding in this economy, it is commonly believed that you must attend the best college possible. With the rising costs involved, today‘s students are graduating with record levels of debt from student loans. At the same time, the unemployment rate among recent college graduates has risen higher than the national average, and those who do find work are making significantly less than they expected to make. This combination of extreme debt and reduced pay has crippled an entire generation right from the start and has put them in a vicious cycle of spiraling debt that they will struggle with for the rest of their lives. The most recent college graduates are now lost generation.‖ known as a ― The American dream has turned into a nightmare. The economic system is a sophisticated prison cell; the indentured servant is now an indebted wage slave; whips and chains have evolved into debts. ― There are two ways to conquer and enslave a nation. One is by sword. The other is by debt.‖ – John Adams Concealing National Wealth ― Liberty in the concrete signifies release from the impact of particular oppressive forces; emancipation from something once taken as a normal part of human life but now experienced as bondage…. Today, it signifies liberation from material insecurity and from the coercions and repressions that prevent multitudes from participation in the vast cultural resources that are at hand.‖ — John Dewey When you take the time to research and analyze the wealth that has gone to the economic top one percent, you begin to realize just how much we have been robbed. Trillions upon trillions of dollars that could make the lives of all hard-working Americans much easier have been strategically funneled into the coffers of the Economic Elite. The denial of wealth is the key to the Economic Elite‘s power. An entire generation of massive wealth creation has been strategically withheld from 99% of the US population. The US public doesn‘t have any understanding of how much wealth has been generated and concentrated into the hands of the Economic Elite over the past 40 years; there is no historical frame of reference. This withholding of wealth is truly the greatest crime against humanity in the history of civilization. What could be done with all the money that has been hoarded by the Economic Elite is extraordinary!

Let‘s consider what we could do with the money that has been stolen from us. On top of what should be our average six-figure yearly income, we could have: * Free health care for every American, * A free 4 bedroom home for every American family, * 5% tax rate for 99% of Americans, * Drastically improved public education and free college for all, * Significantly improved public transportation and infrastructure, The list goes on… This is not some far-fetched fantasy. These are all things that Franklin D. Roosevelt talked about doing in the 1940s, long before the explosion of wealth creation in our technologically advanced global economy. The money for all this is already there, stashed into the claws of the Economic Elite. The denial of wealth to the masses is the key to the Economic Elite‘s power. Outside of outdated and obsolete economic models and theories — and incredibly short-sighted greed — there is no reason why all this money should be kept in the hands of a few, at the immense suffering and expense of the many. If Americans could just understand how much wealth is being withheld from us, we would have a massive uprising and the Economic Elite would be swept away, into the history books alongside the evil despots of the past. ― For if leisure and security were enjoyed by all alike, the great mass of human beings who are normally stupefied by poverty would become literate and would learn to think for themselves; and when once they had done this, they would sooner or later realize that the privileged minority had no function, and they would sweep it away. In the long run, a hierarchical society was only possible on a basis of poverty and ignorance.‖ — George Orwell Now that we have a better understanding of how the Economic Elite dominate our lives, let‘s take a look at exactly who they are…. III: Exposing Our Enemy - Meet the Economic Elite

― The money powers prey upon the nation in times of peace and conspire against it in times of adversity. It is more despotic than a monarchy, more insolent than autocracy, and more selfish than bureaucracy. It denounces as public enemies, all who question its methods or throw light upon its crimes… As a result of the war, corporations have been enthroned and an era of corruption in high places will follow, and the money powers of the country will endeavor to prolong it‘s reign by working upon the prejudices of the people until all wealth is aggregated in a few hands and the Republic is destroyed.‖ – Abraham Lincoln

U.S. Elite Institutions: Federal Reserve Business Council Bilderberg Group Conference Board Brookings Institute Advertising Council Heritage Foundation Trilateral Commission Business Round Table Chamber of Commerce Federal Trade Commission Council on Foreign Relations American Petroleum Institute American Enterprise Institute American Bankers Association Pharm Research & Manufacturers Public Relations Society of America American Psychological Association Project for a New American Century Securities and Exchange Commission Committee for Economic Development National Association of Manufacturers Carnegie / Ford / Rockefeller foundations Military / Media / Prison Industrial Complex

I don‘t view the Economic Elite as a small group of men who meet in secrecy to control the world. They do feature elements of conspiracy and are clearly composed of secretive organizations like the Bilderberg Group this is not a conspiracy theory, this is a conspiracy fact - but as a whole the Economic Elite are primarily united by ideology. They‘re made up of thousands of individuals who subscribe to an ideology of exploitation and the belief that wealth and resources need to be concentrated into the fewest hands possible (theirs), at the expense of the many. That being said, there are some definite lead players in this group and it is important that we are not too vague and expose the individuals who publicly lead them. Focusing on the fundamental structure of the US economy, we have people like Hank Paulson, Tim Geithner, Ben Bernanke, Robert Rubin, Larry Summers, Alan Greenspan, Lloyd Blankfein, Jamie Dimon, John Mack, Vikram Pandit, John Thain, Hank Greenberg, Ken Lewis, John J. Castellani, Edward Yingling and Tom Donohue. In total, the Economic Elite are made up of about 0.5% of the US population. At the center of this group is the Business Roundtable, an organization representing Fortune 500 CEOs that is also interlocked with several lead elite organizations. Most Americans have never heard of the Business Roundtable. However, in my analysis, it is the most influential and powerful Economic Elite organization. ― The Business Roundtable joined the Business Council at the heart of both the corporate community and the policy-formation network and now has the most powerful role…. The Roundtable‘s interlocks with other policy groups and with think tanks are presented [below].‖ -– G. William Domhoff, Who Rules America?

The Roundtable‘s first year of operation was 1972, which coincided with the beginning of the CEO salary explosion, and has been the driving force behind the unprecedented concentration of wealth since their inception. Their dominance over the US economy and government is unparalleled. Their members are a Who‘s Who of everything that is wrong with our economy. Here is a partial list of some of their lead members: ——-Lloyd C. Blankfein, Goldman Sachs ——-James Dimon, JPMorgan Chase & Co. ——-James P. Gorman, Morgan Stanley ——-Vikram S. Pandit, Citigroup, Inc. ——-Brian T. Moynihan, Bank of America ——-Brendan McDonagh, HSBC

——-Robert W. Selander, MasterCard Incorporated ——-Kenneth I. Chenault, American Express Company ——-Rupert Murdoch, News Corporation ——-Glenn A. Britt, Time Warner Cable Inc. ——-Philippe Dauman, Viacom, Inc. ——-Jeffrey R. Immelt, General Electric Company ——-Brian L. Roberts, Comcast Corporation ——-Steven A. Ballmer, Microsoft Corporation ——-John T. Chambers, Cisco Systems, Inc. ——-Randall L. Stephenson, AT&T Inc. ——-Ivan G. Seidenberg, Verizon Communications ——-David G. DeWalt, McAfee, Inc. ——-Steven R. Loranger, ITT Corporation ——-Paul T. Hanrahan, AES Corporation, The ——-Riley P. Bechtel, Bechtel Group, Inc. ——-W. James McNerney , Boeing Company, The ——-Rex W. Tillerson, Exxon Mobil Corporation ——-Marvin E. Odum, Shell Oil Company ——-John S. Watson, Chevron Corporation ——-James J. Mulva, ConocoPhillips ——-John B. Hess, Hess Corporation ——-James E. Rogers Duke Energy Corporation ——-J. Larry Nichols, Devon Energy Corporation ——-Ronald A. Williams, Aetna Inc. ——-David Cordani, CIGNA ——-Jeffrey B. Kindler , Pfizer Inc. ——-Angela F. Braly, WellPoint, Inc. ——-John C. Lechleiter, Eli Lilly and Company ——-Edward B. Rust, Jr., State Farm ——-Andrew N. Liveris, Dow Chemical ——-James W. Owens, Caterpillar Inc. ——-Ellen J. Kullman, DuPont ——-Edward E. Whitacre Jr., General Motors Company ——-Michael T. Duke, Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. The Business Roundtable is the most powerful activist organization in the United States. Their leaders regularly lobby members of Congress behind closed doors and often meet privately with the President and his administration. Any legislation that affects Roundtable members has almost zero possibility of passing without their support. For three major examples, look at healthcare and financial reform, along with the military budget. The healthcare reform bill devolved into what amounts to an insurance industry bailout and was drastically altered by Roundtable lobbyists representing interests like WellPoint, Aetna, Cigna, Pfizer, Eli Lilly and Johnson & Johnson. Obama and Congress are trying to please the Roundtable with a bill that supports their interests. This led to the dropping of the public-option put forth in the House bill. However, when it came to finishing the bill, Roundtable members began to walk away from the process. That‘s the real reason why the reform bill has stalled. Obama will be meeting with the Roundtable on February 24th, in hopes of getting healthcare reform back on track. After that meeting, he will then hold a bipartisan healthcare meeting with members of congress. Also being addressed in Obama‘s upcoming meeting with the Roundtable are issues concerning financial reform. Almost every aspect of financial reform has been D.O.A. thanks to Roundtable lobbyists representing the interests of Goldman Sachs, JP Morgan, Morgan Stanley, Citigroup, Bank of America, HSBC, Master Card

and American Express. They even pushed to make sure Ben Bernanke was reconfirmed as the head of the Federal Reserve and they have also guided Obama into focusing on deficit reduction, now that their member companies are healthy again and making record profits after receiving trillions in government subsidies. The Roundtable played a pivotal role in the appointment of Hank Paulson, formerly the CEO of Roundtable member Goldman Sachs, who replaced Roundtable member John Snow as US Treasury Secretary. The Roundtable also strongly lobbied on behalf of current Treasury Secretary Tim Geithner and White House National Economic Council Director Larry Summers. Although there has been recent talk of Geithner being replaced at the Treasury, the lead choice to replace him is Jamie Dimon, Roundtable member and CEO of JP Morgan Chase. The drastic rise in military spending is also a result of Roundtable lobbyists pushing the interests of large military companies like Boeing and Bechtel, along with the largest oil companies like ExxonMobil, Shell, Hess and Chevron. The Roundtable tells politicians what they want done, and the politicians do it. At times, Roundtable members even write the laws themselves. On financial reform alone, those representing Wall Street firms gave ― $42 million to lawmakers, mostly to members of the House and Senate banking committees and House and Senate leaders.‖ During the 2008 election cycle, they gave $155 million: $88 million to Democrats and $67 million to Republicans. Keep in mind, this is the spending on just their financial reform initiative. When it came to health reform, they gave even more. When it comes to getting elected, over 90% of the time the candidate who simply spends more money on their campaign wins the election. The Roundtable and politicians recognize this fact, so the overwhelming majority of current elected officials relied heavily on campaign funding from Roundtable members, including President Obama. Shortly after Obama‘s inauguration he held a meeting with Roundtable members at the St. Regis Hotel. The president of the Business Roundtable is John J. Castellani. Throughout the first nine months of Obama‘s presidency, Castellani met with him at the White House more than any other person, with the exception of Chamber of Commerce CEO Tom Donohue. If you look at the records of people who have spent the most time with Obama in the White House, other than these two, another frequent visitor is Edward Yingling, the president of the American Bankers Association. These organizations - the Business Roundtable, Chamber of Commerce and the American Bankers Association - along with the Federal Reserve, a secretive quasi-government private institution, form the center of the Economic Elite‘s power structure. Since the bailout, the Federal Reserve has been working closely with private firm BlackRock. Due to this relationship, BlackRock has emerged as the world‘s largest money manager and now manages more assets than the Federal Reserve. They also ―m anage many of the Treasury Department‘s big investments.‖ On a global level, you have economic institutions like the World Trade Organization (WTO), the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank, and international treaties like NAFTA. These organizations already form a de facto world government that has rights beyond our constitutional rights and national sovereignty. If the WTO makes a ruling that goes against US law, the WTO ruling supersedes US law and wins out. Here is how Global Exchange explains these global institutions: ― The World Trade Organization is the most powerful legislative and judicial body in the world. By promoting the ‗free trade‘ agenda of multinational corporations above the interests of local communities, working families, and the environment, the WTO has systematically undermined democracy around the world…. Unlike United Nations treaties, the International Labor Organization conventions, or multilateral environmental agreements, WTO rules can be enforced through sanctions. This gives the WTO more power than any other international body. The WTO‘s authority even eclipses national governments.

[World Bank and International Monetary Fund (IMF)] When the Bank and the Fund lend money to debtor countries, the money comes with strings attached. These strings come in the form of policy prescriptions called ‘structural adjustment policies.‘ These policies—or SAPs, as they are sometimes called—require debtor governments to open their economies to penetration by foreign corporations, allowing access to the country‘s workers and environment at bargain basement prices. Structural adjustment policies mean across-the-board privatization of public utilities and publicly owned industries. They mean the slashing of government budgets, leading to cutbacks in spending on health care and education…. And, as their imposition in country after country in Latin America, Africa, and Asia has shown, they lead to deeper inequality and environmental destruction.‖ In addition to dominating our political and economic system, the Economic Elite have already created their own private military. Their private military is now more powerful than the US military. As mentioned earlier, private mercenaries now outnumber US soldiers and receive the lion‘s share of military spending. Corporations like SAIC, Blackwater, Bechtel, Raytheon and Halliburton are composed of the most elite worldwide intelligence and military officers. These are the highly profitable and powerful entities that the Economic Elite turn to when national militaries and intelligence agencies - like the CIA, FBI or other government run entities - can‘t get the job done. stealth company‖ that most people have never heard of, is considered to be the brains of For instance, SAIC, a ― the entire US intelligence apparatus, more powerful than the much more popularly known CIA, NSA and FBI all agencies that SAIC is deeply intertwined with. I urge you to research SAIC to get a crash course in how the true power structure functions. You can start by reading an excellent investigative report by Donald L. Barlett Washington‘s $8 billion shadow.‖ and James B. Steele titled, ― The Economic Elite dominate US intelligence and military operations. Other than the obvious geo-strategic reasons, the never-ending and ever-expanding War on Terror‘s objective is to drain the US population of more resources and further rob US taxpayers, while using our tax money to create a private military that is more powerful than the US military. I think any logical person can see the ominous implications of having such a vast and powerful private military and intelligence complex, created for and used, in secrecy, by the Economic Elite. Outside of the blatant economic policy attacks, heavily armed and sophisticated covert powers led by small groups of Economic Elite are now a serious risk and present danger. In conclusion, these economic and government policy forming organizations, along with their private military and intelligence corporations, form the core of the Economic Elite power structure. ― I think one has to say it‘s not just simply a matter of capturing people and holding them accountable, but removing the sanctuaries, removing the support systems.‖ – Paul Wolfowitz IV: The Financial Coup d‘Etat

Although most of the Economic Elite live and operate inside the US, they are

not concerned for our future. To them, the entire world is theirs and they work intimately with other elites throughout the world against the interests of the US public. Ever since the days of Henry Ford, the Economic Elite have needed a thriving US middle class to increase growth and profits, but now, in the global economy, they view the US middle class as obsolete. They increasingly look globally for profits and they would rather pay cheap labor in countries like China and India. On top of the millions of jobs they have already shipped

overseas to increase profits at our expense, they are planning to ship an additional 25% of current US jobs overseas as well. They now see us as the biggest obstacle to their continued consolidation of wealth and resources. This is why they have stepped up their attack on us. If you want further proof of this, all one needs to do is study the Wall Street bailout. The entire bailout is strategically designed to eliminate the US middle class. Every time you hear the word ― bailout,‖ you should think ― coup d‘état.‖ Here is the definition of coup d‘état: ― A coup d‘état or coup for short, is the sudden unconstitutional deposition of a government, usually by a small group of the existing state establishment… to replace the deposed government with another…. A coup d‘état succeeds when the usurpers establish their legitimacy if the attacked government fail to thwart them, by allowing their (strategic, tactical, political) consolidation and then receiving the deposed government‘s surrender; or the acquiescence of the populace and the non-participant military forces. Typically, a coup d‘état uses the extant government‘s power to assume political control of the country. In Coup d‘État: A Practical Handbook, military historian Edward Luttwak says: ‗A coup consists of the infiltration of a small, but critical, segment of the state apparatus, which is then used to displace the government from its control of the remainder‘, thus, armed force (either military or paramilitary) is not a defining feature of a coup d‘état.‖ The bailout was a financial coup, an intelligence operation to seize control of the US economy and tax system. It is similar to what the Economic Elite have done through the International Monetary Fund (IMF) in many other countries throughout the world. It is clearly a case of economic imperialism. When financial coups are carried out in other countries, they call it a Structural Adjustment Program (SAP). The end result is the theft of working class wealth, the privatization of public functions and resources, rising unemployment, the elimination of the middle class and increasing taxation and debt that turns the overwhelming majority of the nation into a peasant class. This is exactly the track we are on now. Just look at how they have already done this in many other countries, and then look at the ― bailout.‖ The success of the coup is clear by the control of the US Treasury by Goldman Sachs criminal masterminds Hank Paulson and Tim Geithner, and the continued control of the Federal Reserve by Ben Bernanke. In 1970, Hank Paulson began his career in the Pentagon working for Secretary of Defense Melvin Laird. In 1972, he then moved to the White House, where he worked for the Nixon Administration. He was ―theassistant to John Ehrlichman during the events of the Watergate scandal for which Ehrlichman was convicted, and sentenced to prison.‖ After Paulson‘s disgraced exit from the political world, he joined Goldman Sachs in 1974, eventually becoming CEO in 1999 when he led an effort to force out Goldman‘s previous CEO John Corzine. While leading Goldman, Paulson developed very intimate relations with members of the Chinese elite, visiting the country over 70 times. In 2004, during his time as Chairman and CEO of Goldman Sachs, Paulson personally led a successful effort to get the SEC to remove the ―net capital rule,‖ which was a ― requirement that their brokerages hold reserve capital that limited their leverage and risk exposure.‖ This was the biggest reason why the economic crisis happened. With the ― net capital rule‖ out of the way, Goldman Sachs and other major Wall Street firms with over $5 billion in assets were free to engage in high risk/high reward behavior. This led to the housing bubble with the creation of high risk speculation, essentially rigged Ponzi-style scams like ― mortgage-backed securities, credit derivatives, and credit default swaps… and other exotic structured

finance instruments that only highly-trained mathematicians understand, based on models that are beyond the comprehension of most traders.‖ After making over $700 million on these shady high risk activities that created a ticking time bomb in our economy, Paulson left Goldman Sachs to run the US Treasury. Shortly after that, the speculative trading scams blew up, and there was the man who played the most pivotal role in causing the economy to crash now running the US Treasury and in charge of ― maneuvering‖ trillions of dollars in national wealth to ―f ix‖ the economy. It was time for Paulson, along with his close confidant Tim Geithner, then heading the NY Federal Reserve Bank, and Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke, to engineer the greatest theft of wealth in history with the ― bailout.‖ Paulson quickly brought in several former Goldman Sachs partners to help him engineer the coup. A pivotal Paulson asset was former Goldman executive Dan Jester, who Paulson quickly hired as a ― contractor.‖ As Robert E. Prasch recently reported, ― Jester was never appointed by Congress or otherwise vetted before taking up his role as the Treasury‘s de facto central player in the crucial decisions that marked that fall‘s bailout of Wall Street.‖ Paulson‘s most publicized move was the $700 billion Troubled Assets Relief Program (TARP). This was a blatant no-strings attached giveaway of taxpayer money, handed directly to Wall Street‘s biggest players. To oversee the TARP operation, Paulson brought in Goldman Sachs Vice President Neel Kashkari. Another egregious unilateral move by Paulson was installing Edward Liddy, one of his former board members at Goldman Sachs, as CEO of AIG. Liddy was the Chairman of Goldman‘s Audit Committee, making him the most knowledgeable person regarding Goldman‘s collateralized debt obligations (CDOs). Paulson knew these CDOs would go bust because they were based on fraudulent activities, essentially a massive Ponzi scheme. So Paulson and Goldman Sachs covered their risk by insuring them through AIG, making it pivotal to save AIG and have one of his most trusted allies run the company. With Liddy in place, billions of taxpayer dollars were secretly funneled by the Geithner-led NY Federal Reserve through AIG to Goldman Sachs and several other Wall Street elite counterparties. Without the AIG bailout, Goldman Sachs would have collapsed as a result of their own Ponzi scheme. The assassinations of Goldman rivals Bear Stearns and Lehman Brothers, and the forced Bank of America acquisition of Merrill Lynch were all equally scandalous actions as well. The hidden hand of the Bernanke-led Federal Reserve‘s secret ―bla ck magic‖ tactics — which created and distributed trillions of dollars — turned Morgan Stanley and Goldman Sachs into bank holding companies overnight, which gave them access to trillions of dollars to further manipulate the market and create record setting profits. Every step of the way, the economic terrorist organization led by Paulson, Geithner and Bernanke held our economy hostage by declaring that all their demands must be met or the entire economy would be destroyed, as a result of the very actions the players being rewarded had taken. (I don‘t use the words ―e conomic terrorists‖ as hyperbole. The threat posed by them and the amount of death, destruction and misery they have already caused the United States is much greater than that caused by Bin Laden and AlQaeda - it‘s not even close.) Through the crisis, the fundamental structure of the stock market has been proven to be a scam. The Ponzi scheme activities, outright market manipulation and massive worldwide fraud perpetrated by Goldman Sachs, JP Morgan, Morgan Stanley, Citigroup, AIG, the three major ratings agencies and several other Wall Street elite firms are blatant. Just in the housing and oil futures markets alone, the criminal activity and economic theft is in the multi-trillions. By looking the other way, the SEC, Congress and Presidents Bush and Obama are complicit. An analysis of actions taken, or most often not taken, by the leaders of both the Republican and Democratic parties prove that

they are now accomplices. They have not only let it happen; they continue to look the other way and have been stonewalling laws, investigations and prosecutions in what is clearly criminal activity. If we had a nation of law, none of these things would have happened. This proves to anyone who cares to look that we now live in a Banana Republic. Our democracy has clearly become a farce. The overwhelming majority of our politicians are now on the Economic Elite payroll. This financial coup started under Hank Paulson in the Bush Administration and has been carried through, without even the slightest hitch, under Geithner in the Obama Administration, and all along Ben Bernanke has been leading the Federal Reserve. Bernanke‘s reconfirmation shows you who the co-conspirators are - just look at the members of Congress who voted for it. All three branches of our government are now complicit in what is literally the greatest theft of wealth in history, along with a mainstream ―ne ws‖ media that keeps going about their ― reporting,‖ as if this wasn‘t a crime, business as usual. Nothing to see here… Obama‘s Role As hard as it is for many Americans to admit, after a year in office it is now obvious, to those who study policy decisions, that Obama‘s rhetoric is very far from the reality of his actions. Outside of the tough talk Obama gives concerning ― Wall Street Bankers,‖ all evidence clearly demonstrates that he is their puppet. The list of decisions that he has made to support the Economic Elite at our expense is already extensive. As mentioned before, the fact that the bailout started under Bush and went straight through without a hitch under Obama is proof enough. On top of this, Obama‘s campaign was heavily financed by Goldman Sachs, and prior to the election Obama often spoke with Paulson. An analysis of phone records shows that Obama and Paulson engaged in 26 direct calls prior to the election. ― Paulson placed more than twice as many individual outgoing calls to [candidate] Obama (14) as to President Bush (6).‖ As soon as Obama was elected, he got rid of all the economic advisors he had during his campaign and replaced them with Wall Street insiders who were committed to ― turning the bailout into an all-out giveaway.‖ He took the main players that caused the economic crisis to begin with, and put them in charge of economic policy. Right from the start he appointed Tim Geithner, Paulson‘s right-hand man, to run the US Treasury. Mark Patterson, a former Goldman Sachs lobbyist, then became Geithner‘s Chief of Staff with the direct approval of Obama. Geithner has surrounded himself with many aides that formerly worked for Goldman Sachs, ― none of whom faced Senate confirmation.‖ Obama also allowed Adam Storch, a Goldman Sachs VP, to become ― the first chief operating officer of the Securities nominated and Exchange Commission‘s enforcement division.‖ Obama even ― Goldman Sachs executive Gary Gensler to head the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, which regulates futures markets.‖ Gensler was ― a high-level Treasury official in a 2000,‖ when he helped create a ― law that exempted the $58 trillion credit default swap market from oversight.‖ Another major player in the economic collapse was Larry Summers, who Obama quickly appointed as White House National Economic Council Director. All of this is, in essence, the final stage of a coup d‟état, with Obama now serving as their puppet. Obama clearly has not held the thieves accountable. He has emboldened them in ways that led to record setting profits and bonuses - bonuses that are 100% a direct result of our tax money. He let them take the money, keep the money, and now he lets them continue to make even more money.

Even now, with all his new anti-Wall Street talk, his proposals are extremely misguided and weak. Obama always deceptively frames the bailout discussion in relation to the $700 billion TARP program. He, along with the mainstream media, always seems to gloss over the fact that the bailout is much more than just the TARP program. TARP is a mere 2% of this multifaceted scam. His proposal of a tax on Wall Street firms to get some of our tax money back is estimated to bring in $90 billion over the next ten years. That works out to $9 billion a year, compare that to the $150 billion in bonuses handed out by these same firms… just in the past year! The top Wall Street firms would no longer even exist if we didn‘t bail them out. Their profits are a direct result of our tax money. If Obama is serious about getting our money back, 100% of the record-breaking bonus money that these thieves gave themselves should be going back into the tax system that it came from to pay down our national debt, lower our tax rates and create jobs. The $150 billion in bonuses handed out this year cost you $500 of your hard-earned money. For a family of four, that‘s $2000 that was taken from you and your family just this year and given directly to Wall Street bonuses. Think about that… Your personal money was taken from you and your family, and given directly to Goldman Sachs CEO Llyod Blankfein. In fact, your direct gift to Wall Street is much more than that; the $2000 your family lost was just for this year‘s bonuses, much more of your money was given away in the bailout. The real size of the bailout is estimated to be $14 trillion, which works out to be $46,662 for every man, woman and child in America. On top of being bailed out with our tax money, Goldman Sachs, which just had its most profitable quarter in its 140-year history, only paid 1% in taxes in 2008! And now that Obama has given trillions of our dollars to Wall Street, he is all of a sudden so concerned about our national deficit. That is disgraceful! When it came to the Economic Elite he could give away trillions, but when it comes to the social infrastructure of the American public and creating job programs, we all of a sudden have to be tight with our tax money and make ― painful choices.‖ When looking at Obama‘s latest $100 billion jobs program, again, compare that to the $150 billion in bonuses. If you want to know if Obama is serious about creating jobs, just look at where he gave his big ―Jobs Speech‖ - at the Business Roundtable affiliated Brookings Institution. Thus again, confirming where his true loyalties lie. Obama‘s sudden change of heart after the Massachusetts Senate election defeat is still more empty rhetoric. His new found support for Paul Volcker, and his proposals to bring back Glass-Steagall type laws to prevent another economic catastrophe sound great on the surface, but then you find out that Wall Street firms have already figured out ways around these proposed laws. While it would be great to have Volcker creating the rules over the Goldman Sachs-led team at the Treasury now, he is himself a former Federal Reserve Chairman who represents JP Morgan Chase interests. Jamie Dimon, current JP Morgan Chase CEO and Business Roundtable member, is considered by Obama to be a possible replacement for Geithner at the Treasury. Replacing Goldman Sachs interests with JP Morgan interests is hardly change for the 99% of Americans who have seen their interests ignored thus far. JP Morgan and Goldman Sachs are two heads of the same monster. An analysis of the ― Volcker Rules‖ shows you the essence of what Obama is all about. The ― Volcker Rules‖ are just more propaganda. First off, the rules do not go far enough. Simon Johnson testified before the Senate Banking Committee and summed them up by saying: ―w hile the principles behind these proposed rules are exactly on target… the specific rule changes would need to be much tougher if they are to have any effect.‖ Johnson earlier exposed the ― Volcker Rules‖ to merely be a ― marketing slogan.‖ Jeff Madrick, writing for the Roosevelt Institute, rightly questioned if Obama‘s economists even did their homework when putting together the rule. ― What is disturbing is how poorly the Volcker rule has been thought through. When first announced, it sounded like a worthy and needed step in the right direction, and a suggestion the Obama team was waking up to reality. But I also expected more sophisticated details to come. So far, there

are none… it looks like they didn‘t give it much thought before announcing the plan. This is a critical error in judgment.‖ Even if the flawed laws make it to the Senate floor, the Banking Committee has come out strongly against them as being too little, too late. To sum this all up, this is another case of Obama trying to make it look like he‘s doing something, when in reality, he isn‘t doing anything. This is similar to Obama‘s $75 billion taxpayer funded foreclosure-prevention program that has been a spectacular failure in stemming the foreclosure crisis. The Obama Administration knew the program wasn‘t working from the start, but they just sat back and let it continue to fail, wasting billions of taxpayer dollars in the process. Even Neil Barofsky, the special inspector general for the TARP program, said the following in his January 30th report to Congress: ― It is hard to see how any of the fundamental problems in the [financial] system have been addressed to date…. Even if TARP saved our financial system from driving off a cliff back in 2008, absent meaningful reform, we are still driving on the same winding mountain road, but this time in a faster car.‖ Now that the ― Too Big to Fail‖ Wall Street elite know that the government will come in to bail them out, they are engaging in even riskier behavior than before. As President Theodore Roosevelt once declared in a situation much like our current crisis, ― Corporation cunning has developed faster than the law of nation or state. Corporations have found ways to steal long before we have found that they were susceptible to punishment for theft. But sooner or later, unless there is a season of readjustment, there will come a riotous, wicked, murderous day of atonement…. These fools on Wall Street think that they can go on forever! They can‘t!‖ It is hard to face the fact that we have been so taken advantage of and abandoned by the very people we supported and had put our hope and faith into. Americans need to understand that Obama, along with most of the Democrats and Republicans are not looking out for our best interests. V: Overcoming the Divide and Conquer Strategy ― The conflicting propaganda of opposing parties is essentially what leads to political abstention. But this is not the abstention of the free spirit which asserts itself; it is the result of resignation, the external symptom of a series of inhibitions. Such a man has not decided to abstain; under diverse pressures, subjected to shocks and distortions, he can no longer (even if he wanted to) perform a political act. What is even more serious is that this inhibition not only is political, but also progressively takes over the whole of his being and leads to a general attitude of surrender.‖ — Jacques Ellul, Propaganda: The Formation of Men‘s Attitudes

The primary reason why the Economic Elite have gained such dominance is their commitment to psychological operations that divide-and-conquer the US public. They use their overwhelming influence over mainstream media outlets and political candidates in very clever ways to divide us.

It is known among political scientists that powerful forces always seek to gain control of pre-existing social and political institutions so they can usurp their powers. The Economic Elite gained control of both the Democratic and Republican political parties because they knew that hardworking Americans loyally followed these parties, and we believed these parties were looking out for our best interests. We have, for the most part, been lifelong Republicans or lifelong Democrats, but until we see that our favored party has been seized by power and greed addicted interests, we will all continue to lose. These are extremely hard truths to face, but until we face them, we will continue our decline.

With half the US population loyal to Democrats and the other half loyal to Republicans, gaining control of both these parties meant total control for them. The past decade is testament to their total control of both parties. In manufactured public opinion, Obama represented a far left swing in US politics, and Bush represented a far right swing, and these two supposed polar opposites also had a Congress overwhelmingly run by members of their own party. Did we get drastically different policies? In what matters most, in both cases, the results were the same: more money and power for the Economic Elite and the continued decline of the US middle class. This fact is now undeniable. Yes, there are definite differences in their rhetoric and on some social issues, but this is the key to the psychological operations, to the divide-and-conquer strategy that they use so effectively. To distract and divide us, they use rhetoric on social issues like religion, gay marriage, abortion, etc., all serious and significant issues that we bitterly disagree on, but in the overall picture, these issues are secondary to the larger, more fundamental political and economic issues that lead to our wealth being stolen from us, and ultimately, our lives being increasingly dominated by a small few. Bush appealed to conservative Republicans and then ran up the deficit to record levels. Obama appealed to liberal Democrats, but increased war spending and support for Wall Street billionaires. In both cases, the candidates severely divided the US middle class, but in the policy decisions that mattered most, they both sided with the economic top one percent at the expense of hardworking Americans. Just look at the last few election cycles. In 2006 and 2008 US citizens rose up in record-breaking numbers to kick out the Republicans in power, whom they felt had betrayed them. Now, with the Democrats in power, the consensus seems to be that in the 2010 mid-term elections we will vote for Republicans and kick out the Democrats who have failed to deliver on the much needed and promised changes. Do you not see the ridiculous nature of this divide-and-conquer strategy? This is a vicious cycle that will continue to lead to our destruction. Psychological Operations 101: Obama Vs. Fox News For those of us who are strong enough to see beyond our propagandainduced preconceptions and prejudices, the insidious nature of the Economic Elite‘s divide-and-conquer strategy is on full display in the feud between Obama and Fox News. About half of the country loves Obama and hates Fox News, and the other half loves Fox News but hates Obama. They both use very effective propaganda to seduce their followers. However, as hard as it is for people who love one of them to admit, they both serve the same masters. Once again, let‘s look at Goldman Sachs. They financed Obama‘s campaign and he has rewarded them with policies that have led to them making record-breaking profits, instead of investigating them for the many illegal activities they participated in and continue to take part in. On the other side of this psychological operation, you have Fox News. When was the last time you saw Fox News doing an investigation into the illegal practices of Goldman Sachs? Even the Obama-appointed Tim Geithner, the Economic Elite‘s main man on the economy, escapes the significant focus of Fox News‘ powerful attack force. Looking at the Business Roundtable, a significant majority of Obama‘s campaign funding came from Roundtable members and, as mentioned earlier, he frequently meets with Roundtable members. On the other hand, Fox News is owned by Roundtable member Rupert Murdoch, and Fox relies heavily on advertising

money from Roundtable members. Rupert Murdoch even supported Obama over McCain. As someone who monitors Fox News, I can‘t recall the last time I heard Fox reporting on the activities of the Business Roundtable, not that any mainstream ―ne ws‖ companies do. The list of similarities between the two, when it comes to exposing and holding the Economic Elite accountable, is extensive. So here you have an excellent divide-and-conquer psychological operation. Fox News declares Obama the enemy, and Obama declares Fox the enemy, yet the Economic Elite remain in the shadows, behind the scenes, untouched and continuing their plunder. Just think of all the misplaced outraged spent on these two puppets. Sure, people have many reasons to like and dislike both, but imagine if all the diehard Obama-haters focused their rage on the people who put Obama in power, and if the diehard Fox-haters stopped criticizing everything Fox says and focused on the Economic Elite who control the media environment in which Fox News operates. If the Fox-haters and the Obama-haters united and focused their combined outrage on the common forces behind the both of them, we would all be much better off. The most significant bias in the mainstream media is not the liberal or conservative views propagated to divide, distract, confuse and create apathy among the populace; the ultimate bias is in what is missing from the coverage. The investigative reporting on the most powerful forces within our society is left out of the discussion. McClatchy, one of the few real journalism news organizations, has repeatedly reported on the illegal activities of Goldman Sachs and the crime syndicate they operate in. Yet, an overwhelming majority of mainstream news outlets ignore these reports and nothing is done to hold Goldman Sachs accountable. In fact, two of the leading figures in the outright theft of our money have recently been lauded in their propaganda press. When you see Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke become the Person of the Year in Time Magazine and Goldman Sachs CEO Llyod Blankfein become the Financial Times Man of the Year, you begin to see where the real media bias lies. The main bias is in favor of the thieves who stole our country and economy, and own the mainstream media companies. The omni-present mainstream media is the greatest weapon of oppression humanity has ever known. Although the Internet has had an impact, television news is still by far the most influential news medium. Despite all the new information platforms, this year we have set a new record by watching an average of four hours and 49 minutes of TV per day. We have been subjected to heavy doses of propaganda on a daily basis, for hours a day, every day of our lives. The mainstream media creates what is known in mass psychology as the ― spectrum of thinkable thought.‖ By constantly discussing and debating surface issues, they limit the range of debate. Having the Republican vs. Democrat paradigm leads us to never debating the underlying Economic Elite who control both of the parties, not to mention their ownership of the media platform on which this debate is taking shape. The more important underlying issues are never discussed, and therefore never enter public consciousness. The censorship that is most prevalent today is the most dangerous form. Not the censorship of explicit words, sex, or violence, but the censorship of any thoughts outside of elite corporate ideology. Any debate that leads to critical thought on prevailing elite economic dominance is not allowed to enter into the mass media or mainstream public consciousness. ― We must conclude that a changeover is imminent and ineluctable in the co-opted caste who serve the interests of domination, and above all manage the protection of that domination. In such an affair, innovation will surely

not be displayed [in the mainstream media]. It appears instead like lightning, which we know only when it strikes.‖ — Guy Debord, Comments on the Society of the Spectacle

VI: How to Fight Back and Win: ——Common Ground Issues That Must Be Won

Throughout this report, I have presented statistical and fact-based evidence to demonstrate that a strategic attack has been launched against 99% of Americans. Despite the efforts of the mainstream media and most current politicians, awareness of this reality is spreading throughout the United States. A recent Rasmussen poll found that only 21% of Americans think that the government has the consent of the governed. An Opinion Research Corp. survey revealed that 86% believe ― the system of government is broken.‖ An overwhelming majority of the population has come to the realization that our government doesn‘t effectively represent us anymore. It is just a matter of time before people start taking it upon themselves to begin organizing on a mass scale. Our survival instinct will soon overwhelm our conditioned passivity and erupt into a powerful countervailing force. However, the longer we hesitate and delay action, the harder it will be to obtain economic and political justice. We cannot continue to stand by and watch our nation be raped and pillaged like this. We can no longer remain idle and passive while our families‘ futures are destroyed as we are sentenced to a slow death.

It’s time for 99% of Americans to mobilize and aggressively move on common sense political reforms. We will obviously have many differences on how our country should be run, but we can all come together to dismantle the Economic Elite by making several pivotal political reforms. As long as the game is rigged in favor of the Economic Elite, we will all lose. So let‘s find common ground and focus on several obvious battles that we need to win, and can win: Election Reform

“The right of voting for representatives is the primary right by which all other rights are protected. To take away this right is to reduce a man to slavery.” – Thomas Paine, Dissertation on the First Principles of Government

* Electronic Voting: First and foremost, no private corporation should be able to tell us who has won an election without providing an auditable paper trail. Many Democrats felt that Bush stole the 2000 and 2004 elections, and many Republicans felt Obama stole the 2008 election. Of course people are going to feel that

elections are stolen when you have a private corporation secretly counting the votes; it is the inevitable result when you can‘t verify the election results. In the past few years companies that count the votes have been consolidating, and one company, ES&S, now secretly controls the majority of all our votes. As voting watchdog Brad Friedman stated, ― With the ES&S takeover of Diebold/Premier, their nearest competitor, the privately-run election Goliath now has an un-overseeable lock on virtually every election in the United States of America.‖ It is common sense to say that this is way too much power to be put into one private corporation. * Campaign Finance: The stunning ruling by the Supreme Court to allow unlimited political spending by the Economic Elite has made a bad situation even worse. We must level the playing field by enacting laws to prevent the overwhelming influence of big money interests in controlling politicians who are forced to pander to them for the ever-increasing need to raise more and more money to have any shot at winning public office. Statistics show how much the Economic Elite already dominate this process: over 90% of the time the candidate who simply spends more money on their campaign wins the election. * The Two-Party Oligarchy: We must end the two-party system by funding and voting for alternative parties. It is absurd and completely outdated to only have two dominant political parties in a technologically advanced nation of 309 million people. The two-party paradigm is obsolete and creates a system easily manipulated, as the past decade proves with the co-option of the Democratic and Republican parties. We can give our money and support to whomever we like - Libertarians, Tea Party, Progressives, Greens, Independents and the many soon-to-be-created political groups. However, it is pivotal that we immediately cease support for both the Republican and Democratic parties. We understand that there are representatives from both parties who are fighting for our interests, but they are very few and easily marginalized by paid-off party leaders. * Getting on the Ballot: Republicans and Democrats have created rules to make it increasingly difficult for opposing political parties to even get on the voting ballot. We must make this process easier and invite new parties onto the ticket. * Debate Commission: The Democratic and Republican control over who is allowed to participate in the nationally televised debates gives the two parties an insurmountable advantage over any other parties. If you are not even allowed to participate in them, you have no shot at winning. Along with this, all candidates should be given a fair share of television coverage. * Voter Registration: If you are a citizen, you should be automatically registered to vote. Governmental Policy Formation * Secrecy, Transparency and Accountability: Government secrecy is at the root of most of our current societal and economic problems. When decisions are made in secrecy, corruption will most often be the result. By throwing light and investigation on the government policy process, we can easily expose the Economic Elite‘s agenda and limit their influence. As part of this, all legislation and conference reports must be posted online prior to Congressional debate and vote. * Lobbying: Along with campaign finance, political lobbying is another way the Economic Elite can easily manipulate our political process financially, in what amounts to legalized bribery. In 2009, a record amount of money was spent lobbying Congress, and now with the new Supreme Court ruling, lobbyists will have even more power to manipulate the political process with what amounts to buying the laws of our nation. Lobbying activities behind closed doors must cease entirely and equal time must be given, transparently, to all the parties directly affected by the law being written. * Shutting the Revolving Door: No politician should be allowed to profit from government laws or policies which they have written or supported. The practice of leaving a major company to become a politician who then creates and/or supports laws that directly benefit the corporation he or she used to work for, or, conversely,

politicians who leave public office to take a high-paying job for a company they have benefited, is a grotesque abuse and manipulation of the democratic process. The revolving door between politics and big business is worse than it has ever been and has corrupted the government like never before. Information Platforms * Media Concentration: Having a few large multinational corporations dominating the overwhelming majority of our news and information system will never lead to an informed citizenry. Only ten multinational corporations dominate our mainstream media system. These companies are run by 118 individuals who actively work to propagate Economic Elite rule. The people who run these media companies also sit on other corporate boards that often represent a major conflict of interest. Having only 118 people in ten companies dominating a system that creates public opinion for 309 million people is absurd. We must break up this information cartel and support a more diverse and vibrant independent press that fosters real investigative journalism. * Net Neutrality: The free and open architecture of the Internet is vital to our success. Without an open Internet our most powerful medium for research and communication, and key organizing tool, will be lost. The Internet must be protected from growing forces that seek to control it by limiting our access to information and our ability to communicate on a mass scale. Healthcare * Medical Costs: We have disagreements on how to best provide healthcare, but we all agree that whatever the method, the result needs to be lower costs. We have the most expensive healthcare system in the world and we now pay twice as much as other nations. Other than creating huge salaries for health industry-related executives, there isn‘t any reason why we should be forced to pay such outrageous sums of money for second-rate care. No American should die due to lack of money, or have to face bankruptcy in order to get life-sustaining treatments. * Food and Water Supply: Our food and water supply systems have become a major health hazard. The amount of harmful chemicals found in both our food and water have reached record levels and is causing alarming levels of sickness in a growing number of people. Real Economic Competition * Most Americans Believe in Competition: If a person works hard, is productive and good at what they do, most everyone believes that they should make more than a person who sits around looking for handouts. However, just as in sports, to maintain a competitive environment you have to have rules in place that prevent people from having an unfair advantage. For those who believe in competition, in capitalism and free markets, you have to acknowledge that what we have now is not a free market based on fair competition. It is a rigged market, where larger institutions like Goldman Sachs and JP Morgan have an unfair advantage. We cannot allow them to be beyond the law, manipulate the market and then receive taxpayer funds to increase profits and risk-taking while smaller companies, outside of Economic Elite circles, have to play by a much stricter set of rules. You can‘t have free market capitalism when you have government policies favoring companies that have more political clout than others. What we have is socialism for the rich and trickle down economics for the rest of us. We have a market systemically designed to funnel money into the pockets of the richest. If the past few years have proved anything, they have proved that our economy is much more like a pyramid scheme than a free market, where the more money you have, the more money you make. So whatever your economic beliefs and theories might be, let‘s all come together to admit that our ― free market‖ is an illusion. We need to make the economic playing field fair so we that can have real competition.

* Redistribution of Wealth: Due to the rigging of our economic and political system, vast sums of wealth have been hoarded by the Economic Elite over the past 40 years. This money must be redistributed to the 99% of Americans who have been robbed and exploited. There will be much heated debate over how this money should be distributed, but we all need to agree that we must first hold the Economic Elite accountable and our wealth must be seized from them. Restore the Rule of Law * Investigations and Prosecutions: The Financial Crisis Inquiry Commission has the power to reveal the inner workings of the financial coup. We must apply intense public pressure and scrutiny to force the Commission into conducting a real investigation. Another urgent priority needs to be a much wider-ranging look at war profiteering. There has been some investigation, but not nearly enough and hardly any prosecution. These are just two of the many investigations that need to be launched. As long as we keep letting the Economic Elite get away with outright theft in broad daylight, we will never be able to restore a nation of law.

There are obviously other vital issues that need to be addressed,

but these are the core common-ground issues that we must urgently rally around and support. Unless we organize and take decisive action on all these issues, we will all suffer the consequences of our collective inaction. Any politician who does not urgently move on these issues must be voted out of office and replaced by people who will aggressively fight on these fronts. These are the core issues that keep the Economic Elite in power. As famed military strategist Carl von e hub of all power and Clauswitz wrote in his study ― On War,‖ it is pivotal to strike at this core structure, at ―th movement, on which everything depends.‖ To those Americans who feel powerless to change things, I say that your feelings are only a result of your induced delusion. You have become so propagandized that you do not even understand the significant position that you are in. We are not peasants trapped in a Third World existence. We are still a mass of people who have the power to change the course of history. The Economic Elite realize this, which is why they are attacking us with an increased intensity. Why We Must Take Mass Organized Action Now: The Devastation Ahead Market Watch recently ran an article entitled, ― Death of American Capitalism: The 10 final scenes.‖ The article references Charlie Munger, Warren Buffett‘s long-time investment partner, stating: ―Mun ger is warning us ‗It‘s Over‘ for America. Yes, ‗o-v-e-r,‘ America‘s in decline, at the end-of-days, coming to ‗financial ruin,‘ says Munger.‖ As a result of the Economic Elite‘s attack on us, the inequality of wealth between the economic top one percent and the remaining 99% of the population is the highest it has ever been in our nation‘s history. The Robber Barons of the Gilded Age have now been overtaken as America‘s most depraved and despotic class. As this attack continues, social safety nets and important public functions that are already reaching a breaking point will collapse under the weight of prolonged decline. With the national deficit now at an all-time high, economists are expecting major cutbacks in vital government programs and tax increases ― that aren‘t even imaginable.‖ President Obama has recently put together a ― Deficit Commission‖ and is prepared to make ― painful choices.‖ Many state economies are already running high deficits and preparing for deep cuts in Medicaid and retirement pensions. Major cuts in Social Security payments are also a real possibility.

On top of the 160 banks that have already failed in the past year, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) has listed another 702 banks as being in danger of failing. These banks ― collectively hold more than $400 billion in assets‖ and the FDIC is already operating at ― a deficit of nearly $21 billion as of Dec. 31, or more than double the previous quarter.‖ With 30 million Americans now unemployed and underemployed, over the next few months five million people will lose the unemployment benefits which they have been surviving off of. Unemployment benefits in 27 states have already gone into the red. In total 40 state programs are expected to go broke. Even the most optimistic economists believe high unemployment rates will continue for the foreseeable future. Millions more will be added to the five million families who have already been kicked out of their homes, as the number of foreclosures is expected to reach 13 million within the next few years. Food and homeless shelters are already overwhelmed, and there will be millions more in need of these life-sustaining services. 50 million Americans are currently in need of food stamps for survival and approximately 20,000 new people are added to this total every day. Despite all the healthcare reform talk, the bill still being discussed will do little to reduce costs and extend coverage to those who urgently need it, as insurance rates continue to rise. The number of Americans without health insurance continues to skyrocket to now well over 50 million, with 45,000 preventable US citizen deaths occurring per year. Due to economic hardship, the number of people suffering from psychological depression has hit an all-time high, as suicide rates keep rising. With a prison population of 2.3 million people, we now have more people incarcerated than any other nation in the world. Our per capita rate of 700 people imprisoned per 100,000 citizens is higher than the darkest days of the Soviet Union. On top of this, the prison industry is expecting major growth over the next few years, as a ― new prison opens every week somewhere in America‖ and Obama commits more tax dollars for the federal Bureau of Prisons. All told, the death and destruction wrought by this economic crisis is equivalent to a 9/11 attack every single week! And the attacks continue unabated, with no significant measures taken to defend against them and hold those responsible accountable. With almost 200 million Americans now living paycheck to paycheck, and over 50 million already living in poverty, people are quickly running out of options. The clock is ticking loudly for them, and time delayed is time closer to death. At the same time, Americans are arming themselves at an alarming rate. The demand for guns and ammunition has hit a record high, and the gun industry cannot produce enough bullets to keep up with orders. In the past year, 100 new armed militia groups have been formed, as militia members have doubled in numbers. Federal authorities are gravely concerned about the ― uptick in militia activities.‖ One federal authority recently said, ― All it‘s lacking is a spark. I think it‘s only a matter of time before you see threats and violence.‖ The recent suicide-bomber who hit the IRS building in Texas will be the first of many violent acts if we don‘t demonstrate that justice and the rule of law can be restored in a non-violent manner. Suicide-bombers have already reeked havoc in many countries across the globe. As the last act of revenge and desperation, people throughout the world have increasingly resorted to this method of violence and terror. Fate has placed us in our nation‘s most pivotal moment. If we do not take it upon ourselves to lead in decisive non-violent mass action, our country will soon be torn apart by violence and destruction. In our nation‘s history, the stakes have never been higher. It is vital that we recognize the urgent gravity of the situation. What happens over the next few years will determine the fate of our very way of life, of our families‘

very existence. We have been attacked, and we are now at war. This is the unfortunate reality of our current crisis. Our enemy is extraordinarily powerful. However, we are 99% of the US population, and they are only 1%. If we fight, we win!

“Power concedes nothing without a demand. It never has, and it never will.” – Frederick Douglass

― All men recognize the right of revolution; that is, the right to refuse allegiance to, and to resist, the government, when its tyranny or its inefficiency is great and unendurable. And oppression and robbery are organized, I say; let us not have such a machine any longer. I think that it is not too soon for honest men to rebel and revolutionize.‖ – Henry David Thoreau, On the Duty of Civil Disobedience

― We have no choice left…. A concealed yes drives us that is stronger than all our no‘s. Our strength itself will no longer endure us in the old decaying soil. We venture away, we venture ourselves! We know of a new world.‖ – Friedrich Nietzsche

GET INVOLVED: We are going to begin outreach to organizations that are working on the core common ground issues mentioned in this report. If you plan to take action on any of these issues or would like to be involved in this effort, please sign up here. Support this work by ordering the full report in book format. Download full report with graphics and links. Download printer-friendly version.

Watch America Freedom to Fascism:

Is It Time for Law Abiding American Citizens to Stop Paying Their Taxes and Start a New Government? Posted on Wednesday, March 31st, 2010 at 11:50 am, By David DeGraw, AmpedStatus Report

The evidence is now overwhelming. The United States government has facilitated the theft of trillions of dollars of national wealth and 99% of the US population no longer has political representation. ——-I: The Ongoing Theft of Trillions ——-II: Off-the-Books, Off-the-Record ——-III: Osama bin Bank of America ——-IV: New Mafia World Order ——-V: The Goldman Sachs Obama Illusion ——-VI: American Heroes Speak Out on the Financial Reform Ruse ——-VII: Economic Weapon of Mass Destruction (WMDs) ——-VIII: Hank ―Pentagon Sachs‖ Paulson ——-IX: $5.4 Trillion a Year Bullion Market Ponzi Scheme ——-X: Ponzi Nation: Welcome to America, Sucker ——-XI: Economic Shock and Awe ——-XII: Time for a Second American Revolution - The 99% Movement ——-XIII: How You Can Get Involved > Download printer-friendly version of full report . > Download full report with graphics and links. > Support this work by ordering The Economic Elite Vs. The People of the USA.

Now that I have your attention, I want to make it clear to you that I am being rational and serious when I ask this question: Is it time for law abiding American citizens to stop paying their taxes and start a new government?

Before you roll your eyes and dismiss me as some ― extremist,‖ let me explain the situation to those who are unfamiliar with my past reports. In my report on the Economic Elite Vs. The People of the United States, I lay out the case proving that our economy and tax system has become an organized criminal operation. I defy anyone who spends time researching and analyzing the facts and overwhelming evidence to support this claim to prove otherwise. I invite anyone who thinks I‘m wrong to a debate on national television. I‘m talking to you, Tim Geithner, Ben Bernanke, Larry Summers, Lloyd Blankfein, Jamie Dimon and President Obama! I torturously spend 60 plus hours a week researching this and the torrent of devastating news and evidence is mounting by the minute. The staggering level of theft continues unabated. As I am watching this unfold, I am horrified thinking about the severe consequences that have only just begun to reap their toll. Our nation is being raped and pillaged. Our future is going up in flames and our government isn‘t even making the slightest effort to put out the fire. In fact, they are purposely pouring gasoline all over it. ― There‘s a time when the operation of the machine becomes so odious—makes you so sick at heart—that you can‘t take part. You can‘t even passively take part. And you‘ve got to put your bodies upon the gears and upon the wheels, upon the levers, upon all the apparatus, and you‘ve got to make it stop. And you‘ve got to indicate to the people who run it, to the people who own it that… the machine will be prevented from working at all.‖ – Mario Savio So let me take a deep breath and back up for a minute… and explain the urgent gravity of our current crisis. I: The Ongoing Theft of Trillions The first thing people need to understand is that the economic crash wasn‘t a crash for the people who caused it. In fact, these financial terrorists are now doing better than ever. In a recent report, titled ― Social Inequality in America: Widening Income Disparities,‖ more evidence of the unprecedented transfer of wealth was revealed: ― As of late 2009, the number of billionaires soared from 793 to 1,011, and their total fortunes from $2.4 trillion to $3.6 trillion…. Despite the crisis, the list of billionaires has grown by 218 people and their aggregate capital has expanded by 50%. This may seem paradoxical, but only at first glance. This result was predictable, if we recall how governments all over the world have dealt with the economic crisis.‖ The inequality of wealth in the United States between the economic top 0.5% and the remaining 99.5% of the population is now at an all-time high. The economic top 1% of the population now controls a record 70% of all financial assets. The point here is that while the economic crisis has been devastating for 99% of America, the Wall Street elite are awash in record breaking profits. The most profitable firm in Wall Street history, Goldman Sachs, just had their most profitable quarter in their 140-year history and Wall Street firms issued an all-time record breaking amount in bonuses. All of this is occurring after giving these firms $14 TRILLION in taxpayer support - that works out to be $46,662 of your hard-earned money. That‘s $46,662 for every man, woman and child in this country. If you have a family of four, sorry, your future just got robbed and you and your children just lost $186,648! So what are all these firms doing with these record-breaking profits? Are they returning them into the tax system in which they came from, the tax system that was looted just to keep their scam running? No!

Let‘s start with Wells Fargo. After being bailed out with our money in 2008, their top five executives DOUBLED their compensation and each one of them made over $11 million in 2009. Wells Fargo CEO John Stumpf made off with a cool $21.3 million last year. And now comes news that Bank of America and Wells Fargo will pay zero, yes ZERO in federal taxes for 2009. Bank of America will net a $3.6 BILLION benefit from the federal government in 2009. Wells Fargo, after $8 BILLION in earnings for 2009, will net $4 BILLION from the federal government. So you and I are working our asses off just to make ends meet, paying 30% of our limited income in taxes, and gizillionaire John Stumpf‘s company is paying ZERO in taxes so that he can personally swipe another $21.3 million of tax payer funds. Al Capone is a dime store thief compared to this guy! Well, to be fair, Mr. Stumpf is just a small-timer himself in this all-time greatest heist. JP Morgan Chase made $12 BILLION in profit in 2009, as a direct result of our tax money - yes, I need to keep repeating this fact. These are profits that would not exist if it weren‘t for our tax dollars. It‘s also important to point out that this is just the level of theft that has already occurred. However, as I also can‘t stress enough, the theft still continues without any let-up. Now comes news that JP Morgan is on the verge of getting a $1.4 BILLION tax refund! Yes, you heard me right, a $1.4 BILLION TAX REFUND. But JP is not alone in this latest theft. In total, the financial terrorists are due to receive $33 BILLION IN TAX REFUNDS! Do you comprehend how depraved it is to give these people another $33 billion in tax refunds? I assume that they‘re thinking that after stealing $14 TRILLION, another $33 billion really isn‘t all that much. After all, last year, Goldman Sachs, the most profitable firm Wall Street history, only paid 1% in taxes, so what‘s another $33 billion kickback among friends? Let‘s be clear about this latest $33 billion of which the US tax system is being robbed. What could we do with $33 billion? For one, we could put over one million unemployed people back to work and pay them the average national median wage for the next year. Add the record-breaking $150 billion in bonuses (our tax money) that Wall Street handed out this past year to the $33 billion and guess what? We can now put over six million people back to work making the average annual wage! Do you think that would stimulate the economy? Green shots galore. But why do that? Jamie Dimon needs another new 40,000 square foot mansion and Goldman Sachs needs to upgrade their fleet of luxury jets filled with the finest wine, champagne, cigars and hot tubs. Maybe we could use that $33 billion to save some of the hundreds of schools that are being forced to close this year due to devastating State budget deficits. Or maybe pay the thousands of teachers who just found out that their jobs have been cut. How about using that money to feed the 50% of US children who need to use food stamps during their childhood to eat? How about using it to give a raise to the 15 million US workers who work 40 hours or more a week and still fall below the poverty line. Wait, I know, how about helping the millions of Americans who have been foreclosed upon due to JP Morgan‘s predatory lending schemes and illegal subprime ― liar‘s loans.‖

And don‘t even get me started again on how we can better use the $14 TRILLION that Wall Street made off with… People of the United States to Obama: Hello! This is happening on your watch! Change We Can Believe In! Oh, but wait… it gets even better. This just in from the Roosevelt Institute: De facto bailout for Freddie and Frannie Did the Fed and the Treasury orchestrate a de facto bailout of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac — at public expense and sans Congressional approval? John Hussman thinks so. He provides a detailed account of just how 1.5 trillion dollars got diverted to Freddie and Fannie — money that we can all kiss goodbye. American taxpayers, it seems, have gotten the middle finger once again. And then in comes this little known, highly underreported news item: U.S. Taxpayers on Hook for $5 Trillion of Fannie, Freddie Debt ― After years of winks and nods, there‘s no doubt that Fannie and Freddie now enjoy an explicit guarantee, according to most observers. The U.S. government placed Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac in conservatorship in September 2008: ‗This means that the U.S. Taxpayer now stands behind $5 trillion of GSE debt,‘ according to the Congressional Research Service.‖ Hank ― Pentagon-Sachs‖ Paulson‘s right-hand man Tim Geithner, now Obama‘s hand-picked Treasury Secretary e and point man for the continued looting, recently assured his friends on the Financial Services Committee: ―W will do everything necessary to ensure these institutions have the capital they need to meet their commitments.‖ Geithner then acknowledged that US taxpayers will take ― very substantial‖ losses on this bailout. Yep, Obama‘s Chief-of-Theft, Rahm ― Freddie Mac Daddy‖ Emanuel‘s former company now has unlimited ability to rob taxpayer money and is making off with $5 TRILLION. And I thought Cheney‘s Halliburton was as bad as it could get. Yes We Can… Get Robbed Even More! But don‘t worry, if you thought the past two years were bad, the history books will recall them as a walk in the park compared to what is coming our way. You don‘t have trillions looted from the economy and continue to just keep going about your life business as usual. I wish I was wrong, and I wish this was just my opinion, but facts are facts and every societal and economic indicator says things are going to get worse, MUCH WORSE.

II: Off-the-Books, Off-the-Record Did you happen to catch the underreported news about the Lehman Brothers‘ bankruptcy? Turns out that Lehman Brothers‘ was playing Enronstyle accounting games and hid BILLIONS of dollars of debt using a ― gimmick‖ called ― repo 105″ to keep losses off their balance sheet. If you haven‘t read the 2000 page report yet, you might want to, because the Lehman Brothers scandal is not an isolated incident by any means. It is a revealing look into ― standard‖ and ― routine‖ accounting practices used by

all the large politically-connected Wall Street firms. It is standard operating procedure in this organized criminal enterprise that poses as free enterprise - a rigged market that pretends to be a free market. The theory that people didn‘t know about Lehman‘s accounting scam is, to put it kindly, not based in reality. Financial reporter Max Keiser revealed Wall Street‘s accounting scams, back in July of 2008, in a report titled, ― Peek-A-Boo Accounting and the Crash of Financial Stocks on Wall Street.‖ Here‘s how Max put it almost two years ago: ― Since it was discovered that Enron was hiding debt off their balance sheet to make their earnings, stock and stock options go up, Wall Street has decided they can‘t get enough of this neat trick and every quarter we see more of it. It‘s peek-a-boo accounting where debts are removed from the balance sheet during the period when disclosure is needed (for quarterly earnings reports) and the debt is temporarily parked back onto the company‘s balance sheet, or parked on another bank‘s balance sheet with an implied reciprocal agreement. (Enron had hundreds of shell companies that served as ‗debt parking lots‘ to avoid having to include any liabilities on their quarterly earnings statement). Lehman Brothers looks like they are trying to out-Enron Enron in the peek-a-boo accounting department.‖ Eliot Spitzer, once known as the Sheriff of Wall Street, and white-collar crime expert William Black released a report calling the accounting tricks on Wall Street a three card Monte scam for suckers. While calling for an ― immediate Congressional investigation,‖ they explained: ― Our investigations have shown for years that accounting is the ‗weapon of choice‘ for financial deception…. As our December co-author Frank Partnoy recently explained as part of a major report of the Roosevelt Institute, ‗Make Markets Be Markets‘, such abusive off-balance accounting was and is endemic. It was a major cause of the financial crisis, and it will lead to future crises…. The Valukas report also exposes the dysfunctional relationship between the country‘s main regulatory bodies and the systemically dangerous institutions (SDIs) they are supposed to be policing. The NY Fed, the regulatory agency led by then FRBNY President Geithner, has a clear statutory mission to promote the safety and soundness of the banking system and compliance with the law. Yet it stood by while Lehman deceived the public through a scheme that FRBNY officials likened to a ‗three card monte routine‘.… The FRBNY remained willing to lend to an institution with misleading accounting and neither remedied the accounting nor notified other regulators who may have had the opportunity to do so. The Fed wanted to maintain a fiction that toxic mortgage products were simply misunderstood assets, so it allowed Lehman to maintain the false pretense of its accounting.‖ Here‘s another highly important fact that has been left out of media reports concerning Lehman‘s scam: The Federal Reserve not only hid the information on the massive scam, they most likely taught these companies how to do it! A very important piece of this puzzle was revealed to me in a discussion I had with Larry Park, the founder of The Foundation for the Advancement of Monetary Education (FAME). Former Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker wrote a book called ―Changing Fortunes‖ back in 1993. In the book, Volcker talks about inventing this same scam by manipulating the Bank of Mexico‘s books: ― … it was a matter of buying time. In an effort to hold things together psychologically, we agreed with considerable unease to extend overnight swap credits once or twice to the Bank of Mexico to bolster the month end figures for their dollar reserves. We would transfer the money each month on the day before the reserves were added up, and take it back the next day. Our unease did not arise from any fear of financial loss, but

because the ‗window dressing‘ disguised the full extent of the pressures on Mexico from the bank lenders and from the Mexicans themselves.‖ So there you have it, another devil child spawn from the Federal Reserve… ― peek-a-boo‖ voodoo accounting. By the way, Bank of (Zero Taxes) America also used ― peek-a-boo‖ voodoo to hide debt. So to sum this up in plain English, the government looks the other way as they illegally hide massive debt and then doesn‘t even bother collecting any taxes from them. Did you get that, people? Just burn your mortgage and credit card bills, get one of your close friends (Ernst and Young) to say the debt on them doesn‘t exist and then you won‘t have to pay off any of your debt or have to pay any taxes. In fact, just incorporate yourself and tell the government to give you a couple billion in tax dollars. It works for the thieves on Wall Street! Before moving on, I must also mention that Bank of (Zero Taxes) America has been caught robbing people and committing fraud repeatedly, as Gary Null revealed, they have spent ―$14.9billion to settle 15 [court] cases.‖ Which is just part of the ― over $430 billion [that] has been paid to parties by Wall Street firms in over 1500 cases.‖ III: Osama bin Bank of America Let‘s also not forget that Bank of America kept pumping money into the terrorist financing bank, Bank of Credit and Commerce International (BCCI), as I detailed in a report I put together back in 2004. Bank of America single-handedly kept BCCI alive by secretly funneling them a BILLION dollars a DAY, even after BCCI was caught funding Pakistan‘s nuclear weapon‘s project, Saddam Hussein‘s chemical weapons, Osama bin Laden‘s al Queada network, the Palestinian Liberation Organization, Manuel Noriega‘s drug trade, the drug war in Nicaragua, the Iran-Contra Affair, along with the vast majority of the world‘s largest drug dealers and terrorists. BCCI also pioneered most of the tricks used on Wall Street that led to the economic crisis. They were a significant player in the Savings and Loan scandal as well, and were the financing arm for the largest covert operations in the CIA‘s history. The harsh truth is that most of today‘s biggest terrorist networks wouldn‘t even exist if it wasn‘t for Bank of America‘s support of BCCI. In ―The Outlaw Bank,‖ investigative reporters Jonathan Beaty & S.C. Gwynne revealed the significant role Bank of America played: ― Five of Bank of America‘s senior officers were either on BCCI‘s board of directors or helped to manage Abedi‘s bank. For the next decade the two banks would move billions of dollars a week through each other‘s international offices, and the Bank of America would be an invaluable, if hidden, ally, since it would continue to accept BCCI‘s letter-of-credit business after virtually no other Western bank would touch it. Indeed, it could be argued that Bank of America became the single most important financial institution helping BCCI stay afloat. In the United States alone, Bank of America transferred more than $1 billion a day for BCCI until the moment of BCCI‟s global seizure in July 1991. Thus Bank of America acted as a sort of global vacuum cleaner, sucking up many BCCI branch deposits and thereby providing the fuel Abedi needed to keep his Ponzi scheme alive….‖

Most everyone on the planet, thanks to a ― news‖ system that has no memory of these issues, seems to have conveniently forgotten that BCCI was, literally, al Queada. How is it that our multi-million dollar ― news‖ operations can‘t seem to connect these dots and don‘t have any memory of this highly significant chapter in US history? This proves that these media companies are in the business of propaganda, not informing the public as they are legally obligated to do. Bank of America surrogate, Khalid bin Mahfouz, who is a Saudi and was known as the most powerful banker in the Middle East, also was business partners with Dick Cheney, George Bush, Enron‘s Ken Lay and 9/11 Commission Chairman Thomas Kean - so it‘s not surprising that this was all left out of the 9/11 commissions report. Here‘s some more significant information that seems to have been redacted from the history book… Mahfouz was BCCI‘s Chief Operating Officer and also Bin Laden‘s main money man. He was intimately involved with James Baker and Dick Cheney‘s ― Strategy of the Silk Route‖ plan to build an oil pipeline through Afghanistan in a joint venture called CentGas. Hamid Karzai, Afghanistan‘s current Prime Minister, was a lobbyists for the CentGas venture with close ties to the Pakistani ISI and was a key CIA asset at the time. When the US-funded Taliban was unable to gain control of the region by force, which is what Ken Lay‘s feasibility study demanded, the CentGas pipeline deal fell through. Cheney knew control of the Caspian oil basin was of the highest geo-strategic value in securing control of the earth‘s remaining oil supply, so he drew up plans for an invasion of Afghanistan. Then, of course, 9/11 happened, and all of this significant history was buried in the rubble of the World Trade Center. I don‘t want to get side-tracked into Bank of America‘s scandalous past involvement in US intelligence, so I‘ll get back to the current Wall Street accounting racket. As Max Keiser‘s report makes clear, the accounting scam works by keeping massive losses off-the-books. This way, they can report huge profits, which of course leads to them being able to give themselves huge bonuses. There is still well over a trillion more in hidden off-the-books losses, ―tox ic‖ debt yet to fall and be made public. The first debt bomb went off in 2008, the second BIGGER one is ticking away right now, and it will be a much more devastating blast when it goes off. This global Ponzi scam has gone on for years with no one regulating or enforcing the law to stop them. It‘s going to blow and take us all down with it. That‘s why they are dishing out record bonuses now, they know we are on the Titanic and they are stepping on us and jumping into the lifeboats. IV: New Mafia World Order But wait, I hear skeptics say, ― How is it possible that they could steal trillions and not get caught or be held accountable?‖ Which is a very logical question. Well, when you have trillions of dollars you can easily grease the wheels, fund political campaigns at every level, and buy off all the regulators. The SEC knew about Bernie Madoff for years, but didn‘t do anything about it, and he was a small-timer. The SEC and The Federal Reserve also obviously knew about Lehman‘s accounting games long before they went bankrupt and actively worked to hide the information from the public. For another current example of how the wheels are greased, let‘s look at this, just in off the AP wire… ― Government rewarded bank auditors with big bonuses.‖ ― As banks gambled on the risky mortgages that helped create the worst financial crisis in generations, the U.S. government handed out millions of dollars in bonuses to regulators at agencies that missed or ignored warning signs that the system was on the verge of a meltdown.

The bonuses, detailed in payroll data released to The Associated Press, are the latest evidence of the government‘s false sense of security during the go-go days of the financial boom. Just as bank executives got bonuses despite taking on dangerous amounts of risk, regulators got taxpayer-funded bonuses for doing ― superior‖ work monitoring the banks. The bonuses, released in response to a Freedom of Information Act request, were part of a reward program little known outside the government. Some government regulators got tens of thousands of dollars in perks, boosting their salaries by almost 25 percent.‖ Do you see this? Major bonuses for looking the other way! What the New Mafia World Order calls ― superior work.‖ To get a further understanding of how this banking cartel operates and handles people who are in a position to stop their plunder, consider the case of American hero Bradley Birkenfeld. Democracy Now covered his case with this report: Why Is the Whistleblower Who Exposed the Massive UBS Tax Evasion Scheme the Only One Heading to Prison? A former banker for the Swiss giant UBS who blew the whistle on the biggest tax-evasion scheme in US history is preparing to head to prison tomorrow to begin serving a forty-month federal sentence. Bradley Birkenfeld first came forward to US authorities in 2007 and began providing inside information on how UBS was helping thousands of Americans hide assets in secret Swiss accounts. Birkenfeld is the only person in the scandal (which resulted in As Jesselyn Radack wrote on Common Dreams, ― the Treasury‘s recouping $780 million) to be sentenced to prison. Not a single one of the 52,000 American tax cheats who had UBS accounts faces jail time.‖ In other words, as this case demonstrates, if you‘re rich enough, it‘s legal to steal tax money, but illegal to point out that the money was stolen. How is that for sending out a message to let the world know who is in charge? Welcome to the New Mafia World Order. And to think, this theft is peanuts compared to the trillions stolen through market manipulation and the bailout, but as National Whistleblowers Center summed it up: ―Mr . Birkenfeld‘s voluntary disclosures also led to: The shutdown of the entire $20 billion UBS program that existed to solicit and encourage wealthy Americans to hide their money in secret, offshore accounts.‖ Well, the billionaire pirates who looted our economy can‘t have something like this happen, so send that confused servant who thinks laws apply to them to jail! V: The Goldman Sachs Obama Illusion We all seem to forget that President Barack ― Business International‖ Obama was hand-picked and funded by Goldman Sachs just before he sprung to popularity when he won the Iowa caucus. There is no question, these are some highly intelligent, mastermind criminals we are dealing with. Goldman Sachs knew a great communicator when they saw one. Obama is a masterful propagandist. I know many Democratic friends of mine get upset when their beloved Obama is implicated in all this. And I completely understand why a record-breaking number of people came out and gave him time they didn‘t have and money they couldn‘t afford, and worked tirelessly on his campaign, giving all to support the man who was going to bring change and economic justice. If he was working on the issues he campaigned on, I would be supportive too. However, the evidence is now clear and the jury is in, as I explained in more detail in my Financial Coup d-Etat and

Af-Pak War Racket reports, Obama and Congress are the ones allowing this to happened and are absolutely vital in facilitating the greatest theft of wealth in history. Just to quickly sum up, to this day, John Dugan, the most powerful bank lobbyist alive, who played a pivotal role in the theft of trillions is STILL running the federal Office of the Comptroller of the Currency. As Zach Carter wrote in a recent report, ― as the chief regulator for the largest US banks, Dugan and his staff are one of the most powerful engines of economic policy in the world…. given Dugan‘s record, it‘s hard to see why he has been allowed to stay on the job for Obama‘s first year.‖ Zach is putting this very politely, given Dugan‘s record it is hard to see how he is not serving a life sentence in prison. On top of this, Obama put Tim Giethner IN CHARGE of the US Treasury! In the most pivotal moments of the bailout (coup), Geithner served as Hank ― Pentagon-Sachs‖ Paulson‘s covert operations director as the head of the NY Federal Reserve. And the icing on the cake, Obama boldly backed the reconfirmation of Ben Bernanke as Federal Reserve Chairman. The list of criminals who remain in power with the direct blessing of Obama is long. Given this very obvious information, the argument that Obama is just naïve to all this doesn‘t hold water, not even a single drop. I understand that fixing an economy that has been systematically built on theft and corruption is an incredibly difficult task, but there are obvious first steps that need to be taken. Being that Obama loves to name Czars, how about naming white-collar crime expert William K. Black as the Czar of Economic Security. Black released a very short statement detailing his ― Top Ten Ways to Crack Down on Corporate Financial Crime.‖ Number one: Fire Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner, Office of Thrift Supervision chief John Bowman, Fed chief regulator Patrick Parkinson, and Office of the Comptroller of the Currency Chief John Dugan. Number two: Create a consumer financial protection agency headed by Harvard Law School professor Elizabeth Warren. Number three: Get rid of too big to fail. Number four: Get rid of Ben Bernanke as chair of the Fed. Replace him with Nobel prize winner Joseph Stiglitz. Number five: Bust up the FBI partnership with the Mortgage Bankers Association. Number six: Regulate first. Number seven: Target the top 100 corporate criminals. Number eight: Fix executive compensation. Number nine: Appoint a chief criminologist at each of the financial regulatory agencies. Number ten: Hire 1,000 FBI agents. Looking at William Black‘s last point, consider what he had to say in an interview with Bill Moyers about Bush and Obama‘s stunning lack of investigation and enforcement: ― After 9/11, the attacks, the Justice Department transfers 500 white-collar specialists in the FBI to national terrorism. Well, we can all understand that. But then, the Bush administration refused to replace the missing 500 agents. So even today, again, as you say, this crisis is 1000 times worse, perhaps, certainly 100 times worse,

than the Savings and Loan crisis. There are one-fifth as many FBI agents as worked the Savings and Loan crisis.‖ VI: American Heroes Speak Out on the Financial Reform Ruse If you think the new ― financial reform‖ bill about to be rushed through Congress and signed by Obama is going to do anything to change the game, you need to turn off your propaganda machine (television), put down the Kool-Aid and WAKE UP. This is not some political abstraction that you can avoid thinking about. This is a direct attack on us. Our future is being ripped away from us and destroyed while we watch American Idol and sit back hoping and waiting for change. There is major change coming, no question about that, but the change is going to be for the worse, much worse. The Obama-Summers-Bernanke-Geithner doctrine has been to keep hiding debt and losses, and allow continued theft, by just kicking the can further down the road. This is only going to make things worse in the long run. The fat lady has already sung, they‘re just delaying the inevitable and stealing everything they can still get their hands on in the meantime. The corrupt SEC is still trying to further ease any remaining regulations on the major banks, and the sham that is being called ― historic financial reform‖ is a massive con job. Even though you don‘t see it on your nightly ― news‖ or the 24 hour propaganda outlets, experts have been bravely speaking out about it and reporting their findings. TARP Congressional Oversight Panel Chairwoman Elizabeth Warren has been tirelessly fighting for a Consumer Protection Agency that is now going to be tossed aside into the Federal Reserve. Putting the Consumer Protection Agency in the Federal Reserve is like saying you are going to protect children by locking them in a room with a serial child molester. Apologies for making these vulgar analogies, but people need to understand the depravity of what is happening here. Dodd‘s entire bill gives even more power to the thugs who The Fed‘s Spectacular Comeback:‖ are running the heist. As Andy Kroll wrote in a recent report called, ― ― When Sen. Chris Dodd (D-Conn.) unveiled his long-awaited version of a Wall Street reform bill on Monday, two unlikely winners emerged: the Federal Reserve and its chairman, Ben Bernanke. The Fed, according to Dodd‘s plan, would retain some of its most crucial regulatory powers, like overseeing the 40 or so big banks with more than $50 billion in assets. But it would also gain more regulatory muscle. A new consumerprotection agency would be housed within its walls, and the Fed chairman would sit on a council of regulators created to tackle banks that are too big or too interconnected to fail. Bernanke and his team would also be empowered to regulate large non-banking financial firms—like subprime mortgage companies—if the council of regulators deem that they threaten the economy.‖ That‘s right, let‘s put the thieves in charge of policing the thieves. Sounds like a brilliant, mentally sound plan, doesn‘t it? But their extraordinary audacity and arrogance doesn‘t stop there! Another person to bravely speak out, FDIC Chairman Sheila Bair, revealed her ― serious concerns‖ that the Senate‘s new bill will allow ― backdoor bailouts of the largest financial firms.‖ Yep, ― backdoor bailouts,‖ very aptly titled. The Wall Street elite, knowing that there are still massive debts/liabilities to be placed on the books, want to continue to give themselves huge bonuses and keep their scam rolling along, so they want to keep the already plundered taxpayer lifeline open. They are like heroin junkies trying to tap the vein just one more time. And that vein isn‘t theirs; it‘s yours! Former IMF chief economist Simon Johnson has testified before Congress stating that the bill is a sham, and has released many reports exposing the bill to be a mere charade. He recently raised this alarm: ―T he indications

are that some version of the Dodd bill will be presented to Democrats and Republicans alike as a fait accompli – this is what we are going to do, so are you with us or against us in the final recorded vote? And, whatever you do – they say to the Democrats – don‘t rock the boat with any strengthening amendments.‖ Johnson followed that report up with this one: ― Senator: Which Part Of ‗Too Big To Fail‘ Do You Not Understand?‖ Mike Konczal of the Roosevelt Institute also went through the bill looking for things a Goldman Sachs lobbyist might object to and didn‘t find any reason for Goldman Sachs to not support it. Even the Troubled Assets Relief Program (TARP) Inspector General Neil Barofsky has been courageously railing against the ― lack of any meaningful reform.‖ And these people are hardly radicals. They are all American heroes who are risking their careers and livelihoods to blow the whistle on this sham. The fact that this has all happened is beyond comprehension. The only thing that is more mind-boggling is that all-out plunder continues to escalate.

VII: Economic Weapon of Mass Destruction (WMDs) Even the most lethal financial Weapon of Mass Destruction, as Warren Buffet called derivatives and Credit Default Swaps, haven‘t been banned. They continue to grow even more ominous. Goldman Sachs, the ultimate terrorist, has a ― derivative liability equal to 33,823% of assets.‖ That, my friends, is an atomic bomb sitting on the backbone of the global economy. In total, there is an astounding $610 TRILLION in derivatives just ticking away, waiting to blow. Shockingly, two years after the tip of the derivative iceberg was hit and blew major holes into the economy that we are still reeling from, current legislation STILL does little to address this. On Bank Watch, Colin Henderson reported: ― The data on derivatives is impressive. JPMorgan Chase, for example, held derivatives worth 6,072 percent of its assets at the peak of the bubble in 2007. The other two giants, Citigroup and Bank of America, although still far behind Chase, had 2,022 percent and 2,486 percent respectively. Goldman Sachs, the other giant, had an astonishing amount of derivatives on its balance sheets: 25,284 percent of assets in 2008 and 33,823 percent as of June 2009. Citigroup and BOA now have more of this risk on their books than before the crisis (FDIC SDI database)…. This simply adds to the point that despite all the histrionics and efforts in Washington, nothing has been learned and the American Banking system is now at least at as much risk now as in 2007, pre crash.‖ Let me put this in a way that is easy to understand. Imagine if Osama bin Laden went to Congress and the President and said, ― I know 9/11 was bad, but to remedy the situation, how about you let me put some nuclear weapons in Times Square? Don‘t worry, I promise I won‘t set them off.‖ This is exactly what Goldman Sachs did with derivatives, aka financial WMDs. How insane do you have to be to let this happen? To back up for a minute for a little recent history lesson, let‘s get some background insight on the economic crash and severe danger posed by derivatives from Columbia Law Professor John Coffee: ― When the SEC relaxed its net capital rule in 2004 and gave the industry—that is, the big 5 investment banks— an alternative net capital rule that had no ceiling on debt-to-equity ratios, this meant that overnight the major

investment banks were freed of the traditional net capital rule‘s requirement of a basically 12-1 debt-to-equity ratio. Instead, the investment banks were able to leverage up to their eyeballs, so long as they could point to Basel II-style internal models that arguably demonstrated that they were sufficiently diversified. Now that‘s a game at which the industry is much faster and better than the regulators. The investment banks were miles ahead of the SEC in developing computer models with all their Monte Carlo simulations, showing that these assets were never going to deteriorate in value. But of course they failed. The regulators—basically the SEC—never really had the capacity to stay even with the industry once they moved from a world of simple prophylactic rules (such as a fixed leverage ratio) to a model in which you employ computer simulations to determine how much was at risk. So we have a regulatory failure here. The real lesson is that the optimal regulatory model for risk management will not work if it is too complex for regulators to implement. We also have a Congressional failure. A lot of these problems go back to decisions Congress made back in 2000 when Congress deregulated over-the-counter derivatives in the Commodities Modernization Act.‖ VIII: Hank ―P entagon Sachs‖ Paulson To be sure, there is a list of about 50 pivotal players in all who had a significant hand in the creation of these fraudulent and deceptive trading schemes and the removal of laws and oversight to keep these financial WMDs developing to the point where they were able to steal trillions of dollars. After all, this is not about a few individuals, this is about a systemic organized criminal operation on a massive scale. However, in my analysis, the one person who has the most smoke around him is Hank Paulson. People need to look at the 50 pivotal players who caused the crash of the economy, and then benefited greatly from it, as a Wall Street al Queada network with Paulson being the equivalent of Bin Laden. Actually, Paulson is much worse than Bin Laden. Analyzing the devastation from the economic attack thus far, it has been equivalent to a 9/11 attack every single week. And these attacks continue unabated. Evidence shows that Paulson was the mastermind behind this engineered crisis. As I detail in my Financial Coup d‘état report, this is demonstrated by some of the pivotal and unilateral moves that Paulson made in the run-up to the crisis and during the bailout. When Paulson became CEO of Goldman Sachs in 1999, one of his first orders of business was to come out strongly in favor of the Commodities Modernization Act, which, as Professor Coffee stated, ― deregulated overthe-counter derivatives.‖ In 2000, Paulson‘s next move was to have Goldman Sachs, along with the largest Wall Street firms, join with the largest oil companies to form the Inter Continental Exchange (ICE). ICE ― is an American financial company that operates Internet-based marketplaces which trade futures and over-thecounter (OTC) energy and commodity contracts as well as derivative financial products.‖ Since ICE was started, the price of oil has skyrocketed and profits have exploded for the oil companies and firms trading on this exchange. For an example, in 2000, when ICE was formed, the average American family spent 7% of their income on food and fuel. Today, under the pricing set by ICE, the average American family now spends a record 20% of income on food and fuel. As I wrote in my Af-Pak War Racket: Masters of War report: ― A Congressional investigation into this exchange found that these companies were fraudulently inflating the price of oil by executing ‘round-trip‘ trades where one company would sell shares in oil to another company who would then sell the shares right back. This would drive the price of oil to however high they wanted it to go to. ‗No commodity ever changes hands. But when done on an exchange, these transactions send a price signal to the market and they artificially boost revenue for the company. This is nothing more than a massive fraud, pure and simple.‘

So when oil was selling at $147 a barrel, the actual worth was most likely closer to half that price.‖ After establishing ICE, in 2004, Paulson led the infamous ― Gang of Five CEOs‖ who demanded that the SEC get rid of the Net Capital Rule. This further opened the derivative floodgates and eventually unleashed the first financial WMD upon the US economy. Paulson personally made $700 million while building his ticking time bomb. After cashing out, he then moved to the US Treasury, where he was conveniently placed, just as his bomb went off, to have the lead role and almost complete control of the US economy when it all crashed. With military precision, he maneuvered his operatives into key positions, often former employees of his at Goldman Sachs. His moves were so riddled with egregious conflicts of interest, it‘ll make your head spin. The assassinations of his key rivals, Bear Stearns and Lehman Brothers, the unilateral decision to put Goldman‘s Audit Committee Chairman Edward Liddy in charge of AIG, placing Goldman‘s Dan Jester and Neel Kashkari in pivotal bailout roles, turning Goldman Sachs into a bank holding company - this list goes on and on. news‖ media seems to have forgotten, we have to look further into For another history lesson that the ― Paulson‘s background. Paulson began his career in the Pentagon and worked for former Defense Secretary Melvin Laird. Laird is at the top of the food chain when it comes to the military industrial complex and US intelligence. There are a lot more details here that I will follow up with at another time, but to quickly get to the point: if you understand how US intelligence works, you don‘t just work hand-in-hand with Melvin Laird and then cut ties, and independently end up as CEO of Goldman Sachs, and then (what do you know?) just before the economy is about to blow, Paulson is appointed Czar of the Bailout by Bush/Cheney. On top of this, we also need to remember that Paulson was intimately involved in Watergate. Yes, you heard me right… Watergate. Working for the Nixon Administration, Paulson was the assistant to John Ehrlichman during the Watergate scandal. Ehrlichman was ― convicted of conspiracy, perjury, and obstruction of justice for his part in the Watergate break-in and cover-up.‖ Just to add one more layer to Paulson‘s shady background, another highly unreported fact is that while leading Goldman Sachs, Paulson developed very intimate relations with members of the Chinese elite, visiting the country over 70 times. For now, I am going to leave my Paulson detour and get back to Goldman‘s current shenanigans. The two terrorists with the biggest derivative bombs are now throwing their ever-growing power around like drug addicts on a bender. As Bloomberg recently reported: Goldman Sachs Demands Collateral It Won‘t Dish Out Goldman Sachs Group Inc. and JPMorgan Chase & Co., two of the biggest traders of over-the-counter derivatives, are exploiting their growing clout in that market to secure cheap funding in addition to billions in revenue from the business. Both New York-based banks are demanding unequal arrangements with hedge-fund firms, forcing them to post more cash collateral to offset risks on trades while putting up less on their own wagers. As an ironic side note, in Italy, the birth place of Mafia rule, they are taking the lead in fighting back by charging JP Morgan and co-conspirators with derivatives fraud. They fraudulently robbed the city of Milan by misleading them, as Bloomberg put it, ― over swaps that adjusted interest payments on 1.7 billion euros ($2.3 billion) of bonds sold in 2005.‖ This is just a tiny drop in the global theft bucket. I mention it just because it is nice to see a country actually making an effort to recoup some of the theft. While we are in Europe… Greece, which was looted and plundered by Goldman Sachs and friends, now faces draconian austerity measures and major cuts in social programs with drastically increased taxes. The people are taking to the streets and fighting back. They have been rioting and storming Parliament, they even blew up a JP

Morgan office and tried to blow up several Citigroup banks. Unfortunately, Greece is a canary in the coal mine when it comes to the future of the United States. And guess what, passive US taxpayers? With the people in Greece and Europe actually standing up to their governments, Greece will be bailed out, not by Europeans, but by… us… yes, the US taxpayer. Uncle Sam‘s economic imperialism arm, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), is riding in to the rescue. Of course, the Greek public would be wise to rebel against this idea as well, because any country that makes a deal with the IMF ultimately ends up as a debt-slave nation. Getting back to the derivates scheme, a recent McClatchy report titled, ― Enabling Wall Street‘s secret gambling problem‖ explained how Wall Street firms spent $200 million of our own tax dollars to fend off any regulation and summed it up this way: ― If you‘d just driven the economy off a cliff, wouldn‘t you be embarrassed to show your face on Capitol Hill? And surely, I thought, these firms wouldn‘t spend their taxpayer bailout money on high-priced lobbyists. Boy, was I naive. Last year alone, Wall Street spent more than $200 million to block efforts to rein in their recklessness. And the investment is paying off. The financial reform bills moving through Congress are full of holes for greedy bankers to exploit. Just look at the Senate Democrats‘ new bill. One place you can see the Wall Street lobbyists‘ handiwork is in all the exemptions for derivatives, the complicated financial instruments blamed for accelerating the crisis. Analysts say the bill would exempt up to 40 percent of derivatives from being traded on open exchanges. This means that high flyers could still do their riskiest gambling in secret - far from the eyes of any regulator cops. This type of over-the-counter trading is kind of like backroom poker. In most cases, it adds no value to the real economy, so it‘s exactly like betting. Except if the game goes really badly, it‘s not one unlucky gambler who stands to lose his shirt - it‘s the entire economy.‖ When the derivatives bell tolls,which is inevitable, the stock market will not only plummet, it will cease to exist. The derivatives market is the biggest Ponzi scheme in history, and we all know what eventually happens in Ponzi schemes. Speaking of backroom poker and Ponzi schemes, have you seen the latest news… IX: $5.4 Trillion a Year Bullion Market Ponzi Scheme Similar to the Inter Continental Exchange, the London Bullion Market (LBMA), also known as the precious metal market (PM), is a multi-trillion over-the-counter (OTC) market for gold and silver. Also similar to the hundreds of billions, possibly trillions, stolen through fraudulent transactions on the ICE market, a whistleblower named Andrew Maguire just came forward to expose JP Morgan‘s manipulation of the PM market. As Tyler Durden put it on his brilliant website Zero Hedge: ― At this point none of this should be at all shocking, and the only thing that matters is when CFTC‘s exGoldmanite Gary Gensler will be fired for allowing hundreds of billions of dollars to be sucked out of the PM market on behalf of such major market manipulating entities as JP Morgan and the New York Federal Reserve, for whom it transacts. Don‘t worry - the answer to that rhetorical question is ‗never‘, as it is the administration‘s goal to make all the millionaires among the bulge bracket firms billionaires, via legalized theft from honest investors.‖

Patrick A. Heller, writing on the NumisMaster website, summed it up this way: CFTC Gets Facts of Bullion Manipulation … On March 23, 2010, GATA Director Adrian Douglas was contacted by a whistleblower by the name of Andrew Maguire. Maguire is a metals trader in London. He has been told first-hand by traders working for JPMorganChase that JPMorganChase manipulates the precious metals markets, and they have bragged to how they make money doing so. In November 2009 Maguire contacted the CFTC enforcement division to report this criminal activity. He described in detail the way JPMorgan Chase signals to the market its intention to take down the precious metals. Traders recognize these signals and make money shorting the metals alongside JPM. Maguire explained how there are routine market manipulations at the time of option expiry, non-farm payroll data releases, and COMEX contract rollover, as well as ad-hoc events…. Now that this information about silver price manipulation and about the massive shortage of physical gold and silver on the London exchange is part of the official record, I expect huge fallout. Remember, after the five men were arrested for breaking into the Democratic headquarters in Watergate in June 1972, it took more than two years for President Nixon to resign. I don‘t think it will take anywhere near this long for last Thursday‘s revelations to blow back against the U.S. government and the U.S. dollar. Once the public realizes the extent of the manipulation, gold and silver prices are likely to skyrocket. I think this hearing will be the beginning of the end for those trying to suppress gold and silver prices….‖ Adrian Douglas, director of the Gold Anti-Trust Action Committee (GATA) recently described this Ponzi scheme: ― LBMA trades over 100 times the amount of gold it actually has to back the trades…. the giant Ponzi trading of gold ledger entries can be sustained only if there is never a liquidity crisis in the REAL physical market. If someone asks for gold and there isn‘t any the default would trigger the biggest ‗bank run‘ and default in history…. Almost every day we hear of a new financial fraud that has been exposed. The gold and silver market fraud is likely to be bigger than all of them. Investors in their droves, who have purchased gold in good faith in ‗unallocated accounts‘, are going to demand delivery of their metal. They will then discover that there is only one ounce for every one hundred ounces claimed. They will find out they are ‗unsecured creditors‘…. It is, as I asserted before the Commission, a giant Ponzi Scheme.‖ So you better hurry up and claim your gold, because everyone knows what happens to the last people in on a Ponzi scheme, they always get screwed and lose everything. X: Ponzi Nation: Welcome to America, Sucker And when it comes to the Ponzi US economy, the last people in are American taxpayers, you and I. As Andy Kroll correctly put it in his Tom‘s Dispatch report, ― Ponzi Nation: Welcome to America, Sucker.‖ ― Ours is now a Ponzi nation. There is a new mood in the land. Just how it will play out is unknown, but a sense of having been conned is still spreading — as if not just surprising numbers of investors, but the whole country had experienced the last days of a giant Ponzi scheme. With it goes a feeling that what we‘ve been living through, even in ―thebest of times,‖ wasn‘t an American dream, but pure nightmare. Welcome to America, sucker.‖

Knowing now how the market has been rigged to loot taxpayers and honest investors, let‘s view these recent news items: Public Pension Funds Are Adding Risk to Raise Returns ― States and companies have started investing very differently when it comes to the billions of dollars they are safeguarding for workers‘ retirement…. states and other bodies of government are seeking higher returns for their pension funds, to make up for ground lost in the last couple of years and to pay all the benefits promised to present and future retirees. Higher returns come with more risk…. public pension funds are trying a wide range of investments: commodity futures, junk bonds, foreign stocks, deeply discounted mortgage-backed securities and margin investing. And some states that previously shunned hedge funds are trying them now.‖ Steep Losses Pose Crisis for Pensions ― The financial crisis has blown a hole in the rosy forecasts of pension funds that cover teachers, police officers and other government employees, casting into doubt as never before whether these public systems will be able to keep their promises to future generations of retirees. The upheaval on Wall Street has deluged public pension systems with losses that government officials and consultants increasingly say are insurmountable unless pension managers fundamentally rethink how they pay out benefits or make money or both…. After losing about $1 trillion in the markets, state and local governments are facing a devil‘s choice: Either slash retirement benefits or pursue high-return investments that come with high risk.‖ FDIC wants pension funds to prop up failed banks ― Over 140 U.S. lenders folded in 2009 alone. To remedy the financial void left in their wake, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation wants public pension funds, which safeguard the retirement funds of millions, to buy in part or in whole the banks that couldn‘t manage to keep their depositors‘ funds… Bloomberg News notes that pension funds in Oregon, New Jersey, California and New York may participate. The wire service also reported that firms being targeted for the plan control over $2 trillion in retirement funds.‖ Corporate America‘s 401(k) Plan Managers: In Bear Market, Shareholders Lost 37%, Managers Gained a Billion ― Perhaps the biggest enemy is your 401(k) plan manager. Wolman and Colamosca say investors are making a huge mistake letting employers, Corporate America, Wall Street and politicians do your thinking for you. Why? Because they‘re your enemy, they created and they control the 401(k) for their benefit, not yours. The fact is, 401(k) managers get rich off naïve investors. How bad is it? A recent Forbes article, ‗Retirement Rip-Off,‘ lambasted the industry. Using data from Dr. Mundell‘s Center for Retirement Research at Boston College: ‗Even as 401(k) balances grow in size and importance, fees remain high and poorly disclosed.‘ There are $2.9 trillion savings in 401(k)-type accounts. Fees on these 401(k)‘s are estimated to exceed those of traditional pension funds by 1%. That means 401(k) savers are paying $29 billion in excess fees to the fund industry. And in a Bloomberg Markets report, retirement planning consultant Stephen Butler says, ‗Hidden fees of 1% can reduce a workers 401(k) returns by 15% over 30 years.‘‖ It‘s Time to Tap the Empty Social Security Trust Fund

What it all boils down to is that, in order to pay full benefits this year, Social Security will have to come up with an extra $29 billion to supplement the inadequate payroll tax revenue. Where will that money come from? It will have to come from increased taxes or from borrowed money. ‗Wait a minute!‘ some readers will say. Hasn‘t Social Security been receiving surplus revenue ever since the 1983 payroll tax hike? Isn‘t there supposed to be approximately $2.5 trillion in the Social Security trust fund? The answer to both questions is yes. But there is a problem. Every dollar of that surplus Social Security revenue has already been spent by the government. Much of it went to fund wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. The rest has been spent on other government programs. The American people were not supposed to find out about the great Social Security scam for another six years, and the government was hoping to continue to receive surplus money from the Social Security contributions of working Americans for at least that long. But the inevitable day of reckoning has come, six years sooner than anybody expected, because of the severe recession. And the government of the United States has been caught with its hand still in the empty Social Security cookie jar. For more than a decade, I have been trying to expose the Social Security scam just like Harry Markopolos was trying to expose the Bernie Madoff scam. But nobody would listen…. If there was any doubt remaining, with regard to whether or not the trust fund contains any real assets, that doubt should have been removed by the following words in the 2009 Social Security Trustees Report: ‗Neither the redemption of trust fund bonds, nor interest paid on those bonds, provides any new net income to the Treasury, which must finance redemptions and interest payments through some combination of increased taxation, reductions in other government spending, or additional borrowing from the public.‘ There is nothing ambiguous about the above words.‖ IMF Austerity Arriving in America ― It‘s not coming. It‘s here, being incrementally rolled out, including painful structural adjustments - some legislated, others unavoidable like the possibility suggested in Jonathan Laing‘s March 15 article, titled ― The $2 Trillion Hole‖ in public-employee retirement plans…. Washington may impose higher taxes and devalue the dollar, but mostly expect benefit cuts, the idea being to end core ones including Medicare, Social Security, eventually Medicaid, plus others millions rely on but won‘t get if tough measures are enacted. Expect them. Some are here. Others are coming through the same structural adjustments imposed on developing countries and just as painful and destructive…. Overall, the effects are devastating, including growing poverty, inequality, the destruction of the middle class and unions, hunger, homelessness, environmental harm, and police state measures to quell dissent - the essence of tyranny showing up in America and arriving at a fast clip.‖ The IMF ― Structural Adjustment Programs‖ (SAPs) that have devastated countries worldwide (correctly referenced above by Stephen Lendman) are the very programs that have been launched upon us, as I described in my report on the Economic Elite. We are already seeing the effects of this hostile takeover. I won‘t recount all the horrific societal and economic statistics that I have reported on in detail in my report, ― Casualties of Economic Terrorism, Surveying the Damage,‖ but the economic attack on the United States has already resulted in the US having the highest poverty rate in the industrialized world, with a stunning 50 million citizens now living in poverty. It has also given us the highest inequality of wealth in our nation‘s history. Step aside Robber Barons! America now has a much more powerful and depraved criminal class. Vi Ransel recently described the bailout-coup-structural-adjustment-program like this:

― This is the result of a deliberate strategy, one Washington has executed many, many times, though usually in ‗Third‘ World nations, by using ‗Free‘ Trade Agreements (FTAs) and its front groups, the International Monetary Fund, the World Bank, and the World Trade Organization. Purchased politicians plunge their countries into unsustainable debt. Under Structural Adjustment Programs (SAPs), national industries are sold to transnational corporations and privatized. Social programs are cut to the bone or eliminated altogether. Interest rates are ratcheted up and the economy collapses on itself like the World Trade Center while banks and corporate buzzards fight each other to pick the carcass clean.‖ On a personal level, we have all been feeling the increased stress and early tightening effects on our own financial situations already. However, on the state and federal levels, we are just beginning to see the utter devastation that lies ahead of us. XI: Economic Shock and Awe Here are some recent underreported headlines that you may have missed: * Underemployment Hits 20% in MidMarch * Millions of Unemployed Face Years Without Jobs * As economic fears rise, families on verge of unraveling * Bad economy blamed for high suicide rate in U.S. * Arizona budget cuts education, health care for the poor * Kansas City closing nearly half its schools * Illinois budget crisis sharpens - measures being planned will severely impact students, teachers * US food charities overwhelmed by demand * ‗I Borrow Money to Buy Food,‘ Says City Employee as Detroit Mayor Prepares for Draconian Pay Cuts * Small town must choose between cops and bankruptcy * Social Security Payout to Exceed Revenue This Year * Are Pension Liabilities Set to Explode?

* Obama Packs Debt Commission with Social Security Looters * Nevada budget cuts worsen the social crisis * Vallejo, California struggles to keep city safe during bankruptcy, heavy cuts to police force * More than 40 Detroit schools to close in June * Los Angeles sends layoff notices to 5,200 teachers * Illinois stops payments to university system, mass furloughs result * Boston cuts target community centers, libraries * Florida, nine other states are barreling toward economic disaster, report says * Mountains of Student Debt * Tight job market is squeezing out young workers * Homeowners Facing Foreclosure Take Own Lives * New Foreclosure Initiative Huge Bonanza for Banks * Prison Industry: More African American Slaves in the United States Today Than in 1850 * Unemployment on the rise in virtually every US urban area

* 2.4 Million Jobs Lost to China, New Trade Battle Begins * The Off-Shored Economy: The Ruins of Detroit * Recession hitting returning vets hard * Senator Blocks Jobless-Benefits Extension

* Budget cuts could cost Texas consumers millions * Without more federal help, states might cut Medicaid * Half of commercial RE mortgages to be underwater

* Over 5 million homes lost to foreclosure

* 702 banks with a total $400 billion in assets could fail, says FDIC

* 13 million total foreclosures expected by 2014

* State Debt Woes Grow Too Big to Camouflage

* Wall Street profit from utility shutoffs

* US Congress allows jobless benefits to expire

* U.S. Risks AAA Rating

* US now has biggest prison population in the world

* States‘ jobless funds are being drained in recession * 29 States Now in the red, As Kansas and Vermont Are the Latest Unemployment Insurance Debtors, total to rise to 40 States

* 180 million Americans now live paycheck to paycheck * Economists Predict Cutbacks, Tax Increases That ‗Aren‘t Even Imaginable‘

I could go on and on and on with this list of news reports, but let me cut this short and turn to Bob Herbert who recently summed it all up in a NY Times piece titled, ― A Ruinous Meltdown.‖ ― A story that is not getting nearly enough attention is the ruinous fiscal meltdown occurring in state after state, all across the country. Taxes are being raised. Draconian cuts in services are being made. Public employees are being fired. The tissue-thin national economic recovery is being undermined. And in many cases, the most vulnerable populations — the sick, the elderly, the young and the poor — are getting badly hurt.‖ Are you getting it now? Do you understand what we are facing? This is just the first phase of the economic Shock and Awe campaign being unleashed on an unsuspecting US public. XII: Time for a Second American Revolution - The 99% Movement The Economic Elite have seized our economy, tax system and government. These people are the most depraved terrorists on the planet and they have viciously attacked us and launched an all-out economic war on the American public. We have to get serious about defending ourselves and fighting back. ― This situation continues only because the mass of the people refuse to look facts in the face and prefer to feed on illusions produced and circulated by those in power with a profusion that contrasts with their withholding the necessities of life. The day that the mass of the American people awake to the realities of the situation, that day the restoration of democracy will commence, for power and rule will revert to the people.‖ — John Dewey

Which brings us back to my original question: Is It Time for Law Abiding American Citizens to Stop Paying Their Taxes and Start a New Government? When it comes to the overwhelming evidence of unpunished theft, and the process of paying taxes into that organized system of theft, there comes a point when exploited people need to ask the question: Why should hardworking Americans continue to contribute to our own demise? This is the same question that led to the first American Revolution when Thomas Jefferson wrote the following Declaration: ― Governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed, — That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to affect their Safety and Happiness. Prudence, indeed, will dictate that Governments long established should not be changed for light and transient causes; and accordingly all experience hath shown that mankind are more disposed to suffer, while evils are sufferable than to right themselves by abolishing the forms to which they are accustomed. But when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future security. Such has been the patient sufferance of these Colonies; and such is now the necessity which constrains them to alter their former Systems of Government.‖ And dare I say, with ample evidence to back up this claim, the level of ― abuses and usurpations‖ inflicted upon the American people is much greater today than it was in 1776. Despite an omni-present propaganda (mainstream media) system — which is the greatest weapon of oppression humanity has ever known, which has also obscured, isolated and suppressed dissent and understanding of our present tyrannical forces — recent public opinion polls have produced stunning results: * Only 21% of American voters believe the government has the consent of the governed. * 82% want an aggressive crackdown on the criminal class that looted our economy. * 86% feel the system of government is broken. * 79% think the economy will collapse. These are amazingly positive signs, because this means that the propaganda system is collapsing. These results show that only 15-20% of the population is still successfully propagandized, and this number will obviously keep falling as the economic attack continues to escalate. The Economic Elite are hoping that our propagandized population will just sleepwalk to extinction and passively accept a slow death. Those of us who are aware need to sound the alarm! Where are the modern-day Paul Reveres? We need one on every street corner, at every shopping mall and coffee shop, on every online social network. In our nation‘s history, the stakes have never been higher. If you are reading this right now, and understand that what I‘m saying is true, how can you continue to remain passive? I know that just ignoring this report is the easy thing to do, but ask yourself, look in the mirror and ask yourself: Will ignoring this today make my future any better? Or will it make things much worse? Paid-off politicians will not protect your future. Your house is on fire and no one is coming to put it out. Are you going to, or are you going to let it burn to the ground? Only you can protect your future. Your inaction makes you complicit in your own demise. As the late Howard Zinn once put it: ― You can‘t be neutral on a moving train.‖

And the train is moving at a quickened pace. Analyzing the devastation from the economic attack thus far, it has been equivalent to a 9/11 attack every single week. And these attacks continue without any significant measures taken to defend against it. Our politicians won‘t defend us and exercise the will of the people, so we must. It‘s time to get moving, start organizing and to form a new government that is, as the Constitution states: of, by and for the people. We will restore a rule of law. The second America Revolution has now begun! We are US soldiers, policemen, firemen, teachers, students, business owners, postal workers, transit workers, construction workers, union members, artists, journalists, doctors, nurses, lawyers, social service workers, factory workers, farmers, we are 99% of the population and we will not stand by and let our country be destroyed like this! We are launching a 99% Movement and all the propaganda and labels that are used to divide us will fall to the wayside. We are not just Republicans and Democrats, or Tea Party and Coffee Party people, we are Americans and we are uniting against our common enemy. ― All men recognize the right of revolution; that is, the right to refuse allegiance to, and to resist, the government, when its tyranny or its inefficiency is great and unendurable. And oppression and robbery are organized, I say; let us not have such a machine any longer. I think that it is not too soon for honest men to rebel and revolutionize.‖ – Henry David Thoreau, On the Duty of Civil Disobedience

― The civilization may still seem brilliant because it possesses an outward front, the work of a long past, but is in reality an edifice crumbling to ruin and destined to fall in at the first storm.‖ – Gustave Le Bon, The Crowd: A Study of the Popular Mind

― All countries are basically social arrangements, accommodations to changing circumstances. No matter how permanent and even sacred they may seem at any one time, in fact they are all artificial and temporary.‖ – Strobe Talbott

― First Ray of the New Rising Sun‖ – Jimi Hendrix

― Rise like Lions after slumber In unvanquishable number Shake your chains to earth like dew Which in sleep had fallen on you Ye are many they are few‖ – Percy Bysshe Shelley

The illusion being thrust upon us, by the mainstream media and current politicians, that leaves us feeling powerless to create change, is crashing down. As millions of Americans begin to realize the power we have in numbers and opt-out of this unconstitutional government that is currently in place, we will restore a rule of law and secure our freedom, liberty and future. We look forward to proving the criminal misconduct rampant throughout our government and economic system in court. We will prove that the Government has acted against our interests, in an unconstitutional manner on many fronts and has actively

facilitated the theft of taxpayer funds. It is beyond any legal doubt, as will be proven in courtrooms across the country. In fact, we are requesting a six-hour block of national primetime television programming to present our evidence directly to the American public. We expect the major networks to comply with our request, as the national broadcast television stations are licensed by the FCC to use the Public airwaves and are required by law to inform and serve the Public interest. XIII: How You Can Get Involved ―Ar e you brave enough to see? Do you want to change it?‖ Trent Reznor

Anyone with a general interest in taking part in this 99% movement, please sign up here. If you are a lawyer who would like to participate in this effort, please email We are also assembling a production team for our television and film public awareness campaign. If you have skills in this area, or would like to help fund this project, please email


Click to download a free digital copy of the special illustrated edition:

UN Policy Paper Describes Incremental Steps Toward World Government Jurriaan Maessen September 30, 2010 ― The governments of Europe, the United States, and Japan are unlikely to negotiate a socialdemocratic pattern of globalization – unless their hands are forced by a popular movement or a catastrophe, such as another Great Depression or ecological disaster‖ Richard Sandbrook, Closing the Circle: Democratization and Development in Africa, Zed Books limited, London, 2000. A 1991 policy paper prepared for the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED) by self-described ‗ecosocioeconomist‘ professor Ignacy Sachs outlines a strategy for the transfer of wealth in name of the environment to be implemented in the course of 35 to 40 years. As it turns out, it is a visionary paper describing phase by phase the road to world dictatorship. As the professor states in the paper: ― To be meaningful, the strategies should cover the time-span of several decades. Thirty-five to forty years seems a good compromise between the need to give enough time to the postulated transformations and the uncertainties brought about by the lengthening of the time-span.‖

Self-described ‗ecosocioeconomist‘ professor Ignacy Sachs.

In his paper ― The Next 40 Years: Transition Strategies to the Virtuous Green Path: North/South/East/Global‖, Sachs accurately describes not only the intended time-span to bring about a global society, but also what steps should be taken to ensure ― population stabilization‖: ― In order to stabilize the populations of the South by means other than wars or epidemics, mere campaigning for birth control and distributing of contraceptives has proved fairly inefficient.‖ In the first part of the (in retrospect) bizarrely accurate description of the years to come, Sachs points out redistribution of wealth is the only viable path towards population stabilization and- as he calls it- a ― virtuous green world‖. The professor: ― The way out from the double bind of poverty and environmental disruption calls for a fairly long period of more economic growth to sustain the transition strategies towards the virtuous green path of what has been called in Stockholm eco-development and has since changed its name in Anglo-Saxon countries to sustainable development.‖

― (…) a fair degree of agreement seems to exist, therefore, about the ideal development path to be followed so long as we do not manage to stabilize the world population and, at the same time, sharply reduce the inequalities prevailing today.‖ ― The bolder the steps taken in the near future‖, Sachs asserts, ― the shorter will be the time span that separates us from a steady state. Radical solutions must address to the roots of the problem and not to its symptoms. Theoretically, the transition could be made shorter by measures of redistribution of assets and income.‖ Sachs points to the political difficulties of such proposals being implemented (because free humanity tends to distrust any national government let alone transnational government to redistribute its well-earned wealth). He therefore proposes these measures to be implemented gradually, following a meticulously planned strategy: ― The pragmatic prospect is one of transition extending itself over several decades.‖ In the second sub-chapter ― The Five Dimensions of Ecodevelopment‖, professor Sachs sums up the main dimensions of this carefully outlined move to make Agenda 21 a very real future prospect. The first dimension he touches upon is ― Social Sustainability‖: ― The aim is to build a civilization of being within greater equity in asset and income distribution, so as to improve substantially the entitlements of the broad masses of population and of reduce the gap in standards of living between the have and the have nots.‖ This of course means, reducing the standards of living in ―T he North‖ (U.S., Europe) and upgrading those of the developing nations (― The South and The East‖). This would have to be realized through what Sachs calls ― Economic Sustainability‖: ―ma de possible by a more efficient allocation and management of resources and a steady flow of public and private investment.‖ The third dimension described by the professor is ― Ecological Sustainability‖ which, among other things, limits ―theconsumption of fossile fuels and other easily depletable or environmentally harmful products, substituting them by renewable and/or plentiful and environmentally friendly resources, reducing the volume of pollutants by means of energy and resource conservation and recycling and, last but not least, promoting selfconstraint in material consumption on part of the rich countries and of the privileged social strata all over the world;‖ In order to make this happen Sachs stresses the need of ― defining the rules for adequate environmental protection, designing the institutional machinery and choosing the mix of economic, legal and administrative instruments necessary for the implementation of environmental policies.‖ Dimension 4: ― Spatial Sustainability‖: ―dir ected at achieving a more balanced rural-urban configuration and a better territorial distribution of human settlements and economic activities (…)‖. The fifth and last dimension described in the UN policy paper is ― Cultural Sustainability‖: ―looki ng for the endogenous roots of the modernization processes, seeking change within cultural continuity, translating the normative concept of eco-development into a plurality of local, ecosystem-specific, culture-specific and sitespecific solutions.‖

But to realize such a dramatic new direction for the world, Sachs once again stresses the importance of incremental implementation. A matter of boiling the frog slowly as opposed to throwing the poor animal into a boiling-hot cooking pan: ― Even if we know where we want to get, the operational question is how do we proceed to put humankind on the virtuous path of genuine development, socially responsible and in harmony with nature. It is submitted that UNCED 92 should give considerable attention to the formulation of transition strategies that could become the central piece of the Agenda 21.‖ This is the word- Agenda 21: the UN strategy for redistributing the wealth accumulated by the ― North‖ in order to create a completely ― balanced‖ world society- under auspices of the United Nations of course and the private central banks controlling it. This can only come about by destroying the middle-class. A sudden redistribution and industrialization would not do- for the middle-class would undoubtedly rise in defiance against it. Therefore, Sachs argues for an incremental and carefully planned dissolution of the middle-class phase by phase: ― To be meaningful, the strategies should cover the time-span of several decades. Thirty-five to forty years seems a good compromise between the need to give enough time to the postulated transformations and the uncertainties brought about by the lengthening of the time-span. The retooling of industries, even in periods of rapid growth, requires ten to twenty years. The restructuration and the expansion of the infrastructures requires several decades and this is a crucially important sector from the point of view of environment.‖ Then Sachs plunges into his most shocking statement: ― However, the single most important reason to consider the transition strategies over a minimum of thirty-five to forty years stems from the non-linearity of these strategies; they should be devised as a succession of changing priorities over time. A good illustration is provided by the population transition. In order to stabilize the populations of the South by means other than wars or epidemics, mere campaigning for birth control and distributing of contraceptives has proved fairly inefficient.‖ Sachs argues that ―a n accelerated programme of social and economic development of the rural areas should be the outmost priority in the first phase of a realistic population stabilization scheme.‖ Who or what is to coordinate all this, according to Sachs, and how exactly is the UN to take control? ―T he solutions‖, says Sachs, ―c an vary in terms of their boldness and take the form of global, multilateral or bilateral arrangements.‖ These arrangements should as far as Sachs is concerned ensure ― at least partially the automacity of financial transfers by some form of fiscal mechanisms, be it a small income tax or an array of indirect taxes on goods and services whose production and consumption has significant environmental impacts.‖ Over time, gradually, these taxes should increase: ― Starting the operation with a one per ten thousand tax and increasing it so as to reach one per thousand in ten to twenty years seems a fairly realistic proposal, the more so that the scheme creates an interesting market for the private enterprises involved in R and D.‖

Reading all this, the question as to what entity should take charge is not difficult to answer. Sachs: ― In order to generate maximum synergies between the national strategies and global action, the United Nations should create a forum for the periodical discussion and evaluation of these strategies and a research, monitoring and flexible planning facility to put them in a global perspective.(…). The forum should have a fair representation of all the main actors involved: governments, parliaments, citizen movements and the business world. Given its importance, it should be lifted from specialized agencies to a central place in the UN system.‖ The ― fair representation‖ Sachs is talking about is of course only a pretext to get everybody on board. As the ― Danish Text‖, drafted for the Copenhagen conference in late 2009, clearly illustrates, the IMF and World Bank will always have final say in the construction of any international system.

Watch the documentary Monopoly Men by clicking:

CAFR1 Trailer of "The Only Game in Town" - The Way Our Government Can Be by clicking on image.

CAFR: US agencies have billions, trillions in investments while crying budget deficits May 22, 7:46 PM LA County Nonpartisan Examiner Carl Herman

We hold these Truths to be self-evident...

Gerald Klatt and Walter Burien are unrecognized heroes. These individuals are national leaders who

have communicated how government agencies conceal American taxpayers’ money in surplus accounts that collectively total trillions of our dollars. The data is found in government agencies’ Comprehensive Annual Financial Reports (CAFRs).

What CAFRs reveal is a communist-style policy whereby the US taxpayers surrender enormous assets to the state, who then ―inv est‖ these collective trillions that swell in these accounts. Concurrently, taxpayers are informed of budget deficits to either squeeze more taxes from them and/or cut public services. To add insult to injury, the state lies in omission by never reminding Americans of their hard-earned and withheld trillions as they eliminate jobs, reduce education, and attack the quality of our lives.

The American Constitution is a contract of limited government whereby the public informs and is informed by our representatives. CAFRs are damning public documents that expose ―l eadership‖ from Left and Right as exactly what leading economic voices have said: an absolutely corrupt and self-serving oligarchy.

Let’s look at the economic data revealed in CAFRs. For example, California has a budget deficit of ~$20 billion. The combined investments of CAFRs for the state of CA, Los Angeles County, and the City of Los Angeles is over $450 billion; over 22 times the amount of the budget shortfall (documentation page numbers below). California claims they need this money mainly for public employee retirement benefits. Let’s check that story. The CAFR data shows current member contribution pays for all retiree benefits except for $1.8 billion (net cost). If just these three state agencies surrendered their withheld money back to the public instead of lording over it as communists, each Californian would receive ~$15,000. To pay for the shortfall in the retirement account, each individual could be taxed $50. Why has political ― leadership‖ and corporate media not informed American taxpayers of this option and publicly submitted this data for professional and independent economist cost-benefit analysis to provide other options? The answer to that question is also the answer to the question of how political "leadership" gets away with Orwellian unlawful wars. So far, we’re only considering three CAFRs in the state of California. The comprehensive reality is far more dramatic. If you combine all of California’s ~10,000 government agencies’ CAFRs, the combined total according to Walter Burien’s sampling analysis is $8 trillion. Let’s say Walter’s way-off. For argument’s sake, let’s say the total is less than half; only $3.5 trillion. If that was returned to the public, each Californian would receive $100,000. Walter says he’s confident in his documentation that every state has overtaxed and seized Americans’ hard-earned money in outrageous sums. Obviously, we need independent auditing of all state CAFRs and independent economic cost-benefit analyses to make our choices clear of how the public benefit is best served. Californians oppressed under a $20 billion dollar budget deficit that cuts essential public services while not considering taxpayers’ trillions ―i nvested‖ in our names is among the worst choices imaginable. It’s criminal. It’s Orwellian. To put this into an analogy, I’ve modified the one used by Walter: This is like a juvenile claiming he needs money because his front pants pocket is empty, which he dutifully shows (budget). What he's not telling you is that his back pockets have over 100 times the money he says he "needs" (shown in various places of the CAFRs). Whenever he's asked about the money in his back pockets, which he never volunteers in discussing his empty front pocket and never invites for consideration to move some into the front pocket, he says, "Oh, that money is designated for other uses. I can't touch that." So far, the silence of corporate media and political leadership from Left and Right has brought us to today. Of course, "I can't touch that" is a lie of omission because it

can be touched the moment policy changes. So the real issue is the heart of economics: what are the costs and benefits of different choices?

Here’s the specific data and documentation: California pension and ―oth er‖ trusts investments total $367 billion. Net pension benefits payable from that $367 billion in 2009 was $1.8 billion (retiree payouts minus current member contributions). Subtracting other liabilities ($48 billion in securities lending obligations that seemed to be borrowed from retirement funds- page 212), the state of California is holding onto over $300 billion of the public’s money that could be used for other purposes (pages 48, 49 of the report). The misleading information on pages 154-155 suggests retirement funds are not fully funded. However: over $300 billion is held in investments for $1.8 billion in net benefits. How many votes do you think our present policy would receive from the California public given the alternative of receiving ~$15,000 now and paying a $50 tax every year. The investments: $143 billion in ―eq uity securities‖ (stocks), $92 billion in debt securities (page 83-84). $72 billion is dependent upon foreign markets (page 88). The UC system had a budget deficit for this ending school year of $0.65 billion. The policy response was to deny 2,300 students enrollment, lay-off over 2,000 faculty and staff, furlough teaching days and cut 10% salaries, and raise tuition by 32%. For less than one-third of one percent of the investment total of California, UC would have been fully-funded and those reductions eliminated. California’s 20,000 laid-off teachers could be rehired at $70,000/year for $3.4 billion; less than 1% of these three CAFR ―i nvestments‖ total. One cost of this deception: Governor Schwarzenegger announced a 41 percent cut for the 2010 budget in "general government" services including elimination of CALWORKS (welfare to work and child-care program, which will affect 1.4 million people, two thirds of them children), and sharp decreases in health and welfare programs for single mothers, low-income children, foster youth, the disabled, and senior citizens. Los Angeles County has $52 billion in investments (pages 61-63), the City of Los Angeles has $36 billion (page 80). Both have drastically cut programs. Both have pension plans underfunded by current members by less than 2% of their investment totals. Below is Walter Burien’s 10-minute introduction to his video explanation of CAFRs. Walter claims that investments are only the most obvious section where CAFRs reveal hidden public money in plain sight; other areas include advanced forward liabilities accounts (overestimates and/or retained money for far-distant projects), states buying their own debt, profits from state-run enterprises (like recycling), and possible other areas requiring full and independent audits to discover.

WATCH WALTER BURIEN’S "The Only Game in Town" - The Way Our Government Can Be! Trailer

Oregon legislator reads CAFR, finds billions, ends budget deficit crisis; California can do same June 11th, 2010 2:45 pm PT

Watch the video: State Agencies Have $4.9 Billion In Ending Fund Balances.

The 2-minute video below shows an Oregon legislator appropriately outraged to discover the Orwellian lie of omission that his state has available assets valued over ten times the budget deficit. These funds are "unreserved, undesignated fund balance," meaning that they have no restrictions for use.

This is true in every state; documented in the Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR). When Democratic and Republican ―lea dership‖ states public goods and services MUST be cut because of budget deficits, the lies become ones of commission. I fully explain this situation in the following from my article, ― CAFR: UC budget fully funded with one-fifth of one percent of state of CA “investments”: California’s political ― leadership‖ of both parties have lied in omission by failing to discuss California’s investments of $367 billion (page 48) as a possible source of funding for the ~$20 billion budget deficit. Ethical politicians would have presented the facts for professional and independent economic cost-benefit analysis to communicate choices to the tax-paying public. ―Le adership‖ claims that this money is necessary to leave alone in order to pay mainly for public employee retirement benefits. Let’s check that story. California’s Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR) shows current member contribution pays for all retiree benefits except for $1.8 billion (also pages 48 and 49). This means that Republican and Democratic ―l eaders‖ say they need to extract and hold over $367 billion from the taxpayers in order to pay for a cost of one-half of one percent of OUR money they took from us. These ―le aders‖ are lying sacks of spin.

Our leaders have lied in omission and use obfuscating language for our collective money that then become what author Ellen Brown calls, ― Stagnant pools of government money.‖ I also looked at the CAFRs for Los Angeles County ($52 billion in investments; pages 61-63) and the City of Los Angeles ($36 billion; page 80). Both have drastically cut programs. Both have pension plans underfunded by current members by less than 2% of their investment totals. California has a budget deficit of ~$20 billion. The combined investments of CAFRs for the state of CA, Los Angeles County, and the City of Los Angeles is over $450 billion; over 22 times the amount of the budget shortfall. If just these three state agencies surrendered their withheld money back to the public instead of lording over it as communists, each Californian would receive ~$15,000. To pay for the $1.8 billion shortfall in the retirement account, each individual could be taxed $50. But wait. So far, we’re only considering three CAFRs in the state of California. The comprehensive reality is far more dramatic. If you combine all of California’s ~10,000 government agencies’ CAFRs, the combined total according to Walter Burien’s sampling analysis is $8 trillion. Let’s say Walter’s way-off. For argument’s sake, let’s say the total is less than half; only $3.5 trillion. If that was returned to the public, each Californian would receive $100,000. Walter says he’s confident in his documentation that every state has a similar structure that has overtaxed and seized Americans’ hard-earned money. His solution is to have this invested money actually benefit the public by having dividend returns pay for government budgets. If government agencies divested their investments, the market value of the investments would plummet. He explains his solution in the radio interview below. Obviously, we need independent auditing of all state CAFRs and independent economic cost-benefit analyses to make our choices clear of how the public benefit is best served. Californians oppressed under a $20 billion dollar budget deficit that cuts essential public services while not considering taxpayers’ trillions ―i nvested‖ in our names is among the worst choices imaginable. To put this into an analogy, I’ve modified the one used by Walter: This is like a juvenile claiming he needs money because his front pants pocket is empty, which he dutifully shows (budget). What he's not telling you is that his back pockets have over 100 times the money he says he "needs" (shown in various places of the CAFRs). Whenever he's asked about the money in his back pockets, which he never volunteers in discussing his empty front pocket and never invites for consideration to move some into the front pocket, he says, "Oh, that money is designated for other uses. I can't touch that." So far, the silence of corporate media and political leadership from Left and Right has brought us to today. Of course, "I can't touch that" is a lie of omission because it can be touched the moment policy changes. So the real issue is the heart of economics: what are the costs and benefits of different choices? The fact that the public isn’t aware that their tax money is available and corporate media doesn’t report it points to corporate media collusion. Corporate media disinformation for cartels like our banking industry is documented in two resources, academic and a call to citizen action: Open proposal to US higher education: end oligarchy economics, save trillions with education

Government by dicts: my comprehensive resources to prove US fascism and rigged-casino economics Thanks to the Jubilee Report for the heads-up about Oregon! This is not the first time Oregon has been directly advised of this problem and not directed public money for public benefit; see this. Watch the video:

Secretary of State's Office Finds $3.3 billion in Available Funds! Mon, 2010-01-11 11:21

Senate Republican Office Oregon State Capitol FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

New state financial report details $3.3 billion in available funds Salem, OR – Oregon’s Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR) released by the Secretary of State’s office last week states that more than $3.3 billion in ―unres erved, undesignated fund balance… was available for spending [1].‖ A budget plan pushed by Senate Republicans calls for $133 million from those balances to help finance this cycle’s budget in a way that protects the economy and preserves important services. ― We can protect important government services and Oregon’s economy by using the money already at the state’s disposal,‖ said Senator Chris Telfer (R-Bend). ― This report confirms that there are billions of dollars for use at the legislature’s discretion. We should use a small portion of this money to protect K-12 classrooms, higher education, services for the disabled and public safety.‖ The CAFR, prepared by the State Controller’s Division at the Department of Administrative Services to analyze the position of the Oregon’s fiscal affairs, states: “As of June 30, 2009, the State’s governmental funds reported combined ending fund balances of $4.4 billion. Of this amount, approximately 25.1 percent was reserved for nonspendable items, such as inventories and permanent fund principal, or for specific purposes, such as debt service. The remainder was classified as unreserved, undesignated fund balance and was available for spending, subject to statutory and constitutional spending constraints.”[1] Since by definition lawmakers write statute, any statutory constraints can be addressed. ― This is money that has piled up in agencies from over-collected fees and it is revenue that has not been expended as scheduled,‖ said Senate Republican Leader Ted Ferrioli (R-John Day). ―T hese are taxpayer dollars that should never be left stranded in the bureaucracy, but shifted to pay for services Oregonians need. If we use this money wisely, we can leave the economy to grow and recover.‖ Senate Republicans have announced a budget proposal for the February session, saying that there are ways to balance the budget without increasing unemployment or drastically cutting services in the midst of a historic recession. See an outline of the budget here: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CAFR: UC budget fully funded with one-fifth of one percent of State of California “investments” May 24, 7:58 AM

LA County Nonpartisan Examiner

Carl Herman

The immense power behind the central banking system controls our lives.

The UC system had a budget deficit for this ending school year of $0.65 billion. The policy response was to deny 2,300 students enrollment, lay-off over 2,000 faculty and staff, furlough teaching days and cut 10% salaries, and raise tuition by 32%. For less than one-fifth of one percent of the investment total of California, UC would have been fully-funded and those reductions eliminated. This was a point in my previous CAFR article; I’m highlighting it here and invite you to fully understand the data. The meaning of the data is that our economic crisis has been intentionally created by our political ― leaders‖ and propagandized by corporate media. Knowledge of the data empowers citizens to end the crisis, fully investigate the criminals who caused it, and implement the obvious economic solutions that unleash trillions of dollars worth of Americans’ productivity every year for our maximum benefit and enjoyment. Actually, because complicity in corruption is so deep, the probable best policy response is Truth and Reconciliation to exchange full factual disclosure and return of public assets for no prosecution. What isn’t disclosed within a time window is subject to criminal and civil prosecution. The purpose of this strategy is for those willing to have a ―Scro oge conversion‖ to become powerful partners of humanity for cooperation, justice, dignity and freedom for all. Their information is vital to conclusive and rapid end of American criminal political and economic oligarchs. California’s political ― leadership‖ of both parties have lied in omission by failing to discuss California’s investments of $367 billion (page 48) as a possible source of funding for the ~$20 billion budget deficit. Ethical politicians would have presented the facts for professional and independent economic

cost-benefit analysis to communicate choices to the tax-paying public. But ours have failed in their primary duty to represent the public good, and will soon have to explain the facts. ―Le adership‖ claims that this money is necessary to leave alone in order to mainly for public employee retirement benefits. Let’s check that story. California’s Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR) shows current member contribution pays for all retiree benefits except for $1.8 billion (also pages 48 and 49). This means that Republican and Democratic ―l eaders‖ say they need to extract and hold over $367 billion from the taxpayers in order to pay for a cost of one-half of one percent of OUR money they took from us. These ―le aders‖ are lying sacks of spin. My favorite definition of the word, ―ev il‖ is ―preference for one’s own material gain over the well-being of others.‖ Our leaders have been evil to steal the public’s money through obfuscating language as ―i nvestments‖ that then serve as what author Ellen Brown calls, ― Stagnant pools of government money.‖ I also looked at the CAFRs for Los Angeles County ($52 billion in investments; pages 61-63) and the City of Los Angeles ($36 billion; page 80). Both have drastically cut programs. Both have pension plans underfunded by current members by less than 2% of their investment totals. California has a budget deficit of ~$20 billion. The combined investments of CAFRs for the state of CA, Los Angeles County, and the City of Los Angeles is over $450 billion; over 22 times the amount of the budget shortfall. If just these three state agencies surrendered their withheld money back to the public instead of lording over it as communists, each Californian would receive ~$15,000. To pay for the $1.8 billion shortfall in the retirement account, each individual could be taxed $50. But wait. So far, we’re only considering three CAFRs in the state of California. The comprehensive reality is far more dramatic. If you combine all of California’s ~10,000 government agencies’ CAFRs, the combined total according to Walter Burien’s sampling analysis is $8 trillion. Let’s say Walter’s way-off. For argument’s sake, let’s say the total is less than half; only $3.5 trillion. If that was returned to the public, each Californian would receive $100,000. Walter says he’s confident in his documentation that every state has a similar structure that has overtaxed and seized Americans’ hard-earned money. His solution is to have this invested money actually benefit the public by having dividend returns pay for government budgets. If government agencies divested their investments, the market value of the investments would plummet. He explains his solution in the radio interview below. Obviously, we need independent auditing of all state CAFRs and independent economic cost-benefit analyses to make our choices clear of how the public benefit is best served. Californians oppressed under a $20 billion dollar budget deficit that cuts essential public services while not considering taxpayers’ trillions ―i nvested‖ in our names is among the worst choices imaginable. To put this into an analogy, I’ve modified the one used by Walter: This is like a juvenile claiming he needs money because his front pants pocket is empty, which he dutifully shows (budget). What he's not telling you is that his back pockets have over 100 times the money he says he "needs" (shown in various places of the CAFRs). Whenever he's asked about the money in his back pockets, which he never volunteers in discussing his empty front pocket and never invites for consideration to move some into the front pocket, he says, "Oh, that money is designated for other uses. I can't touch that." So far, the silence of corporate media and political leadership from

Left and Right has brought us to today. Of course, "I can't touch that" is a lie of omission because it can be touched the moment policy changes. So the real issue is the heart of economics: what are the costs and benefits of different choices? CAFRs reveal a communist-style policy whereby US taxpayers surrender enormous assets to the state, who then ―inv est‖ these collective trillions that swell in these accounts. Concurrently, taxpayers are informed of budget deficits to either squeeze more taxes from them and/or cut public services. To add insult to injury, the state lies in omission by never reminding Americans of their hard-earned and withheld trillions of their dollars as they eliminate jobs, reduce education, and attack the quality of Americans’ lives. The American Constitution is a contract of limited government whereby the public informs and is informed by our representatives. CAFRs are damning public documents that expose ―le adership‖ from Left and Right as exactly what leading economic voices have said: an absolutely corrupt and self-serving oligarchy.

Watch the video: Walter Burien Explains The Comprehensive Annual Financial Reports on Alex Jones TV 1/6 May 26, 2010 — Alex talks with Walter Burien, an advocate for government fiscal accountability and budgeting. Burien's documentary, The Biggest Game in Town, exposes government theft behind Comprehensive Annual Financial Reports. I’ve also included an interview with Bob Chapman from the International Forecaster who explains why our public pension funds are at risk. Be sure the auto play feature is checked so the segments advance automatically. WATCH THE VIDEO:

Get your copy of the

State of California – CAFR Reports Online 2009 - 2008 = 2007 = 2006 = 2005 = 2004 = 2003 = 2002 = 2001 =

2000 = 1999 =

Additional CAFR Reports California State Teachers' Retirement System CAFR

AND CalPers Comprehensive Annual Financial Report June 30, 2009 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2009 Operations Summary

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2008 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

June 30. 2008 Operations Summary

June 30, 2007 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

June 30, 2007 Operations Summary

June 30, 2006 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

June 30, 2006 Operations Summary

June 30, 2005 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

June 30, 2005 Operations Summary

June 30, 2004 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2004 Operations Summary

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2003 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2003 Operations Summary

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2002 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

Available for Download Only

June 30, 2001 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report

Available for Download Only

County of Sacramento CAFR Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR)     

For For For For For

the the the the the

Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal

Year Year Year Year Year

Ended Ended Ended Ended Ended

June June June June June

30, 30, 30, 30, 30,

2009 2008 2007 2006 2005

City of Sacramento CAFR - Financial Reporting

CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2009 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2008 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2007 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2006 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2005 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2004 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2003 (PDF) CAFR Fiscal Year ended June 30, 2002 (PDF) Also see: The City Treasurer's Listing of Official Statements 2001 to Current.

CAFR Attachments 2009 Report to Council (PDF) 2009 Single Audit Report (PDF) 2008 Report to Council (PDF) 2008 Single Audit Report (PDF)

Also see Walter Burien’s website: Understanding CAFR’s: and And Gerald Klatt’s website on how to interpret CAFR’s:

Quotable Quotes: The CAFR is perhaps the largest scam in world history This is a banking cartel plan to efficiently and silently move wealth from the middle class into the banking class. The 401k and retirement account systems utilize these "investments" portfolios to leverage the collective wealth. Of course they always say it’s "for the good of the many" or "by combining the wealth we can make more". No, it simply means the banks have more monopoly money to play with while we are all going broke and losing our houses. This is perhaps the pinnacle of the problems we have in this country. S. Ackley

During times of universal deceit, telling the truth becomes a revolutionary act. - George Orwell "There exists in this country a plot to enslave every man woman and child. Before I leave this high and noble office, I intend to expose this plot." - President John F. Kennedy - 7 days before he was assassinated.

JOHN F. KENNEDY APRIL 27, 1961 SPEECH The President and the Press: American Newspaper Publishers Association Excerpt The very word "secrecy" is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths and to secret proceedings. We decided long ago that the dangers of excessive and unwarranted concealment of pertinent facts far outweighed the dangers which are cited to justify it. Even today, there is little value in opposing the threat of a closed society by imitating its arbitrary restrictions. Even today, there is little value in insuring the survival of our nation if our traditions do not survive with it. And there is very grave danger that an announced need for increased security will be seized upon by those anxious to expand its meaning to the very limits of official censorship and concealment. That I do not intend to permit to the extent that it’s in my control. And no official of my Administration, whether his rank is high or low, civilian or military, should interpret my words here tonight as an excuse to censor the news, to stifle dissent, to cover up our mistakes or to withhold from the press and the public the facts they deserve to know. To review his entire speech:

The PR Firm from Hell, Part 1 Submitted: Jul 01, 2009

By: Lloyd Carter Published in the June 30th, 2009 edition of the Fresno Community Alliance newspaper (First of two parts) Cesar Chavez knew the power of a good march. He led by example and he never stopped trying until he found a way. And this is exactly what we are going to do. We never will stop until we find a way, find a way together here, because this is the right thing to do, because we need water, we need water, we need water, we need water [chanting with crowd]. -Gov. Schwarzenegger, on April 17, at the San Luis Reservoir, following a four-day grower-funded march in which non-union farmworkers were paid to walk 50 miles from Mendota. Chavez‘ United Farm Workers union did not participate. UFW co-founder Dolores Huerta called it shameless exploitation of the late labor leader‘s legacy.

The masters of ― astroturfing‖ are trying to convince you, the media, California and Washington, D.C. that San Joaquin Valley farm workers‘ new best friend is Big Agribusiness, the same industry that has exploited them for decades. Say what? Campaigns & Elections magazine defines astroturfing as a "program that involves the manufacturing of public support for a point of view in which either uninformed activists are recruited or means of deception are used to recruit them." In other words, rich people with a lot of money but no popular support for their cause (getting richer), will create the illusion of broad public support by half truths, manipulation, disinformation, spin doctoring, creating false impressions, and cash. It also involves ghost writing op-ed columns and letters to the editor from little people, to generate the perception there is widespread public support for the client‘s position. Grassroots is bottom up. Astroturf is top down. The late Texas Sen. Lloyd Bentsen, a vice-presidential candidate and a lobbyist, is credited with coining the term "astroturf lobbying" to describe the synthetic grassroots movements conjured up by powerful lobbying and public relations firms. Astroturfing is specifically prohibited by the code of ethics of the Public Relations Society of America, the national association for members of the public relations profession. But that hasn‘t stopped the spin doctors at Burson-Marsteller (B-M), the astroturfing PR firm that has been hired by the California Latino Water Coalition (created around 2006-2007), headed by comedian Paul Rodriguez, and Orange Cove Mayor Victor Lopez, co-chairs of the coalition, and technical advisor Mario Santoyo, assistant general manager at the Friant Water Users Authority, which represents federal irrigation districts on the east side of the San Joaquin Valley from Madera County south to Bakersfield.

B-M has been helping the Friant growers for three years, trying to derail the lawsuit settlement to restore a living San Joaquin river to 60 miles of dry riverbed on the San Joaquin Valley floor. Republican Rep. Devin Nunes has been the most outspoken of the settlement critics and has called for the Governor‘s resignation for failing to push new water projects hard enough. (Nunes seems blissfully unconcerned California is facing a $24 billion budget deficit.) MSNBC talk show host Rachel Maddow, in a March telecast, called B-M ―th e PR firm from Hell‖ and said it had been hired to improve the ― image‖ of AIG, the company which has received $170 billion in taxpayer bailout money. (You can see Maddow ripping B-M on YouTube below.) How much B-M is being paid by the growers who fund the Latino Water Coalition - if it is being paid is not publicly available. No one in the mainstream media has inquired about the financing, except the New York Times, which noted in a story on the mid-April, four-day ― March for Water‖ that farmworkers were paid to participate. Classic astroturfing tactics. Founded in 1953, B-M is now one of the largest public relations firms in the world, and in 2000 was the first PR outfit to hit $300 million in revenues. In 1999, Harold Burson was named by PR Week magazine and website as the PR industry‘s ― most influential person of the 20th Century.‖ The PR Watch website has considerable material on B-M‘s past and present outrages. Big name employees include George W. Bush‘s first press secretary, Karen Hughes, and his last press secretary, the acid-tongued, irritable Dana Perino. However, the agency is not just staffed with Republican mudslingers. Spinmaster Mark Penn, the staunchly anti-union polling consultant and former chief strategist of Hillary Clinton‘s 2008 presidential campaign, is the current Chief Executive Officer of B-M. B-M‘s client list includes a who‘s who of corporate scoundrels and tin horn dictators, including: 1. Blackwater USA - After the private security firm killed 17 Iraqi civilians, they turned to B-M for ― crisis management.‖ Former B-M executive Robert Tappan, who had been a State Department official, worked at the PR firm‘s lobbying subsidiary, BKSH & Associates. Tappan helped Blackwater founder and head Erik Prince prepare for his testimony before the House Committee on Oversight and Government Reform. (In February, Blackwater, purportedly on the advice of B-M, changed its name to the mysterious Xe, pronounced Zee.) 2. Babcock & Wilcox, manufacturers of the Three Mile Island nuclear plant, hired B-M to ― manage‖ public perception after the 1979 meltdown. 3. Nigeria‘s brutal regime employed B-M in the late 1960s to counteract allegations it was committing genocide in the breakaway province of Biafra. ― Crisis management‖ was also provided the Indonesian regime accused of abuses of its citizens. 4. In the late 1970s and early 1980s, at the behest of the Argentinian military dictatorship, headed by General Jorge Videla, B-M organized a campaign against Argentinian human rights organizations which were contending a ― Dirty War‖ against the populaton was taking place, including the murder and disappearance of thousands of people. In her book ― The Shock Doctrine‖, Naomi Klein wrote:

― Victor Emmanuel, the Burson-Marsteller public relations executive who was in charge of selling the Argentine junta's new business-friendly regime to the outside world, told a researcher that violence was necessary to open up Argentina's "protective, statist" economy. "No one, but no one, invests in a country involved in a civil war," he said, admitting that it wasn't just rebels who died. "A lot of innocent people were probably killed," he told author Marguerite Feitlowitz, but, "given the situation, immense force was required." ‖ 5. Saudi Arabia‘s medieval royal government has employed B-M for more than 30 years to promote its interests and image. B-M prepared U.S. advertisements for Saudi Arabia following the September 11 attack on the World Trade Center, due, in part, to the fact 15 of the 19 airplane hijackers were Saudi citizens. 6. B-M handled public relations for Union Carbide Corporation following the 1984 explosion and disaster at a Union Carbide plant in Bhopal, India which killed 2,000 employees and neighbors and injured or blinded thousands more. 7. B-M set up the National Smokers Alliance on behalf of Philip Morris to fight tobacco regulation in the early 1990s. 8. Bromine Science and Environmental Forum (BSEF), which Burson-Marsteller created on behalf of chemical companies from the U.S., Israel and Japan who wanted to avoid an EU ban on bromine flame retardants suspected to have serious environmental and health impacts. For years the BSEF (lobbyists from the Brussels offices of Burson-Marsteller) lobbied against the EU ban on these substances, without clearly disclosing the nature of the group and the clients. Major companies in the finance, pharmaceutical and energy industries currently utilize B-M‘s services, according to B-M‘s own website. In 2006, the company gave 57 percent of its campaign contributions to Republican candidates. B-M, according to the May 17, 2007 issue of The Nation magazine, is owned by an even larger PR empire called the WPP Group. The decision to hire Mark Penn as the head of B-M was heavily influenced by Howard Paster, President Clinton's chief lobbyist to Capitol Hill and an influential presence inside WPP. "Clients of stature come to Mark [Penn]constantly for counsel," claimed Paster, who informally advised Hillary Clinton. The press release announcing Penn's promotion noted his work "developing and implementing deregulation informational programs for the electric utilities industry and in the financial services sector." (Italics added.) Both these PR and lobbying efforts - to deregulate energy and financial services - led to the California electricity crisis and manipulation of the state‘s energy supply by Enron, the 2003 blackout in the Northeastern U.S. and the current collapse of the financial services sector. So, what then does B-M expect to do for the California Latino Water Coalition? B-M‘s Patrick George, who works out of B-M‘s Sacramento office is listed as the media contact on the Latino Water Coalition press releases. The B-M website boasts that it has won the last nine California statewide initiative campaigns it has been involved in and it was expected to be involved in a $10 billion water bond issue in 2008 before the

economy collapsed. There will undoubtedly be an effort to put another water bond on the 2010 or 2012 California ballot. Some Western San Joaquin Valley growers acknowledge they are contributing to the Latino Water Coalition. It is clear the poverty-stricken farmworkers aren‘t paying the tab, and that it is agribusiness bankrolling the operation. The coalition website ( ) and KMJ radio commentator Ray Appleton, a major supporter of the Coalition, both solicit donations from the general public. Appleton does it on air. Mario Santoyo said on former Fresno Mayor Alan Autry‘s radio show that Comedian Rodriguez is not being compensated for any of his efforts. In an interview with the Yuma, AZ newspaper Rodriguez called himself the ― poster boy‖ and claimed Cesar Chavez was ―likean uncle‖ to him. Presuimably, the Friant growers were paying B-M big bucks before the PR firm got involved in the Latino Water Coalition. The transparent objective of B-M‘s astroturfing is to put a ― human face‖ on efforts to get more multibillion dollar water projects built with taxpayer funds to: (1) meet the water needs of industrial farming operations of the western San Joaquin Valley, and (2) halt (or replace) the loss of water by southeastern San Joaquin Valley growers in Tulare and Kern counties due to the restoration of the San Joaquin River. These are among the public relations objectives: 1. Conflate the interests of growers who want water with the needs of farmworkers who need jobs, so that it appears the largely Latino farmworker population fully supports the efforts of growers to get more taxpayer-financed cheap water, even while the basic needs of the farmworkers, such as decent wages, clean drinking water, and decent housing and working conditions, continue to go unmet. 2. Make it appear as if the entire San Joaquin Valley is threatened with reversion to desert because of a ― two-inch bait fish‖ instead of revealing that it is only the junior water rights holders who are suffering irrigation cutbacks and that thousands of growers with senior water rights are getting a full allotment this year. Emphasize a ― man-made drought‖ as the problem, not the real drought which is occurring (according to state officials). Some growers are making fat profits selling water at extortionate prices to their fellow water-short farmers. A May 15 letter to Sen. Dianne Feinstein from Lester Snow, head of the California Department of Water Resources, indicated that Westlands Water District, through Delta deliveries, carryover, groundwater, transfers and exchanges is actually getting 86 percent of its normal water supply this year. The groundwater, of course, is of low quality in many cases and cannot be quickly replaced. 3. Demonize environmentalists and brand them as elitists from San Francisco who care more about a ― minnow‖ (i.e., the Delta Smelt) than they do about human beings, especially the tens of thousands of farmworkers who will lose their seasonal jobs which now pay an average of $8,000 a year. 4. Reduce the crisis in the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta to a black and white issue of ― fish versus farmers‖ or ― fish versus food‖ and avoid the complexities of Delta restoration and the hierarchy of water rights. Rarely or never mention salmon (much less the commercial salmon industry), or steelhead, or killer whales, or sturgeon in simplifying the issue. Make it the smelt - a bait fish - versus human beings.

5. Ignore the concerns of the United Farm Workers union and the Teamsters union (which represents farmworkers in the Valley) and ignore or demonize environmental justice advocates. Don‘t get involved in supporting bills in the state legislature to improve the lives and working conditions of farmworkers. Big Ag routinely opposes those bills and the governor vetoes them. 6. Stage marches and rallies in the tradition of Cesar Chavez, and invoke Chavez‘ name where politically expedient, and conceal the fact that the marchers are being paid to participate. In a slickly-produced YouTube video, Comedian Rodriguez said when he was a boy he had marched with Cesar to help unionize farmworkers and was now asking people to participate in the mid-April ― March for Water‖ to help growers in Cesar Chavez‘ memory. Dolores Huerta shakes her head at this tactic. 7. Because growers, particularly large corporate operations, billionaire farmers like Stewart Resnick, and wealthy family mega-farms (like the Woolfs of the Westlands), have never been particularly sympathetic figures in the news media, the decision was made to make Latino farmworkers the ― human face‖ of this astroturfing campaign, perhaps to sway urban Latino state legislators. Jon Stewart‘s ―D aily Show‖ frequently runs a montage of video clips showing Republican (or Democrat) politicos mouthing the same sound bite of the day, which usually comes from a talking points paper prepared by a PR firm. That‘s what has been occurring the last two years with the ― human face‖ buzz phrase. For example (the italics are mine): July 2, 2007 - Fresno County Supervisor Phil Larson, who represents the Westlands Water District area, and allows his public office phone number and staff to be utilized by the Latino Water Coalition, told a House Subcommittee that cutbacks of irrigation water to protect the Delta Smelt was causing hardship among farmworkers, stating, ― There is a very human face to the decisions that are made.‖ July 24, 2008 - Fresno Bee Capitol correspondent E.J. Schultz, writing about a grower-financed rally in Sacramento, in which busloads of farmworkers were at the Capitol building to show the ― human face‖ of water politics, wrote: ― Wednesday's rally was designed to give a human face to the state's water woes. At least 300 farmworkers, most from the Valley's parched west side, marched and carried homemade signs declaring "agua es vida," or water is life, and "agua = trabajo," or water equals work.‖ April 14, 2009 - Laura King Moon, Assistant General Manager of the State Water Project, which represents the mega-farms of the western Tulare Basin, including the 150,000 acre J.G. Boswell cotton empire, issued this statement: ― Today, the California Latino Water Coalition began the first day of a four-day march across the San Joaquin Valley to highlight the severe water shortage that grips the Valley's farms, cities and jobs, as well as our broader state. Their goal is to raise statewide and national awareness of the water crisis that faces them and to put a human face on one of the most important issues facing California today.‖

April 14, 2009 - A column by Fresno Bee writer Bill McEwen carried the headline ― March to put Human Face on Water Crisis.‖ McEwen wrote that with a ― recession and a third year of drought intensifying the state‘s troubles – and putting a human face on our water problems - solutions might be coming. This human face will be shown to the nation and the world when the California March for Water begins this morning in Mendota.‖ April 17, 2009 - Tim Quinn, Executive Director of the Association of California Water Agencies (ACWA), appeared at the conclusion of the March for Water and stated to a crowd estimated at 3,000 people (Coalition officials put the estimate at 10,000) that the water crisis highlighted ― the human face of the misery evoked by water shortages.‖ KMJ broadcaster Ray Appleton has repeatedly said on his noon hour show the purpose of the Latino Water Coalition is to put a ― human face‖ on the campaign. It must be admitted B-M‘s astroturfing campaign in the San Joaquin Valley has been remarkably successful. The ― human face‖ of the new water projects campaign is now that of the downtrodden farmworker, not the rich grower. But Dolores Huerta, co-founder of the United Farm Workers, is not fooled and calls the Latino Water Coalition an obvious front group for the growers which is exploiting Cesar Chavez‘ legacy. She said Cesar was an ardent environmentalist and would never have participated in the April March for Water or demonized the environmentalists. She also notes the Latino Water Coalition has not lobbied for bills to make it easier for farmworkers to unionize nor has the coalition demanded a living wage, decent housing and clean drinking water for farmworkers before any new dams are built. The governor, she notes, has vetoed bills to help farmworkers unionize. The Valley‘s newspaper and television coverage of the Latino Water Coalition has been extensive and, at times, almost fawning. No hard questions are being asked about where the money is coming from or why the Latino Water Coalition is not lobbying in Sacramento and Washington for improved working conditions, decent housing and clean drinking water for the farmworkers they claim are part of their coalition. However, outside the Valley, the sales job has been tougher, particularly in the Nation‘s Capitol. Thus, more ― marches‖ are being planned, including a protest outside the new Fresno federal building on July 1, and the air transport of an unspecified number of farmworkers to Washington, D.C. to show lawmakers the ― human face‖ of failing to build more multi-billion dollar water projects to primarily benefit agribusiness. Presumably, non-union farmworkers will have to be recruited and paid to participate in this latest stunt. The astroturf needs a mowing. Lloyd G. Carter has been writing about San Joaquin Valley water issues for 40 years, including 20 years as an award-winning reporter for United Press International and the Fresno Bee. He has a website,

Class War For Idiots / Water Wars AlterNet / By Yasha Levine

Why Just About Everything You Hear About California's Water Crisis Is Wrong, Wrong, Wrong By Yasha Levine January 8, 2010

Watch The Great Water Heist:

We‘ve been lied to for years now about the severity of California‘s water shortage. The media and state officials have been ringing the alarm, warning that the state was in the grips of the quite possibly the ― worst California drought in modern history,‖ when in fact the state nearly pulled in its average rainfall in 2009. The fearmongering is about to go into overdrive, as powerful interests start whipping up fears of drought to push through a $11 billion bond measure on the upcoming November elections, setting up the Golden State for a corporate water grab. One of the big boosters promoting the drought scare is Gov. Schwarzenegger, who declared a state of emergency in early 2009, and promised to reduce water deliveries across the state by a whopping 80 percent. Such a huge cutback is alarming for a state in which most of the population lives hundreds of miles away from water sources and is dependent on a gargantuan aqueduct system for basic survival. So journalists seized on this juicy disaster-in-progress story, hitting their readers with heavy-handed images of drought and suffering that seemed more in line with something filed on a UN humanitarian mission in Somalia than news from the heart of California. Has the drought really been that bad? According to the November/December 2009 issue of Mother Jones, yes, it has: ―[ F]armers are selling prized almond trees for firewood, fields are reverting to weed, and farm workers who once fled droughts in Mexico are overwhelming food banks. In short, the valley is becoming what an earlier generation of refugees thought they‘d escaped: an ecological catastrophe in the middle of a social and economic one — a 21st century Dust Bowl.‖ 60 Minutes‗ recent segment on California‘s water crisis agreed, proclaiming: ― You don‘t have to go to Africa or the Middle East to see how much the planet is running dry. Just

go to California.‖The New York Times, Los Angeles Times, McClatchy‘s, the Wall Street Journal – all have sung the same tune. When left, right, print, broadcast and mainstream media outlets agree, it has to be true, right? Well, not exactly. Here‘s what an end-of-the-year update published in November 2009 by the US Bureau of Reclamation had to say about the drought: precipitation in 2009 was about 94 percent of average in Northern California, which is pretty much the only region that matters since it is where three-quarters of the state‘s water comes from. Ninety-four percent of average? That does not sound like severe drought conditions at all. But don‘t tell that to California‘s Department of Water Resources, which still has a huge DHS-style ― Drought Condition Severe‖ orange alert plastered on its Web site.

The power of simple fact-checking aside, why would California officials exaggerate — if not outright lie — about the drought? Well, the issue here is less about the drought itself and more about what a drought — real or not — can help achieve. If there is one thing 2009 revealed about California‘s ― action hero‖ governor, it‘s that he is eagerly willing to serve as the front man for the sleaziest, most crooked business cartel in the state: a de facto water oligarchy made up of billionaire corporate farmers who run vast stretches of the state like their own personal fiefdoms, exploiting migrant workers for slave labor and soaking the taxpayers for billions of dollars in subsidies every year. And like all good businessmen, they aren‘t letting a good mini-crisis go to waste. Their objective is to whip up fears of a drought-related calamity to push through a ― solution‖ they‘ve been having wet dreams about for the past five decades: a multi-billion-dollar aqueduct the width of the Panama Canal that would give them near total control of more than half of California‘s water supplies. That‘s what the state‘s ― historic‖ $11-billion bond measure that will appear on the November 2010 ballot is all about. A columnist at the Stockton Record said it best: It ― really amounts to an old-fashioned California water grab based on the failure to face nature‘s limits.‖ In the convoluted world of California water politics, nothing is ever what it seems. And this time, it appears that even the most well-meaning of journalists fighting the good fight fell hook, line and sinker for the propaganda spun out by California‘s well-greased water oligarchy. But if everyone got something as basic as the premise of California‘s supposed water crisis — the drought — wrong, what else did they miss? Turns out, quite a bit. With no real drought in California, a lot of the myths, falsehoods and outright lies meant to stir up the masses might no longer make sense. On the other hand, just because the state has rain doesn‘t mean the state can‘t run out water, not with the way corporate farmers are ramping up the pumping of the state‘s increasingly-overtapped water supplies. So here are the top five things your billionaire-bullshit meter should be picking up:

Myth: Urban water conservation is key in protecting California‘s water resources Schwarzenegger‘s mandate that urban water use be cut by 20 percent has earned the governor a lot of green creed, but few people realize that his plan for water conservation is actually a forced wealth transfer scheme in a environmentalist disguise. Conservation is a good idea, but it won‘t do much good for California, no matter how diligent residents are about turning off the tap while brushing or the number of low-flush toilets they install, not unless farmers are forced to conserve water as well. It is a simple matter of discrimination. Why is the agricultural industry exempted from mandatory conservation when it consumes an unreal 80% of California‘s water? There won‘t be much conservation going on even if every living soul in California up and moves to another state. Because no matter how much water city dwellers save, it‘ll be sucked up by wealthy corporate farmers who are always on the lookout for more taxpayersubsidized wet wealth. And with water trading for a minimum at ten times what they pay for it on the open market, every gallon a city dweller conserves will end up as cash in the personal bank account of some wealthy corporate farmers. It‘s all part of the master plan because, even as the governor talks up urban conservation, he tries his darnedest to get them more water. Myth: Irrigation water rationing is causing California‘s unemployment to spike to critical levels. I could quote from a number of news sources — Fox News, CBS, Mother Jones, theNew York Times — to demonstrate the pervasiveness of this bogus notion, but luckily there is no need because most of the stuff is oddly similar to the media spam cranked out by Governor Schwarzenegger‘s press secretary. Something like this: ―[ Drought] conditions are causing a loss of livelihood for many thousands of people, an inability to provide for families, and increased harm to the communities that depend on them . . . the Central Valley town of Mendota, as one example, already reports an unemployment rate of more than 40 percent and lines of a thousand or more for food distribution.‖ Had any journalist bothered to look up its unemployment rate for some other year, they would have seen that water has never been a factor. Over a decade ago, Mendota‘s unemployment normally ranged from 28 to 32 percent. In 1998, a wet year, it had an unemployment rate of 38 percent. In 2002, a slightly dry year, unemployment was still the same: 37.7 percent. The chronic hardship seen in Mendota, and the much of the Central Valley, cannot be neatly blamed on the weather. There are other bigger, more ominous forces at play here. Mendota is in a bad place, at once existing on the edge of America‘s poorest Congressional District and also in one of its wealthiest, most subsidized farming communities: the Westland‘s Water District. This is how Lloyd G. Carter, a veteran UPI reporter who has covered California‘s farming industry for three decades, describes it: ― Rule is by the rich. Indeed, in Westland‘s, which is a public agency, the growers with the most land have the most votes in electing directors to the district‘s board. The late Justice William O. Douglas called this voting control by the big growers a corporate political kingdom undreamed of by those who wrote our Constitution.‖ To put it another way: the billionaire farmers who run Westlands like their own fiefdom have always liked to keep their labor costs down, preferring low-paid migrant workers to those who would register with the unemployment office. Myth: The ―drought‖ is hurting small, family farmers — ―the backbone of America‖ — the most. Small farmers are hurting, but rarely does it have anything to do with water rationing. You‘ll find gobs of farmer pity in just about every story filed on the Central Valley, but most forget to mention that the bulk of the land threatened by water shortages is owned by wealthy corporate farmers clustered in and around Westland‘s Water District, in the driest, hottest and most isolated corner of the Central Valley. Most of these ― farmers‖ don‘t rise with the crow of the rooster, but fly in on private jets from Orange County and Beverly Hills. Most

journalists, like the one who wrote a long rambling piece in the David Eggers special Bay Area newspaper production, Panorama, insist on painting scenes of family farm life in sentimental pastel while ignoring the greedy geezers who really run the show, and own everyone and everything in sight.

―W‖ is for ―welfare‖: two generations of money-grubbing farmers from the Woolf family But you get to meet one of the boys from Westlands doing his struggling farmer routine on 60 Minutes, giving viewers a walkthrough of his family-farm-in-crisis, explaining how the drought forced him to fallow some of his fields while, in the background, massive shredding trucks turned $18-million worth his almond trees into a neat pile of wood chips. The 60 Minutes segment, like most other farmer profiles, left out the stuff that would squelch any sympathy for their cause. Like the fact that the Woolf family clan operates the ― biggest farming operation in Fresno County‖ that receives $4.2 million in taxpayer-subsidized water every year, enough to supply a city of 150,000 people. In the past decade, the dozen or so companies partially owned by Stuart Woolf have taken in roughly $8 million in federal crop subsidies. But Stuart Woolf still feels like he isn‘t getting enough. In 2008, he threatened a congressional subcommittee that he‘d move his family‘s farm holdings to Portugal, Spain, Turkey and even China if the feds didn‘t give him more taxpayer-subsidized water. Myth: Water shortages threaten to wipe out California‘s agricultural industry, causing a chain reaction that will cripple the state‘s economy and raise food prices around the country, maybe even the world. It‘s true, a total meltdown of California‘s agricultural industry, the largest in the United States, would be bad news for everyone involved. But the problem with this apocalyptic domino effect, which pops up as a talking point on Schwarzenegger‘s press releases and is parroted by the likes of Bloomberg and the Wall Street Journal, is a pesky thing called reality. Most irrigation districts have been getting their water on schedule. And because the drought has only affected a tiny sliver — about two percent — of California‘s total farmland, most of which happens to be some of the most heavily-subsidized growing operations in the state, any ― multiplier effect‖ is bound to be limited, if noticeable at all. Take Westland‘s Water District, where a sizable chunk of the state‘s fallowed farmland is concentrated. The district produces about $1 billion in gross income a year, $750 million of which is funded by water subsidies. Add to that hundreds of millions more in direct crop subsidies, and pretty soon the government ends up funding most, if not all of Westlands‘ economic output. Even if Westland‘s farmers weren‘t such welfare queens, it would be hard to get worked even if the entire old billionaire club went under. After all, their entire output amounts to one-half of one percent of California‘s $1.8 trillion. And we‘re not talking about missing out on vital crops here: who‘d even notice an uptick in almond prices? Myth: Big city environmentalists are making the drought more serious than it actually is.

In 2007, a federal judge limited the amount of water that could be pumped out of Northern California because it endangering a small, but important fish called the Delta smelt, which is now protected by the California Endangered Species Act. Ever since, California‘s wealthy Central Valley farmers — including Westlands — have staged a public relations war, blaming big city elitists for caring more about the environment than they do about American farmers. ― Thanks to environmental regulations designed to protect the likes of the three-inch long delta smelt, one of America‘s premier agricultural regions is suffering in a drought made worse by federal regulations,‖ pronounced a Wall Street Journal editorial in September 2009. Fox News took the attack to a whole new level, with Sean Hannity proclaiming that President and his Royal Democratic-Socialist Guard were single-handedly killing off hardworking American farmers and demanded that the Obama ― turn this water on now.‖ The funny thing is that Obama had already done that, when the courtordered pumping restrictions were lifted three months earlier. The reason these farmers weren‘t getting their water had nothing to do with the fish, and all to do with their ― junior‖ water rights and a bailout business mentality. In the past decade, farmers had lobbied for and received 30% more water than they did in the 1990s, knowingly taking a gamble by planting permanent, high-cost crops in an area first to suffer water cutbacks during dry times. But they did it anyway, fully expecting to get the government to keep delivering the water even in a time of drought, which it has. According to the Environmental Defense Fund, even the most junior water rights holders were receiving almost all of their water all throughout 2009. Where has all that water gone? Well, some of the farmers have been selling it on the open market, frequently flipping their heavily taxpayer-subsidized water back to the government for twice the price. One millionaire farmer-cum-real-estate-developer made roughly $60 million selling his welfare water to a McTract Home paradise in the Mojave Desert, selling water was easier and more lucrative than farming. Bonus myth: the drought has sparked a grassroots movement of farm owners and farm workers, uniting to pressure the government for more water. Nothing exposes Arnold Schwarzenegger and his billionaire farmers backers for the sadistic slime balls that they are than the Latino Water Coalition, an astroturf group created by farming interests, paid for by taxpayer money and blessed by the governor himself. The group was designed to give a populist face to a purely corporate cause, paying poor Latino migrant workers to take part in protests staged for the benefit of Fox News‘ camera, even sent to go on a 5-day ― March for Water‖ to draw attention to California farmers‘ plight and generally exploiting the exploited so that you can help you exploit them even more. But the worst part about it is that well-meaning journalists fell for it. Yasha Levine is a mobile home inhabitin‟editor of The eXiled. He is currently stationed in Victorville, CA. You can reach him at levine [at]

Wolf Cries Howling About Drought, All Wet, No More Doubts, Officials Exaggerated Severity of Drought Posted on 17 September 2010 By Patrick Porgans and Lloyd G. Carter Despite the fact that the federal and state officials are seemingly still at odds as to whether the drought is over, a review of the governments data indicates that contrary to the wolf cries of Fox, CBS, the Governor and water officials, the recent California drought was very mild at best in comparison to historical droughts. This finding is prefaced on extrapolating data from the four-year period, 2006 through 2009 - within which a three-year drought purportedly occurred - with the drought which occurred from 1987 through 1992, using the last four years of that drought. Figure 1 is in Million Acre-Feet (MAF); Water Year (WY) Summary.

Data in Figure 1, extrapolated from Department of Water Resources (DWR) Bulletin 120 series – Water Conditions in California, illustrates the difference in water conditions prevalent during the 1989 through 1992 and the 2006 through 2009 drought years (using four-year periods, which includes the year before the current drought started). During both periods, statewide water consumption remained relatively constant, supplemented by a significant increase in groundwater consumption. It is important to note, that groundwater provides about 40% of California‘s annual water supply. In dry years, that percentage can go as high as 60 percent. Major surface water projects were developed to augment surface and ground water depletions and to weather drought cycles.

Figure 1 also indicates that there was a significant increase in the state‘s water supply within past drought period as compared to the 1989-1992 drought period. A 58 percent increase in the indices on the Sacramento Valley side and an 81 percent increase on the San Joaquin Valley side. (Note: Spreadsheet data which includes the percentage increase upon which these calculations were made can be viewed at blog.) Based on the period of record (1906-2009), Sacramento Valley unimpaired runoff averages out at 18 million-acre-feet (MAF); the San Joaquin Valley unimpaired runoff averages out at about six MAF; in the 2006-2009 period in the Sacramento valley it was 16.39 MAF; San Joaquin Valley 5.35 MAF. Hydrologic and Water Supply Conditions and Precipitation in California: The 2009 Water Year (October 1, 2008 through September 30, 2009) was the third consecutive year of below average precipitation for the state. In DWR Bulletin 120 series, Summary of Water Conditions, average statewide precipitation totaled 80 percent, 85 percent, and 65 percent of average for Water Years 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. According to DWR‘s Bulletin 120, water year 2006 was 140 percent above average. Ironically, the average of the four years is 92 percent of normal precipitation; reservoir storage for that same period would have averaged out to 96 percent. Furthermore, at the end of 2009 statewide reservoir storage was averaging 80 percent of capacity. In addition, according to DWR‘s Bulletin 120-4-10, in May 2010, statewide reservoir storage was at 95 percent, and statewide precipitation was at 110 percent. Conversely, during the previous drought, reservoir storage capacity statewide in 1992, the last year of that drought, was at 70 percent; average for the 1989-1992 period would have been 75 percent. Those numbers indicate that the 1989-1992 period were much more drastic than the recent ― drought‖. Yet, the 1989-1992 drought was not compared to the ― Dust Bowl‖ or the Armageddon of California agriculture. Wet and dry cycles are a part of California‘s climate, as is indicated by water runoff, which is illustrated in Figure 2. Precipitation varies widely from year to year. In average years, close to 200 million acre-feet (MAF) of water falls in the form of rain or snow in California. That is enough water to flood the entire state two feet deep in water. 

S Over half of that water soaks into the ground, evaporates or is used by native vegetation. That leaves somewhere around 82 million-acre feet of usable surface water in average years.

About 75 percent of California‘s available water occurs north of Sacramento, while about 80 percent of the demand occurs in the southern two-thirds of the state.

There have been about 30 years out of 92 (since 1918) or about one in every three years that the state includes as part of a drought period. The North Coast Hydrological Region produces the largest volume of runoff; however, it has limited storage capacity. The Sacramento River Basin is the second-richest water producing area, and has the largest volume of water storage capacity in California. The average annual runoff in the basin is around 18 million acre-feet of water, as is indicated in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Sacramento River Unimpaired Runoff Since 1906 – Source, DWR

As indicated on the Sacramento River Unimpaired Runoff Since 1906, California has experienced eightnotable drought cycles, four of which occurred in: 1928-1934 (pre-government water project development); 1976-1977 (post SWP and CVP); 1987-1992; 2007-2009). A similar request for unimpaired runoff for the San Joaquin River watershed and a statewide graph was also requested; however, according to a DWR official, this information does not appear to exist. Water year types for the Sacramento Valley and the San Joaquin Valley can be viewed at MOTIVE FOR THE DROUGHT: Why then did Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger issue a drought proclamation at the onset of the below average conditions, and opted not to declare the drought as being over in 2010? Simply stated, his proclamation opened up the floodgate to release hundreds of millions of dollars of public money used to fund so-called drought relief programs to a host of local water agencies and agricultural recipients. Also, when a state-ofemergency is proclaimed it essentially sets aside many regulatory and environmental safeguards. Critics contend that the Governor and his supporters exacerbated the extent of the drought and used it as the platform to promote the passage of the $11 billion General Obligation Bond ― Water Package‖ purportedly designed to increase the state‘s water supply reliability, improve its aging infrastructure, and ― fix‖ the broken Bay-Delta Estuary. The $11 billion bond act was taken off this November‘s ballot for reasons yet fully divulged and is now scheduled for the November 2012 election. The public is paying for the drought relief programs, with borrowed money repaid from the $20 billion deficit-ridden General Fund. and

Mother Jones Article Promotes Corporate Agribusiness Astroturfing Submitted by Tim Stroshane on Mon, 01/04/2010 - 10:42pm C-WIN Guest Blog by Dan Bacher

The "Astroturf" campaign by corporate agribusiness to build a peripheral canal and more dams to increase Delta water exports has relentlessly promoted the myth that crops grown on drainage-impaired land on the west side of the San Joaquin Valley "feed the nation" or "feed the world." The corporate media and even some "alternative" media outlets have bought into this myth in their coverage of the California water wars, portraying the conflict as one between hard-working farmers like those portrayed in the classic Grant Wood painting who only want "feed America" versus "radical environmentalists" who want to protect a "minnow" like the Delta smelt. A poorly researched article on California water, the "New Dust Bowl," appeared in the November-December edition of Mother Jones magazine, a publication supposedly known for its investigative reporting. The "New Dust Bowl" sounds just like a headline from the Sean Hannity Show or Fox "News" - and the article reads like a propaganda piece for growers on the west side of the San Joaquin Valley. "On the west side of the valley, which is often last in line for deliveries from federal water projects, farmers are selling prized almond trees for firewood, fields are reverting to weed, and farmworkers who once fled droughts in Mexico are overwhelming food banks," claims the author, Josh Harkinson. "In short, the valley is becoming what an earlier generation of refugees thought they'd escaped: an ecological catastrophe in the middle of a social and economic one—a 21st century Dust Bowl." In falsely portraying the west side as "a 21st century Dust Bowl," Harkinson sounds here like a speech writer for one of Governor Arnold Schwarzenegger's rants for a rally of the Latino Water Coalition, an "Astroturf" organization set up by the Governor and San Joaquin Valley growers to put a "human face" on corporate agribusiness in order to promote the construction of a peripheral canal and more dams and to strip protections for Central Valley salmon, Delta smelt and other fish species under the Endangered Species Act. ―A stroturfing‖

is an English-language euphemism referring to political, advertising, or public relations campaigns that are formally planned by an organization, but designed to mask its origins to create the impression of being spontaneous, popular ‗grassroots‘ behavior. How can Mother Jones, "a bimonthly magazine of investigative journalism that exposes the evils of the corporate world, the government, and the mainstream media," according to its website, push the agenda of Governor Arnold Schwarzenegger, corporate agribusiness and right wing astroturfers and not quote anybody from the Delta or fishing communities? And what about Delta farmers and farmworkers that are threatened by water exports to agribusiness on the west side of the San Joaquin Valley? This piece makes much of the corporate media reporting on the water issue, which leaves much to be desired, look "fair and balanced" in comparison. Mother Jones, the magazine's namesake, would be spinning in her grave if she saw how Harkinson accepted the agribusiness spin on California water politics and the lies of an Astroturf group such as the Latino Water Coalition as virtual gospel truth. "In the 1930s, Okies saw California's Central Valley as a Garden of Eden. Now it's dying of thirst," claims Harkinson. However, Lloyd Carter, who has written about California water issues for 40 years, points out Harkinson's contention that the San Joaquin Valley is a "dust bowl" and is "dying of thirst" has no basis in fact. "There are four million acres of land in production in the San Joaquin Valley," said Carter. "The drought has idled 500,000, or one-eighth of the land. The Valley is hardly a dust bowl." Harkinson uses dubious data in making his point about massive unemployment "caused" by the drought. "The drought is expected to dry up a billion dollars in income and 35,000 jobs, adding to a statewide unemployment rate that recently hit 11.9 percent—the highest since the eve of World War II," Harkinson states. In contrast to the high figures that Harkinson cites, Jeffrey Michael, University of the Pacific economist, estimates that the San Joaquin Valley has lost 8,500 jobs from reduced water exports in 2009. "Roughly 2,000 of these are attributable to the endangered Delta smelt and the rest to the natural drought," said Michael. Harkinson fails to report the 23,000 people in the fishing industry now unemployed, according to economic data compiled by the American Sportfishing Association, because of the collapse of salmon spurred by massive water exports of Delta water to subsidized agribusiness and southern California. I am surprised by the author's statement, in response to criticism of his article, that, "What remains (of Westlands Water District ) is some of the most productive farmland in the world. Or was, before its water ran out." Actually, the drainage impaired land in the Westlands Water District is among the least efficient and least productive on the planet. These rich corporate growers receive subsidized water to grow subsidized crops on land that should have never been irrigated because of the selenium and heavy metals that fill the soil. The drainage problems associated with land that should have never been irrigated have never been effectively addressed by the state or federal governments.

"The smelt are a key food for salmon, which is why their preservation is more than a simple question of man vs nature," Josh Harkinson stated. In reality, the smelt aren't a "key food" for salmon now, nor have they ever been. The Delta smelt is an indicator species that shows the health of the estuary, but are not found in the ocean where the salmon feed after migrating down the river as juveniles. (After I pointed this out on a post on the Mother Jones website, Harkinson did correct his mistake). The only bit of truth I find in the article is where Harkinson quotes Governor Schwarzenegger saying, "Cesar Chavez knew the power of a good march," without mentioning that the United Farm Workers (which Chavez founded) boycotted the march, calling it a front for anti-union growers. The next time Harkinson writes an article on California water, he should interview people like myself, Lloyd Carter, Bill Jennings of the California Sportfishing Protection Alliance, Barbara Barrigan-Parrilla from Restore the Delta, Zeke Grader of the Pacific Coast Federations of Fishermen's Associations and Mark Franco or Caleen Sisk-Franco of the Winnemem Wintu Tribe who know what's really going on in the Central Valley and in California water politics. It would also be a great idea for him to interview Arturo Rodriguez, the president of the United Farmworkers Union (UFW), or a representative of another farmworker organization before he subjects Mother Jones readers to the disinformation contained in his article. Harkinson should write a follow-up article where he includes quotes and data from these sources about the agribusiness campaign to falsely portray the battle to save California fisheries and Delta/northern California farms as one of "fish versus people" when it is really one of people versus corporate agribusiness. Rather than taking the Astroturf information at face value as he has done, the writer should look at the real story behind what's going on in the Central Valley and the Delta. Mother Jones should examine other economic realities of the San Joaquin Valley.

An examination of the actual economic data compiled by the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) reveals that there is no basis in fact for the contention that west side farmers are the "backbone" of American agriculture. According to a USDA Chart, US gross farm income in 2008 was around $375 billion.

Westlands Water District, the nation's largest water district, produces $1 billion annually in gross farm income, according to articles by Mark Grossi, Fresno Bee reporter, on November 7, 2009, and Garance Burke, Associated Press writer, on July 31. "That means Westlands' contribution to the nation's food supply (and exports) is about a quarter of a percent," said Lloyd Carter, veteran investigative journalist. According to this USDA website, net farm income is forecast to be $57 billion in 2009, down $30 billion (34.5 percent) from 2008. The 2009 forecast is $6.5 billion below the average of $63.6 billion in net farm income earned in the previous 10 years. Still, the $57 billion forecast for 2009 remains the eighth largest amount of income earned in U.S. farming. "The US gross farm income in 2008 was $375 billion and average net income is $63.6 billion," said Carter. "In other words, the net is about one-sixth of the gross. That means Westlands actually is netting about one-sixth of its claimed $1 billion in farm revenues, or about $150 million a year." Carter noted that if you take away the water, power and crop subsidies, you drop that true net increase quite a bit further. The Environmental Working Group estimated Westlands' annual subsidies in 2002 at $110 million a year. "That means the true net of the Westlands, when you take away all the government giveways may be only $3040 million," he concluded. "Now, if you subtract the anticipated costs of drainage and make Westlands pay for their own waste disposal, they may actually not be generating any true wealth out there at all, except what the government gives them." The Cretaceous sedimentary rock shales that underlie Westlands Water District contain salts and trace elements like selenium, arsenic, boron and heavy metals, according to Bill Jennings, executive director of the California Sportfishing Protection Alliance. Several layers of virtually impermeable clay lie below the shales. "Irrigation of these soils has led to high concentrations of these pollutants draining via surface and subsurface flow to the San Joaquin River," said Jennings. "Efforts to control these toxics led to the creation of Kesterson Reservoir and the disaster where selenium poisoning led to thousands of deformed birds. Kesterson Reservoir was ordered closed by the State Water Board in 1985, but drainage from Westlands continues to discharge to the San Joaquin River at levels that are highly toxic to fish." Here's the point, according to Carter. "We all keep hearing about how Westlands 'feeds the nation' or even more preposterously, 'feeds the world.' They continually conflate themselves with the entire San Joaquin Valley or the entire state of California, which even then (at about $34 billion) is still less than 10 percent of national gross agricultural output." Carter and other environmental water justice advocates are wondering why Leslie Stahl of CBS' 60 Minutes didn't examine this angle when she covered California water politics in her poorly-researched report on Sunday, December 26. When you consider Carter's estimates that Westlands' contribution in gross income to the nation's food supply (and exports) is about a quarter of a percent - and that the true net value may be only $30 million to $40 million,

once government subsides are considered - the claims by corporate agribusiness and media pundits that drainage impaired land on the west side of the San Joaquin Valley "feeds the nation" are simply not true. The false claim that any cuts to water supplies for west side San Joaquin Valley agribusiness will prevent them from "feeding the nation" has been cited by corporate agribusiness, the Association of California Water Agencies (ACWA), Governor Arnold Schwarzenegger and Senator Dianne Feinstein as a key reason for the "necessity" to build the peripheral canal on the California Delta and Temperance Flat and Sites reservoirs. This myth has also been employed by Schwarzenegger, Feinstein and Central Valley Representatives to launch their administrative and legislative attacks on the federal biological opinions protecting Delta smelt, Sacramento River chinook salmon, Central Valley steelhead, green sturgeon and southern resident killer whales under the Endangered Species Act (ESA). The absurdity of the campaign to build more dams and the peripheral canal, a project estimated to cost anywhere from $23 to $53.8 billion, and to strip ESA protections for Central Valley salmon and other species becomes very apparent, now that a review of the USDA data has dispelled the myth that drainage impaired land, irrigated by subsidized water, "feeds America." For a larger perspective on this issue, read Lloyd Carter's impeccably researched law review article. And to learn about how Westlands farmworkers are being manipulated by the big growers and labor contractors, read his essay, "The P-R Firm from Hell."

Watch The Fluoride Deception:

You shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you mad. ~ Aldous Huxley

The Cancer Truth Jeff Rense Interviews with Ty Bollinger (September 22, 2009)

Outline By: Ginny Linn According to Jeff Rense and Ty Bollinger (as discussed in the above link), there may have been a cure for cancer in the 1930s. The man responsible for the discovery was Royal Raymond Rife. For a truly fascinating account of Royal Rife's discoveries, and the consequence of those discoveries, please visit Royal Rife studied at Johns Hopkins. He determined that cancer takes different forms depending on the state of health of the body that it is in. The cancer bacterium can look like a mold, a yeast, a fungus, a bacteria, a small bacteria, a virus, and several stages that are so small you can't even see them with a Royal Rife microscope (It had nearly 6,000 different parts and was capable of magnifying objects 60,000 times their normal size. With this incredible microscope, Rife became the first human being to actually see a live virus, and until quite recently, the Universal Microscope was the only one which was able view live viruses.). According to some, Royal Rife was the greatest medical scientific genius of our age, yet nobody knows about him. His goal was to put broadcast towers up all over the city of San Diego. His theory was that while people were working or asleep, broadcast frequencies would kill the cancer organisms in their bodies. There must have been something to Rife's claims, because the American Medical Association (AMA), did not want his discovery made public. The man who wanted to prevent Royal Rife from making his discovery public was the head of the AMA. His name was Morris Fishbien . He probably did not want there to be a cancer cure because there was no money in it. So an attack on Royal Rife ensued. For more information, please read: The Cancer Cure That Worked! (Fifty Years of Suppression), by Barry Lynes. In the end, the powers that be stole Royal's microscope, burned down his lab, and some of his supporters died under mysterious circumstances. Then the police illegally confiscated 50 years of his research. They destroyed him because he had a cure for cancer. Finally, they put him in jail. He was released in 1971, and died shortly thereafter. Big Pharma and the Medical Profession Today cancer has become an epidemic. In fact, 1 in every 2 people in our lifetimes will be diagnosed with cancer. That's because our world is becoming increasingly polluted with chemicals and electro magnetic fields. Also, there has been little advancement in the treatment and cure of cancer. The draconian means of treating cancer have advanced little. In fact, it is suspected that X-rays themselves may be causing cancer. Consider that mammograms contain 1,000 times the amount of radiation than an ordinary chest X-ray.

So, what would the incentive be to actually cure cancer? None, since there is a lot of money to be made in the TREATMENT of cancer. In other words, there is profit being made from our pain, our dying, and our death. Cancer's Monetary Worth The medical industry generates a trillion dollars worldwide. The average cancer diagnosis is now worth between $750,000 and $1,000,000. This represents a revenue stream for Big Pharma and the medical profession, through chemo, surgery, and radiation. Blind Faith Unfortunately, many people have blind faith in their doctors,. They don't realize that doctors have been brainwashed in medical school. In fact, according to Rense and Bollinger, they may actually be the most brainwashed people in all the world due to their years of training. They have been taught that only drugs and surgery can cure. Interestingly, 50% of all doctors will refuse chemo and radiation, and over 80% of oncologists will refuse chemo and radiation. These doctors know the truth. The same can be said for the the swine flu vaccine; the people who make it, won't have anything to do with it. How to Prevent Cancer The easiest most accessible prevention of cancer is to STOP eating toxic foods, and take adequate amounts of Vitamin D. It has been reported that Vitamin D can cut your cancer risk by 80%, so it's important to get sufficient amounts. A simple blood test can determine your level. The most critical time of year when our bodies may be deficient in Vitamin D is during the winter months, when there is limited sun exposure, so it's important to get sufficient amounts (five to 10 thousand IU's per day is being recommended). Unfortunately, we have been brainwashed into believing that the sun is bad for us. We are then encouraged to use toxic sun screens on our skin (a double whammy). Cleanse Your Body Ty Bollinger suggests we stop the meat, stop the dairy, and stop the processed food. Give your body time to function normally. Cleanse your body, get well, and be happy. It has been suggested that everyone, whether they have had chemo or not should do a 30-day fast. But if you can't do that, try Flor. Essence . Flor. Essence is an herbal tea, and may be a potent cancer killer. Interestingly, in the 1920s there was an herbal tea called Essiac; it was used as a cancer treatment and was invented by Rene Caisse. Conclusion Cancer does not have to be a death sentence. See . Ty Bollinger contends that cancer is a simple disease to treat (if caught early), and that you can reverse it if you do it properly. The first thing is to know what your options are, as discussed in ―Cance r, Step Outside the Box‖ by Ty Bollinger .

Remember, knowledge is power. So if you are diagnosed, you must know what all your options are.

Some other promising cancer cures: Run from the Cure – The Rick Simpson Story Watch the video:

The Beautiful Truth Watch the video:

Watch The Hemp Revolution:

Watch Hemp for Victory:

The Marijuana Conspiracy - The reason hemp is illegal Posted March 20th, 2009 by Dan Hughes

Click to get a free copy: The Politics of Hemp and How it Can Save America

(Nothing to do with its effects on the mind and body) By Doug Yurchey - Article from The Dot Connector HU


They say marijuana is dangerous. Pot is not harmful to the human body or mind. Marijuana does not pose a threat to the general public. Marijuana is very much a danger to the oil companies, alcohol, tobacco industries and a large number of chemical corporations. Big businesses, with plenty of dollars and influence, have suppressed the truth from the people. The truth is, if marijuana was utilized for its vast array of commercial products, it would create an industrial atomic bomb! The super rich have conspired to spread misinformation about the plant that, if used properly, would ruin their companies. Where did the word ‗marijuana‘ come from? In the mid 1930s, the M-word was created to tarnish the good image and phenomenal history of the hemp plant – as you will read. The facts cited here, with references, are generally verifiable in the Encyclopedia Britannica which was printed on hemp paper for 150 years: ✔ All schoolbooks were made from hemp or flax paper until the 1880s. (Jack Frazier. Hemp Paper Reconsidered. 1974.) ✔ It was legal to pay taxes with hemp in America from 1631 until the early 1800s. (LA Times. Aug. 12, 1981.) ✔ Refusing to grow hemp in America during the 17th and 18th centuries was against the law! You could be jailed in Virginia for refusing to grow hemp from 1763 to 1769 (G. M. Herdon. Hemp in Colonial Virginia). ✔ George Washington, Thomas Jefferson and other founding fathers grew hemp. (Washington and Jefferson Diaries. Jefferson smuggled hemp seeds from China to France then to America.) ✔ Benjamin Franklin owned one of the first paper mills in America, and it processed hemp. Also, the War of

1812 was fought over hemp. Napoleon wanted to cut off Moscow‘s export to England. (Jack Herer. Emperor Wears No Clothes.) ✔ For thousands of years, 90% of all ships‘ sails and rope were made from hemp. The word ‗canvas‘ is Dutch for cannabis. (Webster‟s New World Dictionary.) ✔ 80% of all textiles, fabrics, clothes, linen, drapes, bed sheets, etc.,were made from hemp until the 1820s, with the introduction of the cotton gin. ✔ The first Bibles, maps, charts, Betsy Ross‘s flag, the first drafts of the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution were made from hemp. (U.S. Government Archives.) ✔ The first crop grown in many states was hemp. 1850 was a peak year for Kentucky producing 40,000 tons.Hemp was the largest cash crop until the 20th century. (State Archives.) ✔ Oldest known records of hemp farming go back 5000 years in China, although hemp industrialization probably goes back to ancient Egypt. ✔ Rembrandt‘s, Van Gogh‘s, Gainsborough‘s, as well as most early canvas paintings, were principally painted on hemp linen. ✔ In 1916, the U.S. Government predicted that by the 1940s all paper would come from hemp and that no more trees need to be cut down. Government studies report that 1 acre of hemp equals 4.1 acres of trees. Plans were in the works to implement such programs. (U.S. Department of Agriculture Archives.) ✔ Quality paints and varnishes were made from hemp seed oil until 1937. 58,000 tons of hemp seeds were used in America for paint products in 1935. (Sherman Williams Paint Co. testimony before the U.S.Congress against the 1937 Marijuana Tax Act.) ✔ Henry Ford‘s first Model-T was built to run on hemp gasoline and the car itself was constructed from hemp! On his large estate, Ford was photographed among his hemp fields. The car, ‗grown from the soil,‘ had hemp plastic panels whose impact strength was 10 times stronger than steel. (Popular Mechanics, 1941.) ✔ In 1938, hemp was called „Billion Dollar Crop.‟ It was the first time a cash crop had a business potential to exceed a billion dollars. (Popular Mechanics, Feb. 1938.) ✔ Mechanical Engineering Magazine (Feb. 1938) published an article entitled „TheMost Profitable and Desirable Crop that Can be Grown.‟ It stated that if hemp was cultivated using 20th century technology, it would be the single largest agricultural crop in the U.S. and the rest of the world. The following information comes directly from the United States Department of Agriculture‘s 1942 14-minute film encouraging and instructing ‗patriotic American farmers‘ to grow 350,000 acres of hemp each year for the war effort:

“…[When] Grecian temples were new, hemp was already old in the service of mankind. For thousands of years, even then, this plant had been grown for cordage and cloth in China and elsewhere in the East. For centuries prior to about 1850, all the ships that sailed the western seas were rigged with hempen rope and sails. For the sailor, no less than the hangman, hemp was indispensable… Now with Philippine and East Indian sources of hemp in the hands of the Japanese… American hemp must meet the needs of our Army and Navy as well as of our industries… The Navy‟s rapidly dwindling reserves.When that is gone, American hemp will go on duty again; hemp for mooring ships; hemp for tow lines; hemp for tackle and gear; hemp for countless naval uses both on ship and shore. Just as in the days when Old Ironsides sailed the seas victorious with her hempen shrouds and hempen sails. Hemp for victory!” Certified proof from the Library of Congress, found by the research of Jack Herer, refutes claims of other government agencies that the 1942 USDA film „Hemp for Victory‟did not exist. Hemp cultivation and production do not harm the environment. The USDA Bulletin #404 concluded that hemp produces four times as much pulp with at least four to seven times less pollution. From Popular Mechanics, February 1938: “It has a short growing season… It can be grown in any state… The long roots penetrate and break the soil to leave it in perfect condition for the next year‟s crop. The dense shock of leaves, 8 to 12 feet above the ground, chokes out weeds. …Hemp, this new crop can add immeasurably to American agriculture and industry.” In the 1930s, innovations in farm machinery would have caused an industrial revolution when applied to hemp. This single resource could have created millions of new jobs generating thousands of quality products. Hemp, if not made illegal, would have brought America out of the Great Depression. THE CONSPIRACY William Randolph Hearst (Citizen Kane) and the Hearst Paper Manufacturing Division of Kimberly Clark owned vast acreage of timberlands. The Hearst Company supplied most paper products. Patty Hearst‘s grandfather, a destroyer of nature for his own personal profit, stood to lose billions because of hemp. In 1937, DuPont patented the processes to make plastics from oil and coal. DuPont‘s Annual Report urged stockholders to invest in its new petrochemical division. Synthetics such as plastics, cellophane, celluloid, methanol, nylon, rayon, Dacron, etc., could now be made from oil. Natural hemp industrialization would have ruined over 80% of DuPont‘s business. Andrew Mellon became Hoover‘s Secretary of the Treasury and DuPont‘s primary investor. He appointed his future nephew-in-law, Harry J.Anslinger, to head the Federal Bureau of Narcotics and Dangerous Drugs. Secret meetings were held by these financial tycoons. Hemp was declared dangerous and a threat to their billion dollar enterprises. For their dynasties to remain intact, hemp had to go. These men took an obscure Mexican slang word: ‗marijuana‘ and pushed it into the consciousness of America.

MEDIA MANIPULATION A media blitz of ‗yellow journalism‘ raged in the late 1920s and 1930s. Hearst‘s newspapers ran stories emphasizing the horrors of marijuana. The menace of marijuana made headlines. Readers learned that it was responsible for everything from car accidents to lose morality. Films like Reefer Madness (1936), Marijuana: Assassin of Youth (1935) and Marijuana: The Devil‘s Weed (1936) were propaganda designed by these industrialists to create an enemy. Their purpose was to gain public support so that anti-marijuana laws could be passed. Examine the following quotes from The Burning Question, aka Reefer Madness:      

a violent narcotic; acts of shocking violence; incurable insanity; soul-destroying effects; under the influence of the drug he killed his entire family with an ax; more vicious, more deadly even than these soul-destroying drugs (heroin, cocaine) is the menace of marijuana!

Reefer Madness did not end with the usual „theend.‟The film concluded with these words plastered on the screen: „Tell your children.‟ In the 1930s, people were very naive, even to the point of ignorance. The masses were like sheep waiting to be led by the few in power. They did not challenge authority. If the news was in print or on the radio, they believed it had to be true. They told their children, and their children grew up to be the parents of the babyboomers. On April 14, 1937, the prohibitive Marijuana Tax Law, or the bill that outlawed hemp, was directly brought to the House Ways and Means Committee. This committee is the only one that can introduce a bill to the House floor without it being debated by other committees. The Chairman of the U.S. Senate, Ways and Means Committee, at the time, Robert Doughton, was a DuPont supporter. He insured that the bill would pass Congress. Dr. James Woodward, a physician and attorney, testified too late on behalf of the American Medical Association. He told the committee that the reason the AMA had not denounced the Marijuana Tax Law sooner was that the Association had just discovered that marijuana was hemp. Few people, at the time, realized that the deadly menace they had been reading about on Hearst‘s front pages was in fact passive hemp. The AMA understood cannabis to be a medicine found in numerous healing products sold over the last hundred years. In September of 1937, hemp became illegal. The most useful crop known became a drug and our planet has been suffering ever since. Congress banned hemp because it was said to be the most violence-causing drug known. Harry Anslinger, head of the Drug Commission for 31 years, promoted the idea that marijuana made users act extremely violent. In the 1950s, under the Communist threat of McCarthyism, Anslinger then said the exact opposite: marijuana will

pacify you so much that soldiers would not want to fight. Today, our planet is in desperate trouble. Earth is suffocating as large tracts of rain forests disappear. Pollution, poisons and chemicals are killing people. These great problems could be reversed if we industrialized hemp. Natural biomass could provide all of the planet‘s energy needs that are currently supplied by fossil fuels. We have consumed 80% of our oil and gas reserves. We need a renewable resource. Hemp could be the solution to soaring gas prices. THE WONDER PLANT Hemp has a higher quality fiber than wood fiber. Far fewer caustic chemicals are required to make paper from hemp than from trees. Hemp paper does not turn yellow and is very durable. The plant grows quickly to maturity in a season where trees take a lifetime. All plastic products should be made from hemp seed oil. Hempen plastics are biodegradable! Over time, they would break down and not harm the environment. Oil-based plastics, the ones we are very familiar with, help ruin nature. They do not break down and will do great harm in the future. The process to produce the vast array of natural (hempen) plastics will not ruin the rivers as DuPont and other petrochemical companies have done. Ecology does not fit in with the plans of the oil industry and the political machine. Hemp products are safe and natural. Medicines should be made from hemp. We should go back to the days when the AMA supported cannabis cures. that relies on chemicals. Pot is only healthy for the human body. ‗Medical Marijuana‘ is given out legally to only a handful of people while the rest of us are forced into a system only a handful of people while the rest of us are forced into a system that relies on chemicals. Pot is only healthy for the human body.

World hunger could end. A large variety of food products can be generated from hemp. The seeds contain one of the highest sources of protein in nature. Also: They have two essential fatty acids that clean your body of cholesterol. These essential fatty acids are not found anywhere else in nature! Consuming pot seeds is the best thing you could do for your body. Eat uncooked hemp seeds. Clothes should be made from hemp. Hemp clothing is extremely strong and durable over time. You could hand clothing, made from pot, down to your grandchildren. Today, there are American companies that make hemp clothing; usually 50% hemp. Hemp fabrics should be everywhere. Instead, they are almost underground. Superior hemp products are not allowed to advertise on fascist television. Kentucky, once the top hemp producing state, made it illegal to wear hemp clothing! Can you imagine being thrown into jail for wearing quality jeans? The world is crazy. But that does not mean you have to join the insanity. Get together. Spread the news. Tell people, and that includes your children, the truth. Use hemp products. Eliminate the word ‘marijuana. ‘Realize the history that created it. Make it politically incorrect to say or print the M-word. Fight against the propaganda (designed to favor the agenda of the super rich) and the bullshit. Hemp must be utilized in the future. We need a clean energy source to save our planet. Industrialize hemp! The liquor, tobacco and oil companies fund more than a million dollars a day to Partnership for a Drug-Free America and other similar agencies. We have all seen their commercials. Now, their motto is: „It‟s more dangerous than we thought.‟ Lies from the powerful corporations, that began with Hearst, are still alive and well today. The brainwashing continues. Now, the commercials say: If you buy a joint, you contribute to murders and gang wars. The latest anti-pot commercials say: If you buy a joint… you are promoting terrorism! The new enemy (terrorism) has paved the road to brainwash you any way they see fit. There is only one enemy: the friendly people you pay your taxes to, the war-makers and nature destroyers.With your funding, they are killing the world right in front of your eyes. Half a million deaths each year are caused by tobacco. Half a million deaths each year are caused by alcohol. No one has ever, ever died from smoking pot!! In the entire history of the human race, not one death can be attributed to cannabis. Our society has outlawed grass but condones the use of the killers: tobacco and alcohol. Hemp should be declassified and placed in drug stores to relieve stress. Hardening and constriction of the arteries are bad, but hemp usage actually enlarges the arteries, which is a healthy condition. We have been so conditioned to think that smoking is harmful. That is not the case for passive pot. Ingesting THC, hemp‘s active agent, has a positive effect: relieving asthma and glaucoma. A joint tends to alleviate the nausea caused by chemotherapy. You are able to eat on hemp. This is a healthy state of being. [one personal note. During the pregnancy of my wife, she was having some difficulty gaining weight. We were in the hospital. A nurse called us to one side and said: “Off the record, if you smoke pot… you‟dget something

called the munchies and you‟ll gain weight.” I swear that is a true story.] The stereotype for a pothead is similar to a drunk, bubble-brain. Yet, the truth is one‘s creative abilities can be enhanced under its influence. The perception of time slightly slows and one can become more sensitive. You can more appreciate all arts, be closer to nature and generally feel more under the influence of cannabis. It is, in fact, the exact opposite state of mind and body as the drunken state. You can be more aware with pot. The pot plant is an alien plant. There is physical evidence that cannabis is not like any other plant on this planet. One could conclude that it was brought here for the benefit of humanity. Hemp is the only plant where the males appear one way and the females appear very different, physically! No one ever speaks of males and females in regard to the plant kingdom because plants do not show their sexes, except for cannabis. To determine what sex a certain, normal, earthly plant is, you have to look internally, at its DNA. A male blade of grass (physically) looks exactly like a female blade of grass. The hemp plant has an intense sexuality. Growers know to kill the males before they fertilize the females. Yes, folks, the most potent pot comes from ‗horny females.‘ The reason this amazing, very sophisticated, ET plant from the future is illegal has nothing to do with how it physically affects us. Pot is illegal because billionaires want to remain billionaires! “And I will raise up for them a plant of renown, and they shall be no more consumed with hunger in the land.” – Ezekiel 34:29. p.s. I think the word ‗drugs‘ should not be used as an umbrella-word that covers all chemical agents. Drugs have come to be known as something bad. Are you aware there are legal drugstores?! Yep, in every city. Unbelievable. Each so-called drug should be considered individually. Cannabis is a medicine and not a drug. We should dare to speak the truth no matter what the law is. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I suspect it's true that hemp can be used to end hunger, treat/cure many diseases, end poisonous cotton industry, replace oil for plastics, and halt deforestation, and if we're talking about the US, just a few percent of the fallow land is supposedly enough to make energy for the whole country (cars, electricity, etc). It would be a serious blow to the oligarchy and their tyrannical centralization plans. Look at the unscrupulous methods they used to criminalize it. (Anslinger / Hearst)! FROM: fleskebille HU


Watch: The Hemp Revolution September 09, 2008

Making a hemp advocacy documentary is an uphill cinematic battle because of the unintentional humor that surfaces. It is difficult to keep a straight face when you're told that hemp can be used to build "anything from a 2x4 to the body of a stealth jet bomber"; or how hemp packaging would allow you to "eat the container for dessert" in fast-food joints; or that commercial hemp could be "the greatest economic engine in the history of the human race." Of course, the truth is that these assertions are perfectly legitimate. Unfortunately, hemp has become so marginalized in our society that the myriad benefits of the substance appear as ridiculous pipe dreams, when in fact they are achievable realities. Australian producer-director Anthony Clarke does a commendable job in researching and outlining hemp's numerous strengths. He loosely divides his work into six sections--hemp for paper, textiles, fuel, medicine, and "inspiration" and the U.S. government's role in squelching all of these uses--supplying substantial and convincing evidence throughout. Clarke also puts hemp in its proper historical context and examines the combination of dubious forces--DuPont, Hearst, racist groups, and a commissioner of narcotics named Harry Anslinger, who had time (and idle employees) on his hands because of the repeal of prohibition--that led to hemp's criminalization in 1938. Clarke talks with a range of people to illustrate his points, from well-known authorities such as Dr. Lester Grinspoon and Dr. Andrew Weil to the head of the Netherlands' drug policy to Everyman hemp-seed chefs and hemp outfitters. WATCH THE VIDEO: HU


My name is Rick Simpson. Throughout man's history hemp has always been known as the most medicinal plant in the world. Even with this knowledge hemp has always been used as a political and religious football. WATCH: RUN FROM THE CURE: H

Hemp is the most medicinal plant in the world, making it a threat to both big oil and big pharma. These powerful cartels were responsible for the vilification and illegalization of all hemp in the 1930’s that continues today. Industrial hemp can create more than 25,000 healthy, green products and would revitalize American’s farming industry and revive our industrial base.

Unplug the Signal: The Truth Will Not Be Televised Nathan Janes

Pupaganda February 24, 2010 A flow of information is constantly streaming from the television set; a bombardment of words and pictures. The speed at which this information is communicated makes it easy for the signal to take control, switching the viewer‘s brain to stand-by as information is absorbed without analysis or question. Today the television‘s constant signal shapes the conclusions of the masses and produces the collective norm. The signal prescribes what is news and what is truth through the words of so-called experts and authorities, gelding the consciousness and independent thoughts of those subjected to it. Through television, the masses can be made to accept the most monstrous distortions of reality. The signal is a chill wind of continuous oppression over the minds of the masses. It controls the management of society and culture, creating uniformity across all subjects. The fuel for this vehicle of mass deception is a technique known as perception management where an array of psychological techniques are used to alter the truth, leading the viewer to a desired conclusion. Some call this spin or propaganda while others know it as lying. According to Joseph Goebbels, Propaganda Minister for Adolph Hitler, ― If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it… It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and Predictive programming is a tool used by the establishment to thus by extension, the truth is the greatest acclimate the public to new ideas, trends, beliefs, and threats. enemy of the State.‖ Most of what can be found on the nightly news is nothing but advertisements selling more government and a false reality that benefits only those in control. Television is the dictator of information; newspaper and radio are the whisper campaign of the television‘s message. It is expected that Americans will consistently prescribe to the doctrine of the television. It is subtly communicated that one should stay within the collective and never challenge the message, for doing so may be considered an aggression towards culture. The message is, ―Be agood consumer; always obey authority; you know nothing; listen only to experts; be content and never question or express new ideas.‖ This signal is being broadcast across millions of screens, indoctrinating the unconscious minds of those who choose this as their

only reality. Self-censorship occurs when these individuals become so deeply indoctrinated that they are afraid to discuss any information outside the paradigm of television-created culture; they police their thoughts to ensure they won‘t conflict with this culture. Sadly, many people‘s reality today does not allow any outside information to process, instead it is written off as conspiracy or blatant lies. Our consciousness has been destroyed so much that fiction has become reality. An entire lifestyle of poisonous foods, pharmaceuticals, and fluoridated water are accepted as safe and sold to us at the cost of our health and well being. Those of the establishment are using the incredibly powerful weapon of mass psychology as a method of controlling the minds of the masses and altering the behavior of individuals. Edward Bernays, a pioneer in the field of public relations in the 20th century, applied Sigmund Freud‘s theory of psychoanalysis to manipulate the masses by engineering consent. According to Bernays, ― If we understand the mechanism and motives of the group mind, it is now possible to control and regiment the masses according to our will without them knowing it.‖ Advertisers and psychologists of the billion dollar culture creation industry manufacture trends through the proliferation of insecurities; and manipulating desires and emotions. These concepts are also employed to control how individuals think about politics, as well as the possibilities and limitations within society. Those welding power within our streams of mass communication market their plans into each generation as individuals adopt specific ways of thinking and never suspect that all the major events and trends within their lifetime are actually planned by an elite few before they are even born. In our society today, culture is created from the top down. Virtually all forms of culture are created by the ruling class to build a false sense of reality, ensure social compliance, and control the future course of cultural evolution. Predictive programming is a tool used by the establishment to acclimate the public to new ideas, trends, beliefs, and threats. It is used through television by including certain situations or ideas within the plots of many fictional shows, familiarizing the viewer with these concepts no matter what they may be watching. When similar situations occur or like ideas are circulated in the world we think that these particular things are quite natural for we have unknowingly been made familiar with them through television. By viewing nearly any popular show on television, one can see the same propaganda that will be aired on the nightly news. Propaganda on a wide array of subjects has been interwoven into a great number of television shows. Just a few of these subjects include global warming, vaccinations, torture, terrorism, national security, the militarization of police, and the degradation of the family unit. Through predictive programming, television shapes culture and prevents individuals from asking questions. Crisis‘ are created on a daily basis and broadcast across the airwaves to keep individuals in a state of panic and fear. Whether it be the threat of a pandemic or terrorism, the constant state of crisis has created a form of mental illness as we are slowly acclimated into an age of crisis. By using Hegelian dialectic, the television promotes the problem, guides our reaction, and presents the solution. The problem of terrorism was exclaimed, a strong emotional response was evoked, and it was stated that our rights need be sacrificed in order to protect us from the threat. We‘ve lost personal sovereignty under the guise of terrorism; we‘re stopped and searched; we‘re watched by cameras as we go about our lives; and we‘re encouraged to spy on our neighbors. We have been trained to accept the life of a prisoner. America is in a state of enlightened despotism where most individuals live only to satisfy selfish inner desires and remain ignorant of the state of the world around them. In most public places one can find a television transmitting propaganda around the clock ensuring the masses remain focused on trivial matters. From birth we take the world as it‘s presented on television. We don‘t question it and any serious criticism of TV is becoming

psychologically impossible in society. Who would suspect getting born into a world where everything around you is a continuous lie? The youth of today are convinced that the experts and personalities on television are the authority of credible information while parents and older generations are foolish with dated ideas. Children are conditioned to disconnect from what is truly important to their well being and instead focus on mindless trivia, sports, celebrity gossip, and buying an array of material things. They invest their psychological worth in fantasy characters on television while ignoring or even scorning individuals contributing to the betterment of humanity. They are discouraged from getting involved in their local community and often lack the ability to think independently or to resist corruption. As their children‘s minds are molded by television, there is barely a murmur from the public. For over half a century, our society has lived under this signal of mental programming and conditioning. The message is clear: don‘t be a leader, don‘t engage in critical thinking, and don‘t care about the people in your life. Until individuals become aware of the current information war, our standard of living and our liberties will continue to be degraded and we will continue to lose communities and meaningful relationships between people. Currently, pockets of resistance are beginning to spring up everywhere as some unplug the signal and regain control of their own thoughts. Informed individuals are canceling their cable and satellite subscriptions and instead spending time with their families and children while participating in meaningful experiences. They are seeking alternative news sources. They are reading about those who weld incredible influence over culture like Edward Bernays, Zbigniew Brzezinski, Charles Galton Darwin, Plato, Bertrand Russell, and Aldous Huxley. However, it is a continuous battle to educate the masses for the television remains our greatest threat to individual sovereignty and the largest obstacle to becoming a truly informed individual. Fortunately, unplugging from the signal is easy. The television can simply be turned off. Through doing so, you may realize nearly our entire world is now a hoax; things once known as truth are fake. We have been trained like dogs to be obedient to our television; our master has had our minds on a tight leash. Let us never forget the truth will not be televised.

Visit Infowars dot com:

Who Owns The Media? The 6 Monolithic Corporations That Control Almost Everything We Watch, Hear and Read

Back in 1983, approximately 50 corporations controlled the vast majority of all news media in the United States. Today, ownership of the news media has been concentrated in the hands of just six incredibly powerful media corporations. These corporate behemoths control most of what we watch, hear and read every single day. They own television networks, cable channels, movie studios, newspapers, magazines, publishing houses, music labels and even many of our favorite websites. Sadly, most Americans don't even stop to think about who is feeding them the endless hours of news and entertainment that they constantly ingest. Most Americans don't really seem to care about who owns the media. But they should. The truth is that each of us is deeply influenced by the messages that are constantly being pounded into our heads by the mainstream media. The average American watches 153 hours of television a month. In fact, most Americans begin to feel physically uncomfortable if they go too long without watching or listening to something. Sadly, most Americans have become absolutely addicted to news and entertainment and the ownership of all that news and entertainment that we crave is being concentrated in fewer and fewer hands each year. The six corporations that collectively control U.S. media today are Time Warner, Walt Disney, Viacom, Rupert Murdoch's News Corp., CBS Corporation and NBC Universal. Together, the "big six" absolutely dominate news and entertainment in the United States. But even those areas of the media that the "big six" do not completely control are becoming increasingly concentrated. For example, Clear Channel now owns over 1000 radio stations across the United States. Companies like Google, Yahoo and Microsoft are increasingly dominating the Internet. But it is the "big six" that are the biggest concerns. When you control what Americans watch, hear and read you gain a great deal of control over what they think. They don't call it "programming" for nothing. Back in 1983 it was bad enough that about 50 corporations dominated U.S. media. But since that time, power over the media has rapidly become concentrated in the hands of fewer and fewer people.... In 1983, fifty corporations dominated most of every mass medium and the biggest media merger in history was a $340 million deal. … [I]n 1987, the fifty companies had shrunk to twenty-nine. … [I]n 1990, the twenty-nine had shrunk to twenty three. … [I]n 1997, the biggest firms numbered ten and involved the $19 billion DisneyABC deal, at the time the biggest media merger ever. … [In 2000] AOL Time Warner‟s $350 billion merged corporation [was] more than 1,000 times larger [than the biggest deal of 1983]. --Ben H. Bagdikian, The Media Monopoly, Sixth Edition, (Beacon Press, 2000), pp. xx—xxi

Today, six colossal media giants tower over all the rest. Much of the information in the chart below comes from The chart below reveals only a small fraction of the media outlets that these six behemoths actually own.... Time Warner Home Box Office (HBO) Time Inc. Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Warner Bros. Entertainment Inc. CW Network (partial ownership) TMZ New Line Cinema Time Warner Cable Cinemax Cartoon Network TBS TNT America Online MapQuest Moviefone Castle Rock Sports Illustrated Fortune Marie Claire People Magazine Walt Disney ABC Television Network Disney Publishing ESPN Inc. Disney Channel SOAPnet A&E Lifetime Buena Vista Home Entertainment Buena Vista Theatrical Productions Buena Vista Records Disney Records Hollywood Records Miramax Films Touchstone Pictures Walt Disney Pictures Pixar Animation Studios Buena Vista Games Hyperion Books Viacom Paramount Pictures Paramount Home Entertainment

Black Entertainment Television (BET) Comedy Central Country Music Television (CMT) Logo MTV MTV Canada MTV2 Nick Magazine Nick at Nite Nick Jr. Nickelodeon Noggin Spike TV The Movie Channel TV Land VH1 News Corporation Dow Jones & Company, Inc. Fox Television Stations The New York Post Fox Searchlight Pictures Beliefnet Fox Business Network Fox Kids Europe Fox News Channel Fox Sports Net Fox Television Network FX My Network TV MySpace News Limited News Phoenix InfoNews Channel Phoenix Movies Channel Sky PerfecTV Speed Channel STAR TV India STAR TV Taiwan STAR World Times Higher Education Supplement Magazine Times Literary Supplement Magazine Times of London 20th Century Fox Home Entertainment 20th Century Fox International 20th Century Fox Studios 20th Century Fox Television BSkyB

DIRECTV The Wall Street Journal Fox Broadcasting Company Fox Interactive Media FOXTEL HarperCollins Publishers The National Geographic Channel National Rugby League News Interactive News Outdoor Radio Veronica ReganBooks Sky Italia Sky Radio Denmark Sky Radio Germany Sky Radio Netherlands STAR Zondervan CBS Corporation CBS News CBS Sports CBS Television Network CNET Showtime CBS Radio Inc. (130 stations) CBS Consumer Products

CBS Outdoor CW Network (50% ownership) Infinity Broadcasting Simon & Schuster (Pocket Books, Scribner) Westwood One Radio Network NBC Universal Bravo CNBC NBC News MSNBC NBC Sports NBC Television Network Oxygen SciFi Magazine Syfy (Sci Fi Channel) Telemundo USA Network Weather Channel Focus Features NBC Universal Television Distribution NBC Universal Television Studio Paxson Communications (partial ownership) Trio Universal Parks & Resorts Universal Pictures Universal Studio

Home Video These gigantic media corporations do not exist to objectively tell the truth to the American people. Rather, the primary purpose of their existence is to make money. These gigantic media corporations are not going to do anything to threaten their relationships with their biggest advertisers (such as the largest pharmaceutical companies that literally spend billions on advertising), and one way or another these gigantic media corporations are always going to express the ideological viewpoints of their owners. Fortunately, an increasing number of Americans are starting to wake up and are realizing that the mainstream media should not be trusted. According to a new poll just released by Gallup, the number of Americans that have little to no trust in the mainstream media (57%) is at an all-time high. That is one reason why we have seen the alternative media experience such rapid growth over the past few years. The mainstream media has been losing credibility at a staggering rate, and Americans are starting to look elsewhere for the truth about what is really going on. Do you think that anyone in the mainstream news would actually tell you that the Federal Reserve is bad for America or that we are facing a horrific derivatives bubble that could destroy the entire world financial system?

Do you think that anyone in the mainstream media would actually tell you the truth about the deindustrialization of America or the truth about the voracious greed of Goldman Sachs? Sure there are a few courageous reporters in the mainstream media that manage to slip a few stories past their corporate bosses from time to time, but in general there is a very clear understanding that there are simply certain things that you just do not say in the mainstream news. But Americans are becoming increasingly hungry for the truth, and they are becoming increasingly dissatisfied with the dumbed down pablum that is passing as "hard hitting news" these days.

Support David Dees:

Visit Republic Magazine:

Why is it so difficult to see the propaganda that is all around us? Posted on September 26, 2010 by anticorruptionsociety

by AL Whitney (C) copyright 2010 All Rights Reserved IF A FISH COULD TALK AND YOU ASKED IT TO DESCRIBE ITS ENVIRONMENT, THE LAST THING IT WOULD IDENTIFY WOULD BE . . . WATER. _____________________________________________

Watch: PSYWAR – the documentary

“In the United States we’re often brought up and told we don’t have propaganda; that we have a hard charging investigative press, we have this educated skeptical even cynical citizenry and that if there were powerful interests trying to manage and manipulate public opinion they would be exposed. The reality actually is just the opposite. Academics like Alex Kerry and others, who’ve spent their life-times looking at how propaganda works, find that it’s actually in Western democracies [1] and open societies where you need the most sophisticated sorts of propaganda. And since WWI, thanks to people like Ivy Lee and Eddy Bernays, you know propaganda’s become a business – this business of public relations. Or as one of the firms that has often represented dictators, the Burson Marsteller firm, puts it . . . their business is perception management – to manage public perception, public policy on behalf of their clients who ever they might be.”


By Greg Evensen September 27, 2010 The countdown clock and the last chance for ― The Founder‘s Legacy‖ of patriotic Americans willing to lay it all on the line for a new Republic, has hit 0:00. Rebellion is no longer an option, a late night ―w hat if‖ discussion around a bottle of good wine and snacks. It is now the mandated response of oath keeping citizens and Constitutional defending men and women who have heard Paul Revere in 2010. That ―w atchman,‖ who made the most famous call to prepare for rebellion in the history of the world, has come again, through all of us who have been riding across our land for several years and warned of the arrival of this most critical moment. It did not materialize lightly or without a desperate realization that it was on the way, and when it did appear at the horizon, life has not and will not ever be the same. Whether you accept this assessment or not, you will be involved in its reality, prepared or not, on board with the need to reclaim this country for freedom‘s sake or not, courageous enough to muster with the band of the free and brave or not, you WILL still be counted among those who stood and fought with your countrymen, or posterity will judge you as cowards unworthy to live free. If you need a ― Manifesto‖ to justify your opposition to ―tr aitors‖ in communistic, statist Washington D.C., and a supremely evil Presidential cabal headed by Obama, then here is one. Health Care is now ― law of the land‖ and an affront to the Constitution in every word. That law alone is worthy of open rebellion. The REAL ID Act and its ― Nazi like‖ classifications of who you are and what you will be allowed to do is just the beginning. ANY of the federal agencies that are obvious rights breakers (FBI, IRS, BATFE, CIA, NSA, DHS, FEMA, USDA, FDA, CDC, etc.) and thousands of bureaucrats who owe their souls to a democracy of devils, head the list of particulars that define our corrupted rulers. Control through the police state is the hallmark of tyranny throughout history. America in 2010 is no different. Specifically, the enemies list begins with the USDA, for the chipping of, and headcount of, every domestic animal in the nation. For what purpose have they done this? It is for control and the furtherance of that police state to be steered by the Agricultural Industry‘s Czar in Washington. The ― Defense of Farmers‖ rebellion could be this battle cry. The FDA is next and covets complete control of all pharmaceuticals and natural remedies to corner not only the financial aspect of their war on American‘s health freedoms, but so that they can also prohibit people from charting their own health destiny when it comes to how they will live and ― treat‖ themselves against disease. For a huge profit, people are forced into taking poisonous vaccinations more deadly than the disease. This incursion into people‘s lives and criminalizing health choices is alone worthy of rebellion. S510, the regulation of gardening and the trade of vegetables/fruits, strikes at the heart of a free nation and a citizen‘s right to provide sustenance for themselves and others should be completely protected against intrusion by government at any level. We had a ― Whiskey Rebellion,‖ we now need a ― Tomato Rebellion‖ as well. The list unfortunately goes on and on………. Domestic gun control advocates who are both ignorant and evil, have joined the United Nations, Hillary Clinton, the US State Department, Harry Reid, Nancy Pelosi, George Soros, Charles Shumer, Joe Biden, Barbara Boxer, Diane Feinstein, ad nauseum, in a leftist utopian‘s dream state of a no firearms society. By confiscating the last means of the people to defend one‘s self and to simultaneously protect the criminal crime syndicate in Washington, the war lords on the Potomac hope to defang the Constitutionalists back home. This single issue is the heart and soul of the rebellion that is at hand.

Global taxes to be assessed against all Americans to underwrite the world governance structure when completed and enacted, is another definition of the reason why people rebel. Internet and communications control, manipulation of the food supply, worthless crops grown with Genetically Modified seeds, the ongoing ― legalized‖ robbery of the American nation by the Federal Reserve and the banking monopoly, all call for a move by the patriots of this land to destroy the beast and reclaim our sovereign right to be free from control and exchange righteous goods and services with a gold and silver system totally free of any kind of central bank—EVER! Unconstitutional legislation at all levels as an ongoing way of doing governmental business backed by courts and ― whore judges‖ needs a ― governmental extinction level event‖ of its own by the same patriots who have declared open rebellion on every aspect of abusive, wanton, destabilizing bureaucratic dictatorship and the police state rules that govern it. S1619 the ― Livable Communities Act‖ which is the UN Agenda 21 sustainable living dictatorship that rules energy, zoning and housing using an environmental program offered by insanely corrupted Sen. Christopher Dodd, (D) Ct. He, along with sodomite Barney (rent men from my apartment fame) Frank, brought us the Freddie Mac & Fannie May economy busting debacle, has S1619 up for consideration at this moment. Corruption on this scale, and greed with no end by sworn members of Congress, is worth a rebel cause. Add to this list ―victi ms of racial persecution‖ Maxine Waters and Charles Rangel, and you have a Hall of Shame that needs to be burned to the ground. The ultimate goal of S1619 is to force you into police state controllable mega-cities and return all rural and forested lands to the wild equals environmentalism disguised as social engineering run amuck. A surveillance society where tens of thousands of intersections, roadways, airports, rail and bus depots, parking lots, city streets, apartment complexes, schools, stadiums and shopping malls among thousands of other ― public‖ places are under computer program ― id entify and apprehend‖ software, have Nazi control freaks in Washington drunk with power. Oh, and buy the way, you can add to that planes, drones and government X-ray vans capable of locating weapons, drugs or supposedly, illegals in your vehicle while riding down the road as sentinels against ― terrorists and patriots.‖ Feel better? Well, add these horrors to the list, and that mandates patriot rebellion vans to run the government beasts out of town. The real time consideration by Congress of placing your retirements, 401s, IRA accounts and any other personally held financial instruments under governmental control and confiscation is another justification to grab the reins of this runaway, grind it to a halt, and send the diseased horses to the dog food factory. Have these examples among thousands, given you a picture of how far we have moved toward a true governmental police state? Are these few enough to convince you that it is NOW time to rebel? By definition, to rebel is to say no emphatically and not budge from that position. (Revolution, by definition, is sudden or violent change). You draw the line ― after a long train of abuses‖ and tell the government at all levels NO. No more dictatorship, no more laws, rules or regulations. Not one inch more. And if you try, then we move from rebellion to outright insurrection or revolution as outlined in our Declaration of Independence. You know, the little letter sent to King George on July 4, 1776. This was the signed statement by men brave enough to stop the British governmental abuses and begin an armed confrontation and an all out battle to establish a free nation. Rebellion draws the final line. Insurrection, if required, takes them out and sets up new guards protecting freedom with the use of armed force by the citizens themselves. Rebellion is both verbal and actionable by withholding taxes, resistance in carrying out unconstitutional laws, defying governmental edicts, and grinding to a halt ― illegal business as usual‖ by authorities who don‘t give a damn what you think or desire. To not rebel at this point is to say in effect, I agree and support what government is doing in its present form and all of the illegal agendas that government is creating. The same

is true of the court system. It is corrupt beyond repair. People must either disengage from the court system or disobey judges who restrict the jury‘s deliberational freedom and then acquit the accused based on a court‘s application of unconstitutional law or edicts. Freedom by acquittal and nullification of bad law itself is a patriot‘s greatest weapon and responsibility. It is mostly unused because juries refuse to take the reins of power from the judge in the jury room and effect the final say as is their right and obligation to a free society. The threshold question is this: If you are forced to pay a levy (taxes) to a corrupted government, are you obeying Romans 13? That Scriptural invective refers clearly to obeying a moral and upright government. God would not have you obey an unlawful government in which you were complicit and guilty of financing the sin and moral destruction of that nation—let alone in a state that sponsors abortion and constant war. Do not fall for that one. Is it not bondage—involuntary servitude—in fact slavery if you are forced to support and ― pay‖ for an immoral government? Ask yourself the same question in reverse. Explain to everyone‘s satisfaction how under these conditions, you are NOT a slave by anyone‘s definition, if you are forced to support and contribute extortion money to make it happen. If all the other descriptions in this essay are true, or you recognize and accept that they exist as given, then how can you not be at rebellion‘s front door this very moment? Don‘t complain that I am causing a problem where none exists. Don‘t look for any excuse to avoid the painfully obvious conditions under which you, your family, and all other citizens in this nation find themselves confronting. You have been conditioned to accept each of these rebellion worthy situations as ―no rmal‖ and part of an evolving social activist ― democracy.‖ Therefore, under that justification, a little change can be expected and, not to worry, it is all for your greater good and the world‘s expectation of compliant, guilt ridden, historically ignorant, Americans anyway. The Supremely stupid Supreme Court is now siding more and more with world opinion as to the legality of American‘s actions rather than the dictates of our own Constitution. Other courts are giving credence to the demands of Muslim hate filled Quran based Sharia law. Rebel, rebel, REBEL! In a nutshell, that is why we are where we are right now. We have been worn slick by flim flam men and women of the worst kind. Good is evil and evil is good. The ― looking glass world‖ of Alice and the rabbit has taken us straight to the Queen of Hearts and he is the President and his evil court. When precious friends and long contributing watchmen like Steve Quayle, Hawk Talon, Chuck Baldwin, and other warriors in the trenches pull up the tent and trek to the mountains, ―the n look up, for your redemption draweth nigh.‖ God speed and protect these wise men and their families. I pray the same for you and your families. Liz and I are no longer prepping. Our job is done. We no longer beg family and others to listen and prepare. We will, for a while, continue to train groups across the country and at our home. However; generally speaking, the last cries from the wall by this ―W atchman‖ have been sounded. My radio show, ― Voices from the Heartland‖ is on each Sunday from 2-3pm CDT on the Republic Broadcasting Network ( and we are giving our final efforts to get people on board before it‘s too late. Our very popular Castle Defense I-II video series and Castle Defense III, the 400 page manual for personal training, have been reduced in price one last time to absolute cost ( so you may get yours if you wish. We will faze them out when current stocks are gone. We will do no more. It is time to face down the enemy and begin our rebellion. The direction of this battle will be determined by how the police state responds to a final position of no more, no way. From that point forward, we will follow the example of our nation‘s founders and the leading of God‘s Holy Spirit. End of story. We have held steady long enough……………... © 2010 Greg Evensen - All Rights Reserved

Greg Evensen is a former Kansas State Trooper awarded the Governor‟s Award for heroism. He has produced two DVD‟s, nine hours of training for families attempting to prepare for a breakdown of the national structure and the “grid.” His 400 page “survival Manual” that is also available as a complete companion guide to the DVD‟s for dealing with these disruptions is now available along with his inspirational musical CD‟s including “The Sovereignty Papers,” a three hour narrative of Greg‟s book at his website store Greg is also traveling the nation assisting concerned Americans by conducting “in-field” training sessions at farms, ranches, churches, and rural homesteads where groups of attendees learn how to defend their homes and master 25 topic areas that will give them the “edge” when the lights go out. Website: TheHeartLandUSA

Watch Steven Seagal's ending speech from "On Deadly Ground"

The Gulf Oil Disaster Is War On We, The People 30 Facts Evidencing The Rothschild League Of Bankers Planned The Gulf Oil Crisis By Leonard G. Horowitz And Sherri Kane 7-7-10

Overview This article explains what is really happening in the Gulf of Mexico, who is really responsible for the explosion, and how the devastation serves investment bankers. These globalists sway stocks, create markets, and planned this crisis, among a series of catastrophes, to advance geopolitical and financial agendas.

Introduction WAR has been declared against We The People. Yet, there is no country or military present to defend us. Covert infiltrations and corruptions in governments by the "Rothschild League" of bankers and "private equity investors" now poison our bodies, minds, and planet. Yet, appropriate military and/or militia defenses are prohibited. Crisis-capitalists are petro-chemically massacring us and our environment. They have deployed propaganda-mass media deception--to camouflage their real intentions and vast destruction. The air we breathe, food we eat, and water we drink, has been polluted to deliver profitable diseases and planned depopulation, simulating a "scorched earth policy" of war. Citizens' arrests, grand jury investigations, criminal indictments, and war crime prosecutions are urgently needed, yet financially forbidden. Generalized fear, depression, fatigue, and apathy is incapacitating our defenses, aiding the adversaries, and predisposing us to diseases and early deaths.

Based on the following irrefutable facts, the so-called "accidental explosion" in the Gulf is a Transocean/Halliburton/British Petroleum/Goldman-Sachs attack---the latest in a series of unspeakable war crimes perpetrated by Anglo-American State of Rothschild League bankers.

Definition and Function of War

Download a free document The History of the House of Rothschild:

WAR has been defined as "a contest between nations or states, carried on by force, . . . for the extension of commerce, . . . for obtaining and establishing the superiority and dominion of one over the other." Consider the fact that "it takes money to make money."Across civilization today, if you want to buy a property or grow a business, most people need to take loans from banks. In fact, the primary way that Nations, States, and civilians advance economically is contracted or underwritten by the banking industry.

Similarly, war is nearly always financed by banks and, allegedly, repaid by taxes. As you read the following facts, consider these methods by which We The People are now nightmarishly enslaved by a usury system of rampant con-sum(p)-tion. (A word that used to mean degeneration by terminal illness; a sum total "con.") Consider the "investment bankers" who steward the stock-markets and care nearly nil about how many species are going extinct, including possibly our own. Then reflect on this quote by poet Dorothy Parker: "If you want to know what God thinks about money, just look at the people He gives it to." Today, besides generating profit as proven below, the Rothschild League, that has held dominion over our global economy for centuries, expands it's mass-mind manipulation, depopulation, and environmental destruction for protection against We The People. After all, we are slowly awakening like a sleeping giant. Our rebuke threatens their plan for complete global control.

30 Chilling Facts Proving We The People Are Under Attack, in an Undeclared War, With the Rothschild League of Bankers: 1) The media is grossly censoring the extent of the devastation in the Gulf. The poisons--oil and chemical dispersant (Corexit)--are destined to spread globally, but honest reporting is restricted, and independent investigators are being arrested. This censorship is a sure sign of fascism--not freedom or democracy. In this way, the media, financially directed by leading investment bankers (cited below), accomplices this global poisoning, or omnicide. 2) The news and network "programming" is mind-controlling propaganda issued by the "partners" in the Rothschild League of Banks including Goldman-Sachs, JPMorgan-Chase and UBS that direct BP, Transocean, Halliburton, the clean-up capitalists, Corexit suppliers, even the trailers used by clean-up crews, through coinvestors heavily represented in the Partnership for New York City (PFNYC), founded by David Rockefeller and chartered by the Royal Family of England. All together, these partners wield the most formidable economic power in world history.

3) Ongoing worsening environmental pollution has been a primary objective of these Rothschild League financiers since at least the 1960s, according to their leaked economic agenda. Destroying the environment, thus creating new global threats for remediation markets and emergency management is unconscionable, but very real. This has become a viable alternative to traditional warfare securing profitable population control through crisis capitalism. 4) The Gulf oil catastrophe reflects this one of three major financially-sustaining war substitutes. Currently, less urgent than environmental destruction is space-based threats (e.g., solar flares, alien menaces, and colliding asteroids). The third, and least apparent profitable war substitute is petrochemical-pharmaceutical enslavement. All three of these incentives and objectives for global governance, emergency preparedness, and profitable military and Homeland Security responses, "carries the weight of . . . considerable actual sacrifice of life." (Quote from The Report From Iron Mountain--a scholarly, serious, non-fiction, non-satirical leaked worked claimed by Rothschild League banking cartel propagandists, including media pundits, to be a satire.)

5) The propaganda ploy used most effectively in the Gulf, and in all crises, is to blame illusory villains to create sham debates. When Obama is blamed for the oil crisis, for instance, the "accident" faults Democrats. When Halliburton is blamed, the Republicans feel faulted. This divisive diversion suckers masses of idiots, discredits the media's intelligence, and shames people who still claim we have a "free" and "responsible" press. 6) The Deepwater Horizon (Mississippi Canyon 252) oil rig that exploded is the property of Transocean, not British Petroleum (BP); and both companies are financially directed by Goldman Sachs, JPMorgan Chase, and UBS investment bankers, all operating in the Rothschild League of banks.

7) Coincidentally, or demonically, the oil rig's failed cementation job exploded on Hitler's birthday, just in time to poison Earth Day 2010, thanks to Transocean's contractor--the infamous Dick Cheney/George Bush officiated Halliburton Company allied with Homeland Security. 8) Halliburton officials admit knowing their cementation job was likely to explode just when it did, according to Congressional testimony. 9) Goldman Sachs (GS) officials, likewise, knew the rig was likely to explode when it did. They bet millions of dollars on this event only days before it happened! (Lloyd Blankfein, CEO of GS, directed 44% (4.6 million shares) of BP stock to be dumped three weeks before the explosion. 10) Not surprisingly, Transocean was merged into its current corporate state by Goldman-Sachs (a.k.a., "Government Sachs") in 2007.

11) David Sidwell, Risk Committee Chairman of UBS, the wealthiest Swiss bank (in the Rothschild League or alliance of so-called" competing" banks) and the world's largest wealth manager, also dumped BP stocks massively (i.e., 99% of the banks holdings, or 2.1 million shares,) as did Wachovia/Wells Fargo. 12) BP Oil CEO Tony Hayward sold 1/3 of his BP stock (223,288 shares) on March 17--a month before the explosion. 13) Just prior to 9/11, you may recall, Goldman Sachs did the same with airline stocks; and before the Gulf catastrophe, GS shorted mortgage company stocks, fueling the real estate collapse in America.

New Shocking Facts:

14) The Management Boards of the Eurex Stock Exchanges and the Executive Board of Germany's Eurex Clearing AG decided, on April 14, 2010, to introduce an equity option on shares of Transocean Ltd, effective on the day of the explosion, April 20, 2010. This gave inside traders a full day to dump their "uninsured" stock in Transocean at the highest price possible (before the rest of Wall Street responded to the explosion). Then the crisis capitalists were able to reinvest their funds securing the higher price value. These officials published zero reason for Transocean's new equity option program that encouraged banking criminals to use "protective puts" to make millions.

In other words, by paying a relatively small premium (compared to the soon-to-be plunging market value of Transocean stock), the Rothschild Leaguers knew no matter how far the stock dropped, it could be sold at the original "strike price" (also called the "put option") anytime before April 20, 2012. This additionally evidences premeditated murder, and the financial motives of the Swiss/German banking chiefs influencing Europe's most active stock exchanges. These inside traitors and industrial saboteurs, financially controlling Transocean, Halliburton, and BP, committed the gravest environmental crime of all time, with obvious plans to profit from the mass murdering of people and destruction of the Gulf. 15) This was how money was made from the obvious sabotage. After UBS sold its 2.1 million shares of BP, prior to the explosion, the "put option" policy on BP stock was similarly exercised when UBS bought back 8.6 million BP shares by June 7.

16) Transocean Vice President of Marketing, Terry Bonno, met UBS officials on May 27, 2010, according to a heavily censored Thompson Reuter's report and transcript. (CLICK HERE to read it.) The "Ultra-Deepwater market will start to pick up longer-term," Bonno encouraged banking officials.

17) So within weeks of the explosion the Rothschild League of investment bankers were yelling "Buy! Buy! Buy! BP stock," stating the costs for clean-up were miniscule compared to what their investments and company profits would earn. 18) This quote detailed the BP-banking-stock-jocks' plot:"Buying shares today while writing $55 calls and "puts" for the January 2012 expiration allows for an outstanding cash-on-cash return if BP merely bounces back by 14% over the next 21 months. In a best case you'll net 98% total returns on the actual cash outlay (assuming you write the puts against paid-up marginable equity already held in your margin-type account)." (Editor's Note: Can you imagine the psychopathology, blind ignorance, and murderous greed of investing, or reinvesting, in these companies that are killing us and our planet?) 19) Much like the instantly manufactured equity investment option created for Transocean right before the explosion, BP's stock insurance plan secured the ongoing devastation in the Gulf with this financial promise: "In a worst case scenario you'll end up with twice the number of BP ADRs at an average cost of $42.64 or less," stock gurus promoted. "That's lower than the annual lows for BP during the entire period 2004 right through 2007."

Proud Profiteers in Media Magic

The wizards of oil, pulling the strings behind the media's propaganda, are best exemplified by Goldman Sachs's CEO, Lloyd Blankfein. Lloyd merged, and still largely controls, ABC/Disney and Miramax. Blankfein's partner, co-chairing the PFNYC, is Rupert Murdoch, controlling FOX News, Time-Warner, Associated Press, News Corp and much more. Another partner in this David Rockefeller-founded PFNYC cabal is Thompson Reuters chairman, Thomas Glocer. The PFNYC was responsible for financial reconciliations from 9-11, and "veering" World Trade Center reconstruction money from New York to Las Vegas through Apollo Management's MGM private equity investments. (Apollo co-owns Nalco/Corexit with Goldman Sachs.) The PFNYC was chartered by Britain's Royal family, bringing NBC/Comcast into their stead, as well as the General Electric company. Last but not least, CBS owner, Sumner Murray Rothstein (Redstone), joined the clique through his CBS-Viacom stable of companies.

20) The Halliburton cementation job's sabotage, and resulting oil hemorrhage in the Gulf, served perfectly, synchronously and financially, to "veer" media attention away from Lloyd Blankfein's/ Goldman-Sachs's shorting of the American housing market, accelerating the planned economic collapse of the USA for the forthcoming New World Order's "New Deal." 21) And just when we thought the Government Sachs connection to the Gulf oil rigging could not get any deeper, we learn that GS holds controlling interests (with Apollo Management) in the Nalco Company which produces the hideously deadly oil dispersant named Corexit! 22) The Rothschild Leaguers "ruled out all [Corexit] competitors even those that have shown to be far less toxic and, in some cases, nearly twice as effective," reported Paul Quinlan in the New York Times. The reason being . . . 23) Nalco formed from a joint venture with the David Rockefeller-controlled Exxon Chemical Co. in 1994. Then, . . .

24) In 2003, The Blackstone Group, Apollo Management L.P., and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners, bought Ondeo Nalco for $4.3 billion dollars. All three companies are partnered in the Rockefeller-founded, Royal Family-chartered PFNYC. 25) Ironically, according to Nalco's website, the company is portrayed as a water, energy, and air conservation corporation. They claim to be the world's leading water treatment company. Their poisonous dispersant, Corexit, is not their main business. It is a "first aid product that they've always had and they've never really used." 26) Corexit was found poisoning clean-up workers, causing kidney and liver disorders, following its debut in the 1989 Exxon-Valdez disaster. Nalco blamed these problems on 2-butoxyethanol, now claimed to have been removed. And that's not all. . . .

27) The George Bush/Dick Cheney 9/11-linked Halliburton Company purchased the world's largest oil-spill cleanup entity, Boots & Coots, three weeks before the "natural gas leak." This was synchrounous with the bankers beginning to unload BP and Transocean stocks, and securing equity options to insure their investments. Other major shareholders in Nalco/Corexit include billionaire Warren Buffett and his conglomerate holding company, Berkshire Hathaway; Maurice Strong, Al Gore, George Soros. 28) Historically, Homeland Security has contracted with Halliburton to provide detention camps for political dissidents and displaced populations, through KBR, whose financial underwriters feature the aforementioned war-makers: Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC; Goldman, Sachs & Co.; UBS Securities LLC; Citigroup Global Markets Inc.; and Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC--the precise financial institutions shorting BP and Transocean stocks as detailed above. Furthermore, . . . 29) Homeland Security's choice of accommodations for Gulf oil clean-up crews are the same toxic trailers banned from use during Hurricane Katrina. 30) Homeland Security medical officials are also now implicated in fraudulently promoting a "decoy product" for infectious disease markets called Silver Sol for profit and probably depopulation as well. Conclusion and Solution

Similar to what we found while investigating the fabricated H1N1-H5N1 Swine Flu fright and fraudulent (and increasingly threatening) vaccination campaign, the devil-doers were those in control of the "Pharma Media" involving Wall Street's heaviest hitters, all partners in the PFNYC and the Rothschild League of investment bankers. (View: PHARMAWHORES: The SHOWTIME Sting of Penn & Teller.) We The People urgently need a new banking system that entirely excludes the aforementioned criminals. It must encourage investments in permaculture and sustainable production, not destructive and polluting consumption. It must discourage petrochemical-pharmaceutical toxicity that is killing us and most other species. And it must invest in suppressed alternative energies, including hydrogen fuel and Tesla technologies that have been kept from common use by the financial paradigm makers/enslavers. The new banking system must value biological sensitivity, and love-based spirituality, more than lust for money, fueling a degenerative economy that is based on usury. One suggested solution is to form a posse to search and find leaders in this criminal banking cartel (such as

Lloyd Blankfein and David Rockefeller) and serve them, and responding law enforcers, with citizens' arrest complaints, widely publicized, using this article and its links as evidence detailing the criminal conspiracy. This way, attorneys general may be forced to do their jobs in protecting We The People. Otherwise, we need a miracle to stop the financial industry from doing what is it is doing to us and our planet. This is not a religious statement, just an accurate observation.

Jesus put his life on the line by preaching the same thing. He exposed and flogged the lesser humans who were financially enslaving humanity through usury, usurping faith in God and the new true Nation under Him. In defense of ourselves and Mother Earth, We the People now have no other reasonable choice but to neutralize mass murderers, their lethal intoxications, and environmental destructions. We pray that LOVE--communicated musically in the secreted 528Hz frequency--will help prompt this urgently required miraculous transformation of our economy and society, ending the psychopathology of menacing greed, to secure permacultural sustainability and real enduring happiness.

Make No Mistake – America Has Been SOLD By The NWO Was America Sold? By Nancy Levant 7-3-9

In 1992, George H.W. Bush signed Executive Order 12803, which gave D.C. the authority to sell America's infrastructure. They called this authority "Infrastructure Privatization." E.O. 12803 tells us this power cleared the way for the "disposition or transfer of an infrastructure "asset" such as by sale or by long-term lease from a State or local government to a private party." E.O. 12803 also lists examples of America's saleable and/or leaseable infrastructure: · Roads · Tunnels · Bridges · Electricity supply facilities · Mass transit · Rail transportation · Airports · Ports · Waterways · Recycling/wastewater treatment facilities · Solid waste disposal facilities · Hospitals · Prisons · Schools · Housing E.O. 12803 tells us that this list represents infrastructure "examples." Let us, therefore, assume that this is not the complete list of America's saleable infrastructure. However, this list is a stunning confession. Notice that all items listed in 12803 are the very same infrastructure items listed in all Martial Law Executive Orders (see here). Martial Law kicks in to power during declared states of emergency and with the single signature of the president. Strangely (and ignorantly), we currently have multiple declared states of emergency: · Act of March 9, 1933, a declared state of emergency at the request of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. This state of emergency was never lifted.

· Global pandemic - Level 6 · Mortgage/housing crisis · Banking/lending crisis · Automobile industry crisis · Insurance industry crisis · Healthcare crisis · Southwestern border crisis · Black market drug crisis · National education crisis · Nature/global warming crisis · Jobs/unemployment crisis · On-going weather and forest fire crises · Extreme and unread congressional legislation crisis due to on-going crises What are the odds of complete and total social and "natural" crisis in every single facet of our lives and all at the same time? I will tell you how it was accomplished with simple math: Federal Reserve System + Politicians + Tell-A-Vision = Assembly Line Crises. It is called the Hegelian Dialectic Show. Everything in the country, including the current planet-sized medical emergency, is in crisis. So enters Martial Law. Think of our president's promises to "change" the country and to fix the economy (which the Federal Reserve and Congress destroyed) by rebuilding America's infrastructure, including "21st Century schools" and by greening-up our living standards and conditions (International Code Council, Carbon Credits, Waxman-Markey Climate Bill, etc.) - minus, of course, privately owned land and homes (Agenda 21). In the last six months, consider the massive growth of the Federal Government, the national debt, and the powers of the Federal Reserve Central Banking System - all with stated intentions of fixing the economy that they singlehandedly destroyed - and fixing it with "infrastructure" projects. As Martial Law militarily guards all of E.O. 12803's infrastructure as listed in the Order, and with homeland paramilitary armies holding practice drills with foreign armies, local law enforcement, and emergency responders all across the nation (and with a big drill planned July 27th through July 31st in FEMA Region 6), And with all public schools, private schools, and universities forced to have "lock-down policies" and to be forced-used as quarantine holding tanks, and with all Americans having been repeatedly told to prepare for an emergency (meaning an emergency that will bring Martial Law into the full light of day, which the "drills" have clearly done), AND the very same infrastructures listed in Executive Order 12803 are also listed in all Martial Law Executive Orders, and all these infrastructures having been for sale, lease-able, or having been sold during the last 17 years- including our children's schools, our hospitals, and our homes - I suggest to you that you are witnessing Central Banking Debt Magic at its

finest moment. Wouldn't you love to know how much money has been made by selling our nation to the highest bidders? Let us review: 1. The country's infrastructure has been for sale for 17 years. Roads, tunnels, bridges, electricity supply facilities, mass transit, rail transportation, airports, ports, waterways, water supply facilities, recycling/wastewater facilities, solid waste facilities, prisons, hospitals, schools, and housing -- this being of "examples" of saleable infrastructure and not the entire list of saleable items according to E.O. 12803--so the question begs: What exactly has been sold to "private parties in our nation? We would like to see the complete list. We know that many highway systems have been sold to foreign countries, but what of the other listed items? Have they been sold as well? If so, who owns them, and more to the question, which D.C. department sold them and for how much? Did the Federal Reserve and Congress sell our nation? Where is the paperwork? Did they repay any of America's debt that they purposefully created with their pyramid fiat money lending schemes? And why are they still raising our taxes if America is no longer America but belongs to foreign nations or "private parties?" Since the Federal Reserve is a "private" corporation, did the Fed buy any of America's infrastructure "assets?" As American "housing" is on 12803's list, and since D.C. recently took over the mortgage industry, has the housing market been sold and/or leased to a "private party" like a foreign nation or the Federal Reserve Corporation? Are the American people tenants to unknown parties? Are American children occupying foreign-owned schools, and are our loved ones lying in foreign hospitals that are clearly chock-full of foreign doctors? Equally, who, exactly, is financing the building of 21st Century schools and classrooms complete with foreign curricula? The questions beg: who are the foreigners....the foreigners or the American people? More to the point, who is dissolving, partitioning, and/or divvying up our nation? Is it Obama? Geithner? Bernacke? Bushes? Clintons? FDR? Wilson? American morons? It would seem that we are preparing for the Big Transfer - the transfer of our nation to and beneath a new authority or several new authorities. It now makes a great deal of sense why foreign troops have been cross-training with our new paramilitary systems, and yes, there are foreign troops on American soil, which I fear may not be American soil at all. Equally, multiculturalism suddenly makes a great deal of sense. I believe we can call it "behavior modification" so that we the stupid people will behave and be obedient under the new rules of new and foreign leaders. I ask you, has our nation been sold out from under us, and without our knowledge? Could there be any other possible explanation for selling the most critical components of our country, while at the same time creating new, multicultural and cross-trained armies; permanently bankrupting the nation and selling its debt to foreign countries, and having Martial Law orders written specifically to protect the sold "assets" of our nation--including our schools and homes? Are America's new owners to be protected by new Martial Law armies, cross-trained with foreign armies, while our "traditional" military is spread all over the planet - except here with its nation's people? Are we being transferred to new ownership

as we speak? Consider: Washington D.C. debts were sold to foreign nations. 路 Washington D.C. = politicians 路 Debts = Federal Reserve Central (Fiat) Banking 路 Sold = Wall Street Is it not realistic to think that big league politicians, bankers, and CEOs are loyal to no nation when they were massively enriched by internationalized banking, internationalized trade, absurd and illegal taxation, and by interest rates forced upon the people of this nation, while at the same time selling our nation to other central banks around the world and "private parties" - and for personal profit? Truth is, they sold the infrastructure first, and then they sold we the people as tax generators and life-long human resources to their global banking and business partners in crime. What is the crime, you ask? The Federal Reserve, which is a piece of a global banking cartel, and their politicians and CEO partners who made counterfeiting and Ponzi/pyramid schemes legalized theft on continental scales. Your country is 1) not your country and, 2) not what you thought it was for at least 100 years. You are going to have to seek God's grace to be relieved from the bitterness of that truth. Today, we don't know under whose authority we live, but Washington, D.C. and the Federal Reserve do know. Big, big changes are on the horizon. All I can tell you is to remember that freedom, granted to all by God, is first and foremost a state of mind. Pray for guidance. Prepare yourselves because Obama spoke the truth. It is all about "infrastructure." The promised change has arrived. The question is this: who owns America? Who have the American people been committed to serving and beneath what form of government? We can pretty much assume that Asia owns a very large chunk of America, as does Great Britain, India, Middle Eastern countries, and perhaps Mexico and Canada, as well. We can also assume that Martial Law armies will be guarding all the sold "assets" during what could be an extraordinary and massively tyrannical transfer of power. The love of money is the root of all evil. No truer words were ever spoken.

Posted on Mon, Oct. 11, 2010 04:32 PM

State of California Selects Buyer for State Buildings $2.33 billion Sale-Leaseback Bid Delivers $1 billion to the General Fund; Makes Future Costs for State Office Space Predictable and Controllable Today, the Department of General Services announced it has selected California First, LLC, a partnership led by Hines and Antarctica Capital Real Estate LLC, as the buyer for 11 state office properties authorized by the legislature and Governor last year. The winning offer was $2.33 billion — resulting in more than $1.2 billion for the state general fund, and $1.09 billion to pay off bonds on the buildings. Over the next 20 years, the state will lease the offices back from the new owner at predetermined rates, and will no longer maintain, operate, or repair the buildings. All the leases with California First allow the state to buy back any or all of the buildings at anytime during the 20-year term. “After an extensive review of the more than 300 bids that were received, I have determined that this offer presents the best value for the state and achieves the goals set forth by the Legislature and Governor,” said Acting DGS Director Ron Diedrich. “This sale will allow us to bring in desperately needed revenues and free the state from the ongoing costs and risks of owning real estate.” Hines, a privately owned real estate firm headquartered in Houston, Texas, is involved in real estate investment, development and property management worldwide. The firm’s historical and current portfolio of projects that are underway, completed, acquired and managed for third parties includes 1,119 properties representing more than 457 million square feet of office, residential, mixed-use, industrial, hotel, medical and sports facilities, as well as large, master-planned communities and land developments. Antarctica Capital Real Estate, LLC; a venture led by California real estate veteran Rich Mayo of Spyglass Realty Partners, along with Chandra Patel of Antarctica Capital headquartered in Irvine, California and New York, NY, is a private equity firm specializing in real estate. There are also additional equity investors. The all cash offer will utilize a typical debt and equity ratio with the general partners and investors providing approximately 40 percent of the purchase price, and a major financial institution supplying the balance as a loan to the new owners. Director Diedrich today notified the state legislature of the department’s intent to sell the properties – a notification called for under the authorizing legislation. The offices are:         

Attorney General Building, Sacramento California Emergency Management Agency Building, Sacramento Capitol Area East End Complex, Sacramento Elihu M. Harris Building, Oakland Franchise Tax Board Complex, Sacramento San Francisco Civic Center, San Francisco Junipero Serra State Building, Los Angeles Department of Justice Building, Sacramento Public Utilities Commission Building, San Francisco

 

Judge Joseph A. Rattigan Building, Santa Rosa Ronald Reagan State Building, Los Angeles

*Sales brochure for the properties. In his letter to the legislature, Diedrich shared the department’s economic analysis summary of the sale comparing the status quo of ownership of the buildings to the sale and leaseback transaction. Using a series of reasonable and prudent assumptions the analysis shows that the sale allows California to retire $1.09 billion in bond debt, leaving over $1.2 billion in new revenues to shore up the state budget, as a result eliminating the need for more program cuts statewide or tax increases. By no longer owning the properties, the state eliminates annual lease payments and interest, as well as operating expenses. The state also sheds the responsibility for deferred and major capital improvements, as well as the obligation to pay for unforeseen and unpredictable repairs that cannot be anticipated but are increasingly likely as the buildings age. In April, the state’s broker, CB Richard Ellis received more than 300 offers to purchase the buildings. The offers included individually priced offers on each building; however, the most aggressive pricing came largely from 30 offers for the entire portfolio. Portfolio buyers were given the opportunity to submit a second round of offers on May 11. CBRE received 16 increased portfolio offers, 11 of which exceeded the state’s $2 billion estimate of the value of the properties. Those 11 bidders were then invited to submit a “best and final” offer by May 21. Since May 21, DGS, in conjunction with its broker, has been evaluating the top offers. This evaluation included a comprehensive analysis of each of the 11 best and final offers which included separate interviews with each finalist. Buyers were evaluated based on a reconciliation of two primary factors – price and certainty of execution. CB Richard Ellis investigated with DGS the bidder’s track record; and how much due diligence the bidder had done on the state properties prior to making a buyer selection. Evaluation criteria included whether due diligence reports were reviewed; due diligence inspections were completed; the extent of property tours; the nature of contract and lease comments; the financial backing the buyer had in place and finally, the buyer’s ability to both remove contingencies and close the transaction quickly. “The State of California received significant portfolio interest, and the proceeds at the sale price of $2.33 billion will far exceed the $660 million originally estimated. Far from a fire sale, this was a stiff, multiple offer competition that generated favorable pricing for the state,” said Kevin Shannon with CBRE, who handled the sale on behalf of the state. “Current historically low interest rates have allowed the state to obtain extraordinary pricing comparable with peak level capitalization rates with leaseback rents well below peak market levels. An additional benefit is that the state will be getting out of the commercial real estate management business, and transferring asset management to Hines, a globally recognized leader.” The Department of General Services anticipates completing all transactions in the 4 th quarter of 2010. The Department of General Services acts as the business manager for the State of California, with more than 4,000 employees and a budget in excess of $1 billion. DGS helps state government better serve the

public by providing services to state agencies including innovative procurement and acquisition solutions, creative real estate management, leasing and design services, environmentally friendly transportation, and architectural oversight and innovative funding for the construction of safe schools. Downloads: Original Sale Brochure – DGS Financial Analysis Summary – Video/Photos

Read more:

November 16, 2010

Former appointees seek halt of Schwarzenegger building sale Two state building appointees removed by Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger filed suit Tuesday to block California's sale of appellate court buildings, alleging that the deal is unconstitutional because the administration has not received approval from the state Judicial Council. Lawmakers and Schwarzenegger authorized the sale of 11 state properties as part of the 2009 budget agreement to raise more than $1 billion for state coffers, including buildings in San Francisco and Los Angeles that house state courtrooms. Schwarzenegger officials settled on a bid this year from a consortium of investors that will net the state about $1.3 billion, with an agreement to lease them back for at least 20 years. But the deal has been panned in recent weeks by Democrats, including Treasurer Bill Lockyer, Controller John Chiang and Democratic budget leaders. The nonpartisan Legislative Analyst's Office last week said the deal would cost the state $6 billion in nominal dollars over 35 years or $1.4 billion in present-value dollars. The LAO said it was the equivalent of paying 10.2 percent interest on the $1.3 billion in immediate cash. Plaintiffs in the suit are Los Angeles businessmen Jerry Epstein and Rusty Doms, both of whom Schwarzenegger dismissed from the Los Angeles State Building Authority this spring after they voiced their concerns over the deal. The building authority, which oversees long-term financing of the state properties in Los Angeles, was required to sign off on the transaction, which its replacement appointees did earlier this month. Democratic trial lawyer Joseph Cotchett filed the suit Tuesday in San Francisco Superior Court. Schwarzenegger officials have been working to complete the deal before the governor leaves office Jan. 3. The lawsuit asks the court to block the sale immediately. Update (3:30 p.m.): Post updated to reflect fact that Schwarzenegger removed Epstein and Doms from the board, though their original appointments predated the governor. Posted by Kevin Yamamura Read more:

Tyranny’s Last Stand: The Tipping Point is Here Michael Edwards Activist Post October 4, 2010 In Malcolm Gladwell‘s provocative book The Tipping Point, he gives many examples of how seemingly small, insignificant decisions can radiate to cause an eventual wave of change that overtakes the prevailing modes of behavior. He clearly extrapolates how the silent leaders of society — not the ones on TV, or the ones we appoint — set trends through their singular ability to recognize an underlying need, or change of direction. It can be as simple as a clothing style, a type of cuisine, a new travel destination . . . or the need to change the world‘s political course. I believe there are signs that The Tipping Point for free humanity has been reached; from here on out, there will be an open dialogue between the forces of tyranny and the forces of freedom.

The enemies are the banking consortium.

The idea that in order to recognize tyranny, you must force it to act as such is very much the case right now. Humanity is rebelling worldwide to the dictates of Elite overlords and petty bureaucrats alike. The small, silent statements of resistance have reached a classic tipping point. Whether it is tax rebellion, free speech, freedom of religion, the freedom to speak out against endless war, women‘s rights in oppressive regimes, or the freedom to grow one‘s own food in peace, the small defeats and victories have become a sustained chorus of resistance to everincreasing forces of control. This chorus has coalesced from the choirs of different nations, different genders, different political affiliations, different races, and different socioeconomic positions. This is the ultimate sign of a true tipping point: critical mass has been reached.

The modern pantheon of enemies has now been identified, along with their demiurges, by even the most common of men. The enemies are the banking consortium; the global Elite born and bred from mega-wealth; the academics and economists who disconnect ideas from reality; and the scientific and military minds who are so compartmentalized by design that they rarely know what sort of dictatorship to which they are making their contributions. These are the groups that every man, woman, and child recognizes instinctively, because they are the same personalities encountered in our childhood. Until this point, these dictators have had the smugness to assume that the ones they view as the weak would cower forever. These tyrants have vastly underestimated the power of numbers and the exponential factors by which simple numbers can increase to create a tipping point that can cause an overnight Sea change. The few who had the most courage, while enduring mass ridicule, have spoken out for decades against a coming full spectrum tyranny. These natural leaders are now raising their voices even louder and more urgently. Some of these pioneers have withdrawn from their previous missions in acknowledgment of The Tipping Point; many have decided to redouble their efforts. Regardless, little by little their collective audience has grown; whether in stadiums, or on Web sites, or in home discussion groups; the numbers have swelled, prompting a massive fear response from tyrants who know (with their instincts) when an uprising is taking place.

So now we see tyranny emerging in its most blatant form: citizen spies; government COINTELPRO operations against peaceful assembly; technological surveillance of every stripe, and the jackbooted common thug promoted to the top of the class in order to enforce an increasingly regimented society where thought is an actual liability. The good news is that it is already too late for the forces of tyranny; they have had their reign for long enough — The Tipping Point has been reached. The previous fence-straddlers — even from the mainstream media — are now sounding the alarm. And true patriots everywhere who have seen the writing on the wall for a long time coming are now sounding the charge. Tyranny has been fatally weakened by its continual pursuit of the lowest common denominator. All that remains is a hollow shell without the substance to counter a new Humanity tipping toward unbridled freedom.

Watch The Calling: .


Get a free copy of Confessions of an Economic Hit Man: .

PLEASE STAND UP? Meditations on 9/11 Truth by Catherine Austin Fitts Š Copyright 2005, From The Wilderness Publications, All Rights Reserved. May be reprinted, distributed or posted on an Internet web site for non-profit purposes only.

[Many people have asked me what I thought about the recently popularized book Confessions of an Economic Hit Man and I have held my tongue because I just didn't have time to do the brilliant deconstruction of the book's "limited hangout" approach performed here by Catherine Austin Fitts. In this article the former Assistant Secretary of Housing and past managing director of Dillon Read brings us face to face with the horrors for which we all share a measure of responsibility. Those who would have us work through and affirm the current system don't want these horrors to be seen, because any recognition of them leads on to other realities that are darker still. Fitts also makes clear the point that I was making in Seattle which has been so widely misrepresented. There are no real avenues left for 911 activism in the traditional sense of the word. The election is over. All three 9/11 suits (Hilton, Mariani and the Saudi case) have been dismissed or morphed as I said they would be. Congress has shown and will show no courage. The 9/11 Commission (totally compromised) has closed its doors. The Justice Department (part of the 9/11 plot) will do nothing. The courts are compromised and the mainstream media (also part of the crime) has moved on. NY Attorney General Elliot Spitzer has yet to do anything with the 9/11 material he has received, remaining quiet in order to protect his bid for the NY state house.

But there are new channels of real accountability that can change the world, if 911 activists can persuade activist communities to understand the realities of economic warfare and to begin to promote marketplace strategies. Real headway can be made if we withdraw our deposits, purchases, investments and attention from media, banks, companies and investors complicit in 911 and war profiteering and cover up. These marketplace strategies can dovetail with other innovative tactics, building financial constituencies to support the rule of law. What would Elliot Spitzer do if millions of New Yorkers threatened to withdraw all of their money from the large New York Federal Reserve banks unless he moved forward with an investigation? What would happen if hundreds of thousands of New Yorkers cancelled their subscriptions to the New York Times in protest over the lies of 911? There is still a great deal to learn from 9/11 that can proactively help individuals to read the real map of the world and make a difference in their own lives. This involves a fundamental change of approach: the old, futile course of action asks citizens to go hat in hand to government and corporate interests to make them change (an impossibility), while the new approach says that if the citizens themselves change enough within, that change can shift markets while there is still time to make some difference in the outcome for individual lives. In other words, one approach tries to convince us that the right path is to get someone else (with no interest in doing so) to save us and the other says that we must accept the responsibility for saving ourselves and gather and exercise the real power we have and have not yet used. Which makes more sense to you? - MCR] Economic Hit Men A "limited hangout" is a partial confession, a mea culpa, if you will, that leaves the essence of a crime or covert reality hidden. Because it includes some small part of the truth, the limited hangout is irresistibly attractive to dissidents and political critics whose thirst for such truth makes them jump at the dangled scraps. Once the system's watchdogs are busy chewing on the limited hangout, the guilty players can go about their illegal business for a new round of unaccountable, semi-secret mayhem.1 If you want to see an excellent limited hang out at work, pick up a copy of the John Perkins' bestselling Confessions of an Economic Hit Man. In his limited hangout confession, Perkins describes his career from 1971 to 1981 as a highly paid professional who helped defraud Third World countries by helping syndicates make uneconomic loans as a means to facilitate the eventual takeover of those economies by elite and corporate interests. Greg Palast, Anne Williamson and other first-rate investigative journalists have brilliantly documented instances of such economic warfare against sovereign governments and national economies - where nations are taken over with their own money, in much the same way as a corporate raider takes over a company through leveraged buyout. I have documented a similar process in US communities and mortgage markets. In writing about this process, I use the concept of an "economic tapeworm" to explain the negative return on investment financial system that operates globally and relies on economic and military warfare to finance and subsidize itself.2 The phenomenon that Perkins writes about is well known. But his personal "how to" account of an economic hit pertains to an apparently cold case, far in the financial past. While this story is very instructive for those who have not yet dealt with professional fraudsters or been targeted by economic warfare3 (whether in the Third World or in the First World nations) it is even more instructive for its omissions - and for its timing as an apologia intended, we are led to believe, somehow to assuage guilt for harm done: it relates to events occurring twenty-five or thirty years ago, involving players who are, for the most part, dead or retired from the business of economic warfare and companies that have morphed into later incarnations. In the process of providing a colorful account of a 1970s whodunit (complete with low tech strategies devoid of the dazzling technology toolkit that is now an essential part of the economic hit man's weaponry of economic warfare), Perkins delivers to readers the "big lie": he reveals the secret that there is no greater conspiracy. This is simply globalization run amok, he would have us believe. Somehow, this particular conspiracy theory seems

charmingly credible as part of a "confession." Perkins admits to what is known and then uses the credibility created by his "limited hangout" to further obscure the reality of who's who in the real governance of global investment and risk management. We are to presume that the investment networks in and around the Harvard Corporation, the City of London, the Vatican and investment managers and bankers for the proceeds of transnational organized crime are simply good-hearted fellows who let things get out of hand. Nowhere does Perkins introduce the notion that cartels in a "New World Order" (the phrase coined and promoted by George H. W. Bush) use covert manipulation of the global financial system to centralize and concentrate economic and political power. Assassinations by "jackals" aside, Perkins barely hints that for fifty years the US military-industrial complex has been developing and testing powerful black budget technology, satellite and other invisible weaponry and surveillance technology and insider-trading tools behind the veil of national security secrets. Indeed, it was the need for a means of financing black budget operations and weaponry outside the view and control of Congress and the appropriations process - rather than the mere pursuit of corporate profits - that provided the political air cover for Perkins to do what he did as his covert counterparts marketed drugs in American and Third World communities alike. It's an old rule of economics. Sources and uses need to be in one integrated financial statement to understand an enterprise. In Perkins' world, we are never quite clear who got what cash and in what amounts when all was said and done. Which means someone gets to keep the money and remain socially acceptable - and we remain clueless as to who was really running things two decades ago. Economic Warfare in the 21st Century The power of Perkins' book as a limited hangout can be understood by observing the sales, support and kudos in mainstream media it has achieved while the leading books on 9/114, arguably the most significant economic hit in US history,5 have had a much harder time garnering attention. The message seems to be that economic warfare is something that the corporate mainstream will acknowledge, but only so long as it is low tech, long ago, and far away. Understanding and facing the economic warfare responsible for slowly poisoning us and our families and wiping out our retirement savings is a complex and very scary undertaking in comparison to Perkins' concerned confessions. Perhaps we prefer to disassociate from our present circumstances, live in a perpetual state of cognitive dissonance, and focus on the study of yesteryear. Complex and scary as it may seem, the growing body of evidence makes a compelling case that officials of the US government, its contractors and the military abetted the 9/11 attacks. With the help and complicity of the US Congress and corporate media, they are engaged in the most profitable war and enforcement profiteering in history. This is a terrifying picture to contemplate. Look how tough it has been for New Yorkers, the constituency most adversely affected by the 9/11 tragedy. A recent Zogby poll indicates that 49.3 percent of residents of New York City hold the opinion that officials "knew in advance that attacks were planned on or around September 11, 2001, and that they consciously failed to act." Yet, despite this widespread conviction and the mounting evidence that sustains it, no serious support has developed for the November 2004 citizens' complaint requesting that Elliot Spitzer, the Attorney General of New York, finally open a criminal investigation into the tragedy. Although fifteen NYC legislators have also called for such an inquiry, there has as yet been no effort locally to hold the New York Senate and Congressional delegations accountable for failing to hold the executive branch responsible for its failure to perform, or for its potential complicity. While the New York firemen booing Hillary Clinton off the stage at the 911 Concert was a start, the sentiment expressed has not translated into political action or market action. How many New Yorkers have cut off their subscriptions to, ads in or investments in the stock of the New York Times when the Times helped to facilitate the 9/11 cover-up by failing to ask probative questions or hold officials accountable?

The problem the average New Yorker has is the same that we all face - our complicity is deep. We have an entire economy and culture financially dependent upon too many things that harm people and the environment. This is not new. Only the possibility that the war machine is blowing up thousands of middle class Americans in American office buildings in broad daylight is new. The fact that the Bushes and the Clintons are on the same team - and have been since their alleged Iran-Contra partnership in an airport operation in Mena, Arkansas involving the transshipment of cocaine destined for the streets of America - is not something that most Americans have yet incorporated into our political equation. The fact that current financial and commodity markets "clear" not through the operation of changes in price generated by the legitimate free market expression of supply and demand but rather by blowing up American office buildings and the people and legal documents in them is not something that most Americans saving for retirement or financing a home have incorporated as risks in developing an investment strategy. We cannot fathom that economic warfare is now conducted using high tech software weaponry to silently invade the privacy of our banking and purchasing relationships, our comings and goings, and the details of our work and home lives. Nor have we incorporated this realization into our decisions about who we share our lives with and what we say and do behind closed doors. The illumination of the truth of 9/11, however, could change most Americans' paradigms and transactions in powerful ways. It could certainly fuel an increase in demand for precious metals, alternative energy and local selfsufficiency. The Strong Dollar Policy In the mid-1990s, the Clinton Administration, led by an economic team comprised of Robert Rubin, Lawrence Summers and Franklin Raines, instituted something called the "strong dollar policy." This policy was maintained by the Bush Administration, which held over in the first term many of the key players in policymaking positions, including George Tenet, Jerry Hawke (Comptroller of the Currency 1998 - 2004) and Charles Rossotti (45th Commissioner of the IRS). The smoothness of the transition between administrations ostensibly led by political parties in opposition to each other belies the ruse and underscores the strategic nature of the centralization of economic and politic power under way. While the game of trying to figure out what in the world the strong dollar policy really is has gotten increasingly Orwellian,6 the basics are pretty simple. We have kept the dollar's value high relative to other currencies - and far above what fundamental economics would warrant - by asking the consumer and taxpayer to shoulder extraordinary and rising levels of debt financed by increasing amounts of dirty money. This has enabled elites to move off shore and into private hands virtually all the real financial equity in the country. The US is not alone in experiencing "disappearing equity" - it is part of a global equity-centralizing and asset-control process. The strong dollar policy was characterized by a series of financial and market manipulations: Four Secretaries of the Treasury refused to produce audited financial statements and reported a total of $4 trillion in "undocumentable adjustments";7 The Clinton and Bush Administrations rejected policies that would build American productivity and employment8 in the face of the plan to move employment abroad while permitting the growth of debt and immigration quotas at home;

The Clinton and Bush Administrations promoted federal credit policies that turned American homes into ATM machines and led to a mortgage market characterized by increasing levels of fraud; The Clinton and Bush Administrations in concert with the central banks (most notably the Federal Reserve) and bullion banks (including JP Morgan-Chase, Citibank and Goldman Sachs) manipulated the gold and silver markets to suppress the price of precious metals while large inventories were moved out of governments and central bank accounts worldwide and into private hands; US pension funds and 401k and IRA retirement savings accounts lost value by waves of accounting and other financial frauds at widely held corporations (such as Enron, Worldcom and Tyco); US Congress and regulatory agencies like the Securities and Exchange Commission adopted corporate controls, ostensibly to protect investors from further acts of corporate fraud, that operate as a subtle form of capital control, limiting the ability of entrepreneurs on Main Street to raise capital in financial markets; Military force was used to ensure that global investors would continue to purchase US Treasury and mortgage agency securities and the US dollar would prevail as the currency of international choice; The federal budget, federal credit, and federal contracting were operated to favor corporate profit making at the cost of small business and labor productivity; US Treasury and Federal Reserve market intervention was used to ensure low cost of capital for favored global corporations; and, The types and amounts of outstanding financial derivatives exploded, far beyond the ability of most public and private leaders to understand or explain. No one has made a count of the deaths that resulted worldwide from these various financial manipulations. The death toll from the pincer movement of military warfare and economic warfare is far greater than is generally understood. 9/11: Strong Dollar Policy Steroids? While floating the global dollar economy on a sea of debt and easy money worked well for the economic hit men and women through the end of the 1990s, by the summer of 2001 the game seemed to have run its course. Defense appropriations had stalled that summer. Members of the media were asking questions about $3.3 trillion missing from HUD and DOD. Shortly before 9/11, Donald Rumsfeld admitted that DOD could not account for trillions of taxpayer dollars. On September 9, 2001, From the Wilderness issued an economic alert warning that the global financial system ran the risk of meltdown.9 With the events of 9/11, however, the US government was able to garner support for the extraordinary financial market interventions necessary to continue the strong dollar policy and for keeping the lid on the various financial frauds and manipulations. America and the global financial system have stayed afloat for another three years. The answer to the question Cui Bono? ("Who benefits?") from the strong dollar policy suggests that allegations that members of the Bush Administration fully expected, welcomed and even facilitated 9/11 should be taken seriously. Trillions of dollars have been moved out of the US economy under the umbrella of the strong dollar policy - much of it in what appear to be criminal ways. The 9/11 tragedy conveniently necessitated a sudden, centralized control over government and theretofore private activities in the name of protecting national security interests and addressing the threat of terrorism. 9/11 diverted attention from and shut the door behind that money movement. It ushered in a wave of legislation rushed through Congress that would make it much more difficult for

the American people to do anything about it. The events of 9/11 have acted as a "lock-down" on a financial coup d'ĂŠtat at the core of the "strong dollar policy." In the Machiavellian tradition, it turns out that the "strong dollar policy" is a policy that intentionally destroys the value of the dollar. Justifying the End of Markets and Democracy Traditionally, the faith of the US working class in democracy has been one of the most powerful supports for democracy worldwide. It is not enough to bankrupt the American middle class and the American government. The current effort to move to more centrally controlled governance also requires removing this faith that underpins support for global democracy. Part and parcel of doing so is establishing popular support for the notion that the economic supports for democracy - sound money, open and transparent markets and government, and access to equity - are somehow bad. An example of this is Marjorie Kelly's The Divine Right of Capital, which neglects to integrate the covert revenue streams into the equation and instead attempts to explain problems and resolutions in terms of overt cash flows only. According to Kelly, the editor of Business Ethics magazine, free markets, not organized crime and black budgets, are the problem. Hence, the problem is that shareholders want to make money, not that insiders rip off small investors of their savings and retirement investments using criminal means, protected, not obstructed, by governmental intervention. Kelly's bio mentions her speaking engagements at Harvard, without concern for Harvard's leadership in Enron, Harken, the rape of Russia, HUD corruption and other criminal frauds. In the latest escalation of the Orwellian nightmare, we have entire networks of good-hearted progressives and socially responsible investors promoting a framework of "problems-solutions" that provides the perfect intellectual camouflage for their opponents' control over national and international resources. Now that the so-called "New World Order" has stolen all of the money, those who are most appalled at this state of affairs unwittingly promote policies that will prevent the ordinary person from communicating with integrity or creating and accumulating wealth. Even worse, they crave the credibility conferred by the foundation, church and university investment syndicates most richly rewarded by economic and military warfare. Their behavior and the policies they promote -- if allowed to triumph --will ensure our descent into a 21st century war economy. Lest these words give offense, I would encourage you to read one of the most important and brilliant economic articles of 2004, "Shilling for a New World Order" by Anne Williamson.10 Understanding Mr. Shiller and the folks who finance and promote his effort tells us much about who profits from fascism. Shiller provides the philosophical prerequisites for ending democracy and markets for good and ensuring that no one can rise other than through serving the war economy. Getting to the truth of 9/11 offers an opportunity to ask and answer the unanswered questions of who is running our world, and to illuminate how the covert cash flows really work. Only with such a powerful understanding can we appreciate the intellectual poison in Shiller's proposals and find real solutions effective in decentralizing our financial systems. I am reminded of a wonderful and very intelligent staff member of the CIA who told me in 1997, "your problem is that you have not answered the question, where does evil come from?" Indeed, this is the unanswered question of our day; one that cannot be answered without a much richer and clear picture than we now have of the economic warfare raging throughout our world and the economic hit men and women leading it. There is Hope - Two Stories Story #1 In November 2004 I was at a precious metals investment conference and had the opportunity to ask one of the speakers, the former head of a US intelligence agency, why the Air Force "stood down four times on 9/11." His answer surprised me. One of his major points during the speech had been the importance of cooperation among all

parts of military, intelligence and enforcement on events like 9/11. He answered in a tone of anger saying something like, "I wouldn't know, dear. I ran the (intelligence agency), not the Air Force. You would have to ask the Air Force." Throughout the years of the strong dollar policy, precious metals investors have held out hope that the price of gold and silver will rise based on economic fundamentals. However, when supply and demand forces can be artificially balanced through covert operations and black budget market manipulations financed by warfare and organized crime, the price can stay managed forever - as long as there are sufficient energy resources to do so. This is a much darker and more subtle form of confiscation than was previously thought possible. I saw and heard a dawning realization in that audience that precious metal investors were being "had." As global investors come to understand the truth of 9/11, a lot of resources can shift in very decentralizing ways. I presume that the speaker's fear before such an audience indicated that he understood this too. He appreciates that the economic hit men's control of global markets is much more vulnerable to the viral spread of truth than it seems. Indeed, the following week, the speaker made a public statement that the Internet needed increased controls. It would seem the truth of 911 is quite powerful. Story #2 Two weeks ago I visited a friend who has absolutely no interest in politics. He is well into his seventies. He understands the extent and seriousness of the corruption. Given his age, he has concluded that the only thing he can do to help is live an upright life and pray. His response to the truth of 9/11 is to withdraw from current events and contribute spiritually. He mentioned that a group of his friends had suggested that a recent event had been determined by covert means in complete contradiction to accounts put forth by the mainstream media. He spoke about our current leadership with sadness. It was clear from his manner that he no longer takes them seriously. They have lost what the Chinese call "the mandate of heaven." They are thugs - to be avoided in public and laughed at in private. While this may sound like a small thing, I saw something I have seen many times since the Presidential election. Many Americans are quietly and invisibly withdrawing our mandate from the current leadership - not from America as a country, or from the notion of a democratic American government or from the American people. We understand that our enemy is not these things. This silent withdrawal in the hearts and minds of millions and the use of spiritual warfare to effectively counter those behind economic and military warfare has the power to shift power to more legitimate leadership. Enough hearts and minds on Main Street are silently withdrawing our support to begin real cultural and economic change. Imagine if the truth of 9/11 could illuminate the real economic hit men and women of our day and age and - unleashed from the paralysis of not understanding the covert flows around us and who we can trust - help us transform our situation in a wealth creating way? As Percy Bysshe Shelley once said, "Ye are many. They are few."


See Jamey Hecht, "Failure and Crime Are Not the Same: 9/11's Limited Hangouts," 2 See Catherine Austin Fitts, "The Myth of the Rule of Law,"; "The Negative Return on Investment Economy," and "The American Tapeworm,"

3 For a description of an "economic hit" of which my company was a target, see the "Litigation," available online at


For a list of recommended books on 9/11, including The New Pearl Harbor and 9/11 Commission Report: Omissions and Distortions by David Ray Griffin, Crossing the Rubicon by Mike Ruppert, The Complete 9/11 Timeline by Paul Thompson, Inside Job by Jim Marrs and others, see


Catherine Austin Fitts, "9/11 Profiteering,"


Kelly Patricia O'Meara, "Strong Dollar Hides Weak Policy,"


Kelly Patricia O'Meara, "Missing Money Articles,"; "Treasury Checks and Unbalances," Treasury.Checks.And.Unbalances-658744.shtml 8

Catherine Austin Fitts, "The Story of Edgewood Technology Services,"


Mike Ruppert, "Global Economic Collapse Likely,"

10 NewsID=662

Visit the website by clicking:

. Click here to get the books: Watch: BILDERBERG EXPOSED in EU Parliament Press Conference:

Corporation Nation Posted on November 8, 2010 by anticorruptionsociety

by AL Whitney (C) copyright 2010 All Rights Reserved

A MONSTER HAS GROWN UP AROUND USA INC THAT NOW THREATENS THE POPULATION OF THE ENTIRE COUNTRY When state Constitutions were set aside in favor of a ‘unified’ federal corporation, USA INC in Washington D C, via the Reconstruction Act and the 14th Amendment after the Civil War the entire country was transformed into a ‘group’ of interconnected states. These states then became corporate entities of the USA INC corporate franchise system. The system continued to grow and divide eventually incorporating the counties, townships, municipalities, and school districts, etc. Even government ‘agencies’ like the Center for Disease Control, the Ohio Department of Health and the State of Wisconsin Investment Board became their own corporate entities now listed individually as businesses on Dun and Bradstreet. As the public was never told that the United States had been transformed into USA INC, they were completely unaware that this ‘corporation nation’ was being erected. The public still believes we have public servants who work for us. In reality we do not have a ‘government’ but live smack dab in the middle of a massive corporate/business enterprise. USA INC has to be the largest government corporate franchise system that has ever existed on the planet. And it is now devouring both the population and the planet . . . for profits to feed itself. For GOVERNMENT INC is heavily invested in the stock market and collectively represents significant shareholder influence. The investment and pension fund managers for GOVERNMENT INC care only about returns, they are not hired to be concerned about the environment OR our life (health), liberty and pursuit of happiness. The State of Wisconsin Investment Board (SWIB) perfectly demonstrates the workings of GOVERNMENT INC. On their web site, they explain ‘Corporate Governance’: Corporate Governance Overview Corporate governance is a powerful force in American business and, as one of the largest pension funds in the world, SWIB strives to protect its investments by being proactive in this area. SWIB’s Corporate Governance Program was implemented in 1986 to protect SWIB’s long-term investment earnings by exercising its rights as a shareholder. As a way to carry out SWIB’s fiduciary obligation to the trust fund beneficiaries, we work to keep companies and their directors focused on shareholder value by communicating concerns to company management and corporate board members. In most cases, governance activities are directly associated with SWIB assets. However, when warranted and to promote and enhance long-term shareholder value, SWIB may become involved in other governance activities that apply to a greater public issue and more broadly impact the integrity of public corporations. This film explains how this system works – and how this system works against us. Better than that, it explains how to investigate your own state, county or municipality and verify this information for yourself.

WATCH CORPORATION NATION: It is futile for us to rally against the anti-people and anti-environment practices of mega corporations, while our own ’governments’ invest heavily into their continued growth. We the People want local organic food and our ‘government’ wants increased revenue from Monsanto. We the People want clean energy and our ‘government’ wants increased revenue from the petroleum industry. And so far We the People are losing, as more and more of our own local businesses fail while WalMarts go in around the country. After all GOVERNMENT funds invest heavily in the growth of WalMart as well. The 14th Amendment not only changed our ‘government’ it changed our ‘relationship’ to it. It created something best termed as voluntary servitude . . . or a new corporate entity called a ‘strawman’.

And to make matters worse, the 14th Amendment was never ratified by the states. To restore a government Of the People, By the People and For the People, the unratified 14th Amendment needs to be nullified by each state legislature. Without the nullification of this unlawful amendment, we will all remain in involuntary servitude and the unwitting victims of a runaway Corporation Nation. What does this mean? Here are a few examples:              

Mandated vaccinations for our children (and ourselves?) Mandatory medication for our ‘active’ school children Mandatory public schooling for all children Mandatory water fluoridation – with no warnings regarding infant formula Mandatory taxes such as property, sales, excise, licenses, and permits Mandatory federal IDs Mandatory federal healthcare . . . or pay heavy fines for both patients and physicians Mandatory electronic medical records in unprotected computer systems Mandatory RFID chips Mandatory banking fees per transaction Mandatory regulations, permits and penalties for all food growers Mandatory compliance in all USA INC Treaties or Agreements Mandatory body scans for identification at airports and other facilities Mandatory medical compliance (aka involuntary experimentation) for all serving in the military

A corporate structure has been erected around us – without our awareness or permission – that brings us closer and closer to an Illumicorp future that will be very similar to the futuristic novel 1984. INC the BEAST is indeed a doom machine with no limits to growth and no fiduciary responsibility to ‘do no harm’. Related: Walter Burien – CAFR1 INC the BEAST and its Cost Effective Analysis of Destruction The Corporation – commodisizing life itself

Fluoride, Teeth, and the Atomic Bomb I n t r o d u c t i o n: The following article was commissioned by the Christian Science Monitor in the spring of 1997. Despite much favorable comment from editors, and full documentation, the story remains unpublished by the Monitor. By any yardstick, this report was an award-winning scoop for any national paper. The report offers a glimpse into the history of fluoride, a bio-accumulative toxic that Americans ingest every day. The authors, Griffiths and Bryson, spent more than a year on research. With the belief that the information should be withheld no longer, the authors gave their report to Waste Not, and others, with a short note: "use as you wish." This introduction is taken from Waste Not #414 (September 1997) where the article was first published. The article went on to be nominated as the year's 18th most censored story in the 1998 Project Censored Series. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Visit the Fluoride Action Network:

Fluoride, Teeth, and the Atomic Bomb by Chris Bryson & Joel Griffiths Some fifty years after the United States began adding fluoride to public water supplies to reduce cavities in children's teeth, declassified government documents are shedding new light on the roots of that still-controversial public health measure, revealing a surprising connection between fluoride and the dawning of the nuclear age. Today, two thirds of U.S. public drinking water is fluoridated. Many municipalities still resist the practice, disbelieving the government's assurances of safety. Since the days of World War II, when this nation prevailed by building the world's first atomic bomb, U.S. public health leaders have maintained that low doses of fluoride are safe for people, and good for children's teeth. That safety verdict should now be re-examined in the light of hundreds of once-secret WWII documents obtained by Griffiths and Bryson --including declassified papers of the Manhattan Project, the U.S. military group that built the atomic bomb.

Fluoride was the key chemical in atomic bomb production, according to the documents. Massive quantities of fluoride-- millions of tons-- were essential for the manufacture of bomb-grade uranium and plutonium for nuclear weapons throughout the Cold War. One of the most toxic chemicals known, fluoride rapidly emerged as the leading chemical health hazard of the U.S atomic bomb program--both for workers and for nearby communities, the documents reveal.

Other revelations include: * Much of the original proof that fluoride is safe for humans in low doses was generated by A-bomb program scientists, who had been secretly ordered to provide "evidence useful in litigation" against defense contractors for fluoride injury to citizens. The first lawsuits against the U.S. A-bomb program were not over radiation, but over fluoride damage, the documents show. * Human studies were required. Bomb program researchers played a leading role in the design and implementation of the most extensive U.S. study of the health effects of fluoridating public drinking water--conducted in Newburgh, New York from 1945 to 1956. Then, in a classified operation code-named "Program F," they secretly gathered and analyzed blood and tissue samples from Newburgh citizens, with the cooperation of State Health Department personnel. * The original secret version--obtained by these reporters--of a 1948 study published by Program F scientists in the Journal of the American Dental Association shows that evidence of adverse health effects from fluoride was censored by the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) --considered the most powerful of Cold War agencies-for reasons of national security. * The bomb program's fluoride safety studies were conducted at the University of Rochester, site of one of the most notorious human radiation experiments of the Cold War, in which unsuspecting hospital patients were injected with toxic doses of radioactive plutonium. The fluoride studies were conducted with the same ethical mind-set, in which "national security" was paramount. * The U.S. government's conflict of interest--and its motive to prove fluoride "safe" -- has not until now been made clear to the general public in the furious debate over water fluoridation since the 1950's, nor to civilian researchers and health professionals, or journalists. The declassified documents resonate with a growing body of scientific evidence, and a chorus of questions, about the health effects of fluoride in the environment. Human exposure to fluoride has mushroomed since World War II, due not only to fluoridated water and toothpaste, but to environmental pollution by major industries from aluminum to pesticides: fluoride is a critical industrial chemical. The impact can be seen, literally, in the smiles of our children. Large numbers of U.S. young people--up to 80 percent in some cities--now have dental fluorosis, the first visible sign of excessive fluoride exposure, according to the U.S. National Research Council. (The signs are whitish flecks or spots, particularly on the front teeth, or dark spots or stripes in more severe cases.) Less-known to the public is that fluoride also accumulates in bones --"The teeth are windows to what's happening in the bones," explains Paul Connett, Professor of Chemistry at St. Lawrence University (N.Y.). In recent years, pediatric bone specialists have expressed alarm about an increase in stress fractures among U.S. young people. Connett and other scientists are concerned that fluoride --linked to bone damage by studies since the 1930's-- may

be a contributing factor. The declassified documents add urgency: much of the original proof that low-dose fluoride is safe for children's bones came from U.S. bomb program scientists, according to this investigation. Now, researchers who have reviewed these declassified documents fear that Cold War national security considerations may have prevented objective scientific evaluation of vital public health questions concerning fluoride. "Information was buried," concludes Dr. Phyllis Mullenix, former head of toxicology at Forsyth Dental Center in Boston, and now a critic of fluoridation. Animal studies Mullenix and co-workers conducted at Forsyth in the early 1990's indicated that fluoride was a powerful central nervous system (CNS) toxin, and might adversely affect human brain functioning, even at low doses. (New epidemiological evidence from China adds support, showing a correlation between low-dose fluoride exposure and diminished I.Q. in children.) Mullenix's results were published in 1995, in a reputable peer-reviewed scientific journal. During her investigation, Mullenix was astonished to discover there had been virtually no previous U.S. studies of fluoride's effects on the human brain. Then, her application for a grant to continue her CNS research was turned down by the U.S. National Institutes of Health (NIH), where an NIH panel, she says, flatly told her that "fluoride does not have central nervous system effects." Declassified documents of the U.S. atomic-bomb program indicate otherwise. An April 29, 1944 Manhattan Project memo reports: "Clinical evidence suggests that uranium hexafluoride may have a rather marked central nervous system effect.... It seems most likely that the F [code for fluoride] component rather than the T [code for uranium] is the causative factor." The memo --stamped "secret"-- is addressed to the head of the Manhattan Project's Medical Section, Colonel Stafford Warren. Colonel Warren is asked to approve a program of animal research on CNS effects: "Since work with these compounds is essential, it will be necessary to know in advance what mental effects may occur after exposure...This is important not only to protect a given individual, but also to prevent a confused workman from injuring others by improperly performing his duties." On the same day, Colonel Warren approved the CNS research program. This was in 1944, at the height of the Second World War and the nation's race to build the world's first atomic bomb. For research on fluoride's CNS effects to be approved at such a momentous time, the supporting evidence set forth in the proposal forwarded along with the memo must have been persuasive. The proposal, however, is missing from the files of the U.S. National Archives. "If you find the memos, but the document they refer to is missing, its probably still classified," said Charles Reeves, chief librarian at the Atlanta branch of the U.S. National Archives and Records Administration, where the memos were found. Similarly, no results of the Manhattan Project's fluoride CNS research could be found in the files. After reviewing the memos, Mullenix declared herself "flabbergasted." She went on, "How could I be told by NIH that fluoride has no central nervous system effects when these documents were sitting there all the time?" She reasons that the Manhattan Project did do fluoride CNS studies --"that kind of warning, that fluoride workers might be a danger to the bomb program by improperly performing their duties--I can't imagine that would be ignored"-- but that the results were buried because they might create a difficult legal and public relations problem for the government. The author of the 1944 CNS research proposal was Dr. Harold C. Hodge, at the time chief of fluoride toxicology studies for the University of Rochester division of the Manhattan Project. Nearly fifty years later at the Forsyth

Dental Center in Boston, Dr. Mullenix was introduced to a gently ambling elderly man brought in to serve as a consultant on her CNS research--Harold C. Hodge. By then Hodge had achieved status emeritus as a world authority on fluoride safety. "But even though he was supposed to be helping me," says Mullenix, "he never once mentioned the CNS work he had done for the Manhattan Project." The "black hole" in fluoride CNS research since the days of the Manhattan Project is unacceptable to Mullenix, who refuses to abandon the issue. "There is so much fluoride exposure now, and we simply do not know what it is doing," she says. "You can't just walk away from this." Dr. Antonio Noronha, an NIH scientific review advisor familiar with Dr. Mullenix's grant request, says her proposal was rejected by a scientific peer-review group. He terms her claim of institutional bias against fluoride CNS research "farfetched." He adds, "We strive very hard at NIH to make sure politics does not enter the picture." Fluoride and National Security The documentary trail begins at the height of WW2, in 1944, when a severe pollution incident occurred downwind of the E.I. du Pont du Nemours Company chemical factory in Deepwater, New Jersey. The factory was then producing millions of pounds of fluoride for the Manhattan project, the ultra-secret U.S. military program racing to produce the world's first atomic bomb. The farms downwind in Gloucester and Salem counties were famous for their high-quality produce -- their peaches went directly to the Waldorf Astoria Hotel in New York. Their tomatoes were bought up by Campbell's Soup. But in the summer of 1943, the farmers began to report that their crops were blighted, and that "something is burning up the peach crops around here." Poultry died after an all-night thunderstorm, they reported. Farm workers who ate the produce they had picked sometimes vomited all night and into the next day. "I remember our horses looked sick and were too stiff to work," these reporters were told by Mildred Giordano, who was a teenager at the time. Some cows were so crippled they could not stand up, and grazed by crawling on their bellies. The account was confirmed in taped interviews, shortly before he died, with Philip Sadtler of Sadtler Laboratories of Philadelphia, one of the nation's oldest chemical consulting firms. Sadtler had personally conducted the initial investigation of the damage. Although the farmers did not know it, the attention of the Manhattan Project and the federal government was riveted on the New Jersey incident, according to once-secret documents obtained by these reporters. After the war's end, in a secret Manhattan Project memo dated March 1, 1946, the Project's chief of fluoride toxicology studies, Harold C. Hodge, worriedly wrote to his boss Colonel Stafford L. Warren, Chief of the Medical Division, about "problems associated with the question of fluoride contamination of the atmosphere in a certain section of New Jersey. There seem to be four distinct (though related) problems," continued Hodge; 1. A question of injury of the peach crop in 1944. 2. A report of extraordinary fluoride content of vegetables grown in this area. 3. A report of abnormally high fluoride content in the blood of human individuals residing in this area. 4. A report raising the question of serious poisoning of horses and cattle in this area.

The New Jersey farmers waited until the war was over, then sued du Pont and the Manhattan Project for fluoride damage -- reportedly the first lawsuits against the U.S. A-bomb program. Although seemingly trivial, the lawsuits shook the government, the secret documents reveal. Under the personal direction of Manhattan Project chief Major General Leslie R.Groves, secret meetings were convened in Washington, with compulsory attendance by scores of scientists and officials from the U.S War Department, the Manhattan Project, the Food and Drug Administration, the Agriculture and Justice Departments, the U.S Army's Chemical Warfare Service and Edgewood Arsenal, the Bureau of Standards, and du Pont lawyers. Declassified memos of the meetings reveal a secret mobilization of the full forces of the government to defeat the New Jersey farmers: These agencies "are making scientific investigations to obtain evidence which may be used to protect the interest of the Government at the trial of the suits brought by owners of peach orchards in ... New Jersey," stated Manhattan Project Lieutenant Colonel Cooper B. Rhodes, in a memo c.c.'d to General Groves. 27 August 1945 Subject: Investigation of Crop Damage at Lower Penns Neck, New Jersey To: The Commanding General, Army Service Forces, Pentagon Building, Washington D.C. "At the request of the Secretary of War the Department of Agriculture has agreed to cooperate in investigating complaints of crop damage attributed... to fumes from a plant operated in connection with the Manhattan Project." Signed, L.R. Groves, Major General U.S. "The Department of Justice is cooperating in the defense of these suits," wrote General Groves in a Feb. 28, 1946 memo to the Chairman of the U.S. Senate Special Committee on Atomic Energy. Why the national-security emergency over a few lawsuits by New Jersey farmers? In 1946 the United States had begun full-scale production of atomic bombs. No other nation had yet tested a nuclear weapon, and the A-bomb was seen as crucial for U.S leadership of the postwar world. The New Jersey fluoride lawsuits were a serious roadblock to that strategy. "The specter of endless lawsuits haunted the military," writes Lansing Lamont in his acclaimed book about the first atomic bomb test, "Day of Trinity." In the case of fluoride, "If the farmers won, it would open the door to further suits, which might impede the bomb program's ability to use fluoride," said Jacqueline Kittrell, a Tennessee public interest lawyer specializing in nuclear cases, who examined the declassified fluoride documents. (Kittrell has represented plaintiffs in several human radiation experiment cases.) She added, "The reports of human injury were especially threatening, because of the potential for enormous settlements -- not to mention the PR problem." Indeed, du Pont was particularly concerned about the "possible psychologic reaction" to the New Jersey pollution incident, according to a secret 1946 Manhattan Project memo. Facing a threat from the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to embargo the region's produce because of "high fluoride content," du Pont dispatched its lawyers to the FDA offices in Washington, where an agitated meeting ensued. According to a memo sent next day to General Groves, Du Pont's lawyer argued "that in view of the pending suits...any action by the Food and Drug Administration... would have a serious effect on the du Pont Company and would create a bad public relations situation." After the meeting adjourned, Manhattan Project Captain John Davies approached the FDA's Food

Division chief and "impressed upon Dr. White the substantial interest which the Government had in claims which might arise as a result of action which might be taken by the Food and Drug Administration." There was no embargo. Instead, new tests for fluoride in the New Jersey area would be conducted -- not by the Department of Agriculture -- but by the U.S. Army's Chemical Warfare Service because "work done by the Chemical Warfare Service would carry the greatest weight as evidence if... lawsuits are started by the complainants." The memo was signed by General Groves. Meanwhile, the public relations problem remained unresolved -- local citizens were in a panic about fluoride. The farmer's spokesman, Willard B. Kille, was personally invited to dine with General Groves --then known as "the man who built the atomic bomb" -- at his office at the War Department on March 26, 1946. Although he had been diagnosed with fluoride poisoning by his doctor, Kille departed the luncheon convinced of the government's good faith. The next day he wrote to the general, wishing the other farmers could have been present, he said, so "they too could come away with the feeling that their interests in this particular matter were being safeguarded by men of the very highest type whose integrity they could not question." In a subsequent secret Manhattan project memo, a broader solution to the public relations problem was suggested by chief fluoride toxicologist Harold C. Hodge. He wrote to the Medical Section chief, Col. Warren: "Would there be any use in making attempts to counteract the local fear of fluoride on the part of residents of Salem and Gloucester counties through lectures on F toxicology and perhaps the usefulness of F in tooth health?" Such lectures were indeed given, not only to New Jersey citizens but to the rest of the nation throughout the Cold War. The New Jersey farmers' lawsuits were ultimately stymied by the government's refusal to reveal the key piece of information that would have settled the case --how much fluoride du Pont had vented into the atmosphere during the war. "Disclosure... would be injurious to the military security of the United States," wrote Manhattan Project Major C.A Taney, Jr. The farmers were pacified with token financial settlements, according to interviews with descendants still living in the area. "All we knew is that du Pont released some chemical that burned up all the peach trees around here," recalls Angelo Giordano, whose father James was one of the original plaintiffs. "The trees were no good after that, so we had to give up on the peaches." Their horses and cows, too, acted stiff and walked stiff, recalls his sister Mildred. "Could any of that have been the fluoride ?" she asked. (The symptoms she detailed to the authors are cardinal signs of fluoride toxicity, according to veterinary toxicologists.) The Giordano family, too, has been plagued by bone and joint problems, Mildred adds. Recalling the settlement received by the Giordanos, Angelo told these reporters that "my father said he got about $200." The farmers were stonewalled in their search for information, and their complaints have long since been forgotten. But they unknowingly left their imprint on history -- their claims of injury to their health reverberated through the corridors of power in Washington, and triggered intensive secret bomb-program research on the health effects of fluoride. A secret 1945 memo from Manhattan Project Lt. Col. Rhodes to General Groves stated: "Because of complaints that animals and humans have been injured by hydrogen fluoride fumes in [the New Jersey] area, although there are no pending suits involving such claims, the University of Rochester is conducting experiments to determine the toxic effect of fluoride." Much of the proof of fluoride's safety in low doses rests on the postwar work performed by the University of Rochester, in anticipation of lawsuits against the bomb program for human injury. Fluoride and the Cold War.

Delegating fluoride safety studies to the University of Rochester was not surprising. During WWII the federal government had become involved, for the first time, in large-scale funding of scientific research at governmentowned labs and private colleges. Those early spending priorities were shaped by the nation's often-secret military needs. The prestigious upstate New York college, in particular, had housed a key wartime division of the Manhattan Project, studying the health effects of the new "special materials," such as uranium, plutonium, beryllium and fluoride, being used to make the atomic bomb. That work continued after the war, with millions of dollars flowing from the Manhattan Project and its successor organization, the Atomic Energy Commission (AEC). (Indeed, the bomb left an indelible imprint on all U.S. science in the late 1940's and 50's. Up to 90% of federal funds for university research came from either the Defense Department or the AEC in this period, according to Noam Chomsky's 1996 book "The Cold War and the University.") The University of Rochester medical school became a revolving door for senior bomb program scientists. Postwar faculty included Stafford Warren, the top medical officer of the Manhattan Project, and Harold Hodge, chief of fluoride research for the bomb program. But this marriage of military secrecy and medical science bore deformed offspring. The University of Rochester's classified fluoride studies -- code- named Program F -- were conducted at its Atomic Energy Project (AEP), a topsecret facility funded by the AEC and housed in Strong Memorial Hospital. It was there that one of the most notorious human radiation experiments of the Cold War took place, in which unsuspecting hospital patients were injected with toxic doses of radioactive plutonium. Revelation of this experiment in a Pulitzer prize-winning account by Eileen Welsome led to a 1995 U.S. Presidential investigation, and a multimillion-dollar cash settlement for victims. Program F was not about children's teeth. It grew directly out of litigation against the bomb program and its main purpose was to furnish scientific ammunition which the government and its nuclear contractors could use to defeat lawsuits for human injury. Program F's director was none other than Harold C. Hodge, who had led the Manhattan Project investigation of alleged human injury in the New Jersey fluoride-pollution incident. Program F's purpose is spelled out in a classified 1948 report. It reads: "To supply evidence useful in the litigation arising from an alleged loss of a fruit crop several years ago, a number of problems have been opened. Since excessive blood fluoride levels were reported in human residents of the same area, our principal effort has been devoted to describing the relationship of blood fluorides to toxic effects." The litigation referred to, of course, and the claims of human injury were against the bomb program and its contractors. Thus, the purpose of Program F was to obtain evidence useful in litigation against the bomb program. The research was being conducted by the defendants. The potential conflict of interest is clear. If lower dose ranges were found hazardous by Program F, it might have opened the bomb program and its contractors to lawsuits for injury to human health, as well as public outcry. Comments lawyer Kittrell: "This and other documents indicate that the University of Rochester's fluoride research grew out of the New Jersey lawsuits and was performed in anticipation of lawsuits against the bomb program for human injury. Studies undertaken for litigation purposes by the defendants would not be considered scientifically acceptable today, " adds Kittrell, "because of their inherent bias to prove the chemical safe." Unfortunately, much of the proof of fluoride's safety rests on the work performed by Program F Scientists at the University of Rochester. During the postwar period that university emerged as the leading academic center for

establishing the safety of fluoride, as well as its effectiveness in reducing tooth decay, according to Dental School spokesperson William H. Bowen, MD. The key figure in this research, Bowen said, was Harold C. Hodge-- who also became a leading national proponent of fluoridating public drinking water. Program F's interest in water fluoridation was not just 'to counteract the local fear of fluoride on the part of residents,' as Hodge had earlier written. The bomb program needed human studies, as they had needed human studies for plutonium, and adding fluoride to public water supplies provided one opportunity. The A-Bomb Program and Water Fluoridation Bomb-program scientists played a prominent -- if unpublicized -- role in the nation's first-planned water fluoridation experiment, in Newburgh, New York. The Newburgh Demonstration Project is considered the most extensive study of the health effects of fluoridation, supplying much of the evidence that low doses are safe for children's bones, and good for their teeth. Planning began in 1943 with the appointment of a special New York State Health Department committee to study the advisability of adding fluoride to Newburgh's drinking water. The chairman of the committee was Dr. Hodge, then chief of fluoride toxicity studies for the Manhattan Project. Subsequent members included Henry L. Barnett, a captain in the Project's Medical section, and John W. Fertig, in 1944 with the office of Scientific Research and Development, the Pentagon group which sired the Manhattan Project. Their military affiliations were kept secret: Hodge was described as a pharmacologist, Barnett as a pediatrician. Placed in charge of the Newburgh project was David B. Ast, chief dental officer of the State Health Department. Ast had participated in a key secret wartime conference on fluoride held by the Manhattan Project, and later worked with Dr. Hodge on the Project's investigation of human injury in the New Jersey incident, according to once-secret memos. The committee recommended that Newburgh be fluoridated. It also selected the types of medical studies to be done, and "provided expert guidance" for the duration of the experiment. The key question to be answered was: "Are there any cumulative effects -- beneficial or otherwise, on tissues and organs other than the teeth -- of longcontinued ingestion of such small concentrations...?" According to the declassified documents, this was also key information sought by the bomb program, which would require long-continued exposure of workers and communities to fluoride throughout the Cold War. In May 1945, Newburgh's water was fluoridated, and over the next ten years its residents were studied by the State Health Department. In tandem, Program F conducted its own secret studies, focusing on the amounts of fluoride Newburgh citizens retained in their blood and tissues - key information sought by the bomb program: "Possible toxic effects of fluoride were in the forefront of consideration," the advisory committee stated. Health Department personnel cooperated, shipping blood and placenta samples to the Program F team at the University of Rochester. The samples were collected by Dr. David B. Overton, the Department's chief of pediatric studies at Newburgh. The final report of the Newburgh Demonstration Project, published in 1956 in the Journal of the American Dental Association, concluded that "small concentrations" of fluoride were safe for U.S.citizens. The biological proof -"based on work performed ... at the University of Rochester Atomic Energy Project" -- was delivered by Dr. Hodge. Today, news that scientists from the atomic bomb program secretly shaped and guided the Newburgh fluoridation experiment, and studied the citizen's blood and tissue samples, is greeted with incredulity.

"I'm shocked -- beyond words," said present-day Newburgh Mayor Audrey Carey, commenting on these reporters' findings. "It reminds me of the Tuskegee experiment that was done on syphilis patients down in Alabama." As a child in the early 1950's, Mayor Carey was taken to the old firehouse on Broadway in Newburgh, which housed the Public Health Clinic. There, doctors from the Newburgh fluoridation project studied her teeth, and a peculiar fusion of two finger bones on her left hand she had been born with. Today, adds Carey, her granddaughter has white dental-fluorosis marks on her front teeth. Mayor Carey wants answers from the government about the secret history of fluoride, and the Newburgh fluoridation experiment. "I absolutely want to pursue it," she said. "It is appalling to do any kind of experimentation and study without people's knowledge and permission." Contacted by these reporters, the director of the Newburgh experiment, David B. Ast, says he was unaware Manhattan Project scientists were involved. "If I had known, I would have been certainly investigating why, and what the connection was," he said. Did he know that blood and placenta samples from Newburgh were being sent to bomb program researchers at the University of Rochester? "I was not aware of it," Ast replied. Did he recall participating in the Manhattan Project's secret wartime conference on fluoride in January 1944, or going to New Jersey with Dr. Hodge to investigate human injury in the du Pont case--as secret memos state? He told the reporters he had no recollection of these events. A spokesperson for the University of Rochester Medical Center, Bob Loeb, confirmed that blood and tissue samples from Newburgh had been tested by the University's Dr. Hodge. On the ethics of secretly studying U.S citizens to obtain information useful in litigation against the A-bomb program, he said, "that's a question we cannot answer." He referred inquiries to the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), successor to the Atomic Energy Commission. A spokesperson for the DOE in Washington, Jayne Brady, confirmed that a review of DOE files indicated that a "significant reason" for fluoride experiments conducted at the University of Rochester after the war was "impending litigation between the du Pont company and residents of New Jersey areas." However, she added, "DOE has found no documents to indicate that fluoride research was done to protect the Manhattan Project or its contractors from lawsuits." On Manhattan Project involvement in Newburgh, the spokesperson stated, "Nothing that we have suggests that the DOE or predecessor agencies -- especially the Manhattan Project -- authorized fluoride experiments to be performed on children in the 1940's." When told that the reporters had several documents that directly tied the Manhattan Project's successor agency at the University of Rochester, the AEP, to the Newburgh experiment, the DOE spokesperson later conceded her study was confined to "the available universe" of documents. Two days later spokesperson Jayne Brady faxed a statement for clarification: "My search only involved the documents that we collected as part of our human radiation experiments project -- fluoride was not part of our research effort. "Most significantly," the statement continued, relevant documents may be in a classified collection at the DOE Oak Ridge National Laboratory known as the Records Holding Task Group. "This collection consists entirely of classified documents removed from other files for the purpose of classified document accountability many years ago," and was "a rich source of documents for the human radiation experiments project," she said.

The crucial question arising from this investigation is: Were adverse health findings from Newburgh and other bomb-program fluoride studies suppressed? All AEC-funded studies had to be declassified before publication in civilian medical and dental journals. Where are the original classified versions? The transcript of one of the major secret scientific conferences of WW2--on "fluoride metabolism"--is missing from the files of the U.S. National Archives. Participants in the conference included key figures who promoted the safety of fluoride and water fluoridation to the public after the war - Harold Hodge of the Manhattan Project, David B. Ast of the Newburgh Project, and U.S. Public Health Service dentist H.Trendley Dean, popularly known as the "father of fluoridation." "If it is missing from the files, it is probably still classified," National Archives librarians told these reporters. A 1944 WW2 Manhattan Project classified report on water fluoridation is missing from the files of the University of Rochester Atomic Energy Project, the U.S. National Archives, and the Nuclear Repository at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville. The next four numerically consecutive documents are also missing, while the remainder of the "MP-1500 series" is present. "Either those documents are still classified, or they've been 'disappeared' by the government," says Clifford Honicker, Executive Director of the American Environmental Health Studies Project, in Knoxville, Tennessee, which provided key evidence in the public exposure and prosecution of U.S. human radiation experiments. Seven pages have been cut out of a 1947 Rochester bomb-project notebook entitled "Du Pont litigation." "Most unusual," commented chief medical school archivist Chris Hoolihan. Similarly, Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) requests by these authors over a year ago with the DOE for hundreds of classified fluoride reports have failed to dislodge any. "We're behind," explained Amy Rothrock, FOIA officer for the Department of Energy at their Oak Ridge operations. Was information suppressed? These reporters made what appears to be the first discovery of the original classified version of a fluoride safety study by bomb program scientists. A censored version of this study was later published in the August 1948 Journal of the American Dental Association. Comparison of the secret with the published version indicates that the U.S. AEC did censor damaging information on fluoride, to the point of tragicomedy. This was a study of the dental and physical health of workers in a factory producing fluoride for the A-bomb program, conducted by a team of dentists from the Manhattan Project. * The secret version reports that most of the men had no teeth left. The published version reports only that the men had fewer cavities. * The secret version says the men had to wear rubber boots because the fluoride fumes disintegrated the nails in their shoes. The published version does not mention this. * The secret version says the fluoride may have acted similarly on the men's teeth, contributing to their toothlessness. The published version omits this statement. The published version concludes that "the men were unusually healthy, judged from both a medical and dental point of view." Asked for comment on the early links of the Manhattan Project to water fluoridation, Dr Harold Slavkin, Director of the National Institute for Dental Research, the U.S. agency which today funds fluoride research, said, "I wasn't aware of any input from the Atomic Energy Commission." Nevertheless, he insisted, fluoride's efficacy and safety

in the prevention of dental cavities over the last fifty years is well-proved. "The motivation of a scientist is often different from the outcome, " he reflected. "I do not hold a prejudice about where the knowledge comes from." After comparing the secret and published versions of the censored study, toxicologist Phyllis Mullenix commented, "This makes me ashamed to be a scientist." Of other Cold War-era fluoride safety studies, she asks, "Were they all done like this?" Archival research by Clifford Honicker About the authors : Joel Griffiths is a medical writer in New York City, author of a book on radiation hazards and numerous articles for medical and popular publications. Joel can be contacted at 212-662-6695. Chris Bryson holds a Masters degree from the Columbia University Graduate School of Journalism, and has worked for the British Broadcasting Corporation, The Manchester Guardian, The Christian Science Monitor and Public Television. Chris can be contacted at 212-665-3442. Waste Not # 414 Published 48 times a year. Annual rates: Groups & Non-Profits $50; Individuals $40; Students & Seniors $35; Consultants & ForProfits $125; Canadian $US45; Overseas $65. Editors: Ellen & Paul Connett, 82 Judson Street, Canton NY 13617. Tel: 315-379-9200. Fax: 315-3790448. Email:

Fluoride Action Network | 802-338-5577 |

Watch Endgame – Blueprint for Global Enslavement:

Posted: 2010/07/08

Concerned researchers have tried to warn the public for decades that depopulation plans were indeed happening in stealth. By Eric Blair, June 21, (activistpost) -- There has been much in the mainstream news recently about population control. In fact, there seems to be a concerted effort by the Elite to introduce the idea as a legitimate debate about dealing with the ― problem‖ of over-population. It appears the elite are trying to legitimize these claims using the global warming argument that CO2, which humans exhale, must be minimized at all costs. Understandably, the notion that a small group of powerful people is consciously and methodically trying to kill off the majority of the population is a tough pill to swallow. Incidentally, people who refuse to question the events of September 11th usually do so for one reason: they don‘t want to believe that the conspirators would kill over 3000 innocent people to advance their agenda. However, what has taken place in the aftermath of 9/11 seems to prove the true nature of the Elite in regards to how little they value human life. For instance, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) knowingly lied about the air quality at ground zero, which has caused countless more illnesses and deaths among brave first responders, much like the EPA is now lying about the air quality surrounding the Gulf oil spill. Additionally, the attack on 9/11 spurred America‘s preemptive, unprovoked, unsubstantiated wars for profit and resources in Iraq and Afghanistan where an estimated 1.5 million innocent people have been killed. Concerned researchers have tried to warn the public for decades that depopulation plans were indeed happening in stealth, quoting members of the ruling class like Rockefeller and others who clearly had motivation to implement them. "If I were reincarnated I would wish to be returned to earth as a killer virus to lower human population levels." -Prince Phillip, Duke of Edinburgh, leader of the World Wildlife Fund, quoted in "Are You Ready For Our New Age Future?" Insiders Report, American Policy Center, December, 1995.

Or, more recently, Ted Turner, CNN founder and UN supporter told PBS‘s Charlie Rose in April, 2008, ― We‘re too many people; that‘s why we have global warming . . . too many people are using too much stuff.‖ Couple this with his June, 1996 statement well before the general public was aware of ― global warming‖ in the McAlvany Intelligence Advisor, ― A total population of 250-300 million people, a 95% decline from present levels, would be ideal." In the third world, Turner has contributed billions to population reduction, through United Nations programs, paving the way for others like of Bill and Melinda Gates, and Warren Buffett. These same figures have also donated vast sums of money to Planned Parenthood and vaccination programs that many have identified as methods of population control. Now that the public is becoming more aware of the malevolent nature of the Elite, it is becoming easier to believe the evidence of their sinister ― population control‖ plans. These ingenious techniques include poisoning the food, water, air, and drugs as identified in Paul Ehrlich‘s 1968 book The Population Bomb, ― One plan often mentioned involves the addition of temporary sterilants to water supplies or staple food. Doses of the antidote would be carefully rationed by the government to produce the desired population size (p.130-131).‖ The Elite‘s previously secret ― soft kill‖ methods have been in place for decades and are now verifiable by the general public. 1. Food: GMO (genetically modified organisms) foods that represent around 75% of the American diet, especially non-reproductive ― terminator seeds," have proven to cause mass sterilization within only three generations. 2. Water: For decades privately-owned ― public‖ water systems have been chlorinated and fluoridated along with other dangerous chemicals used to dumb us down and sterilize our children. 3. Air: In addition to industry-based air pollution that has caused increased cases of asthma, the air is being strategically poisoned through Chemtrail disbursements of dangerous elements like Aluminum. (Coincidentally, Monsanto has designed aluminum-resistant seeds) 4. Drugs: The Elite are drug pushers, using Big Pharma (and illegal drugs) to pacify the mind and spirit of the public, while inducing diseases through tainted vaccinations, etc. After years of using humans as cannon fodder abroad and domestic soft kill methods mainly through sterilization programs, it now seems obvious that humans are nothing more than sheep for slaughter to feed the Elite. Behind each one of these methods, we find the same Elite multinational companies working in concert with elements of the government that are supposed to look out for the public‘s best interests like the EPA, FDA, and the DHS. Furthermore, we can expect the Elite to ramp up the mainstream population debate under the auspices of Climate Change as the Gulf oil disaster brings Cap and Trade legislation back to the forefront.

National Ocean Council By Cassandra Anderson Wednesday, 28 July 2010 20:50

Thirty states will be encroached upon by Obama's Executive Order establishing the National Ocean Council for control over America's oceans, coastlines and the Great Lakes. Under this new council, states' coastal jurisdictions will be subject to the United Nations' Law Of Sea Treaty (LOST) in this UN Agenda 21 program. America's oceans and coastlines will be broken into 9 regions that include the North East, Mid-Atlantic, South Atlantic, the Gulf Coast, West Coast, the Great Lakes, Alaska, the Pacific Islands (including Hawaii) and the Caribbean.

Get a copy of The Ultimate War: Globalism vs. America, presented at Freedom website.

Because of the decades of difficulty that the collectivists have had trying to ratify the Law Of Sea Treaty (LOST), Obama is sneaking it in through the back door, by way of this Executive Order establishing the Council. Because LOST is a treaty, Obama's Executive Order is not Constitutional as treaty ratification requires 2/3 approval from the Senate. Michael Shaw said that the Agenda 21 Convention on Biodiversity treaty of 1992 failed to pass Congress so it was executed through soft law and administratively on local levels, and Obama's Executive Order is a similar soft law tactic to enact the LOST treaty. In fact, our Constitutional form of government is being completely destroyed because buried in the CLEAR Act (HR 3534) there is a provision for a new council to oversee the outer continental shelf - it appears that this Regional Outer Shelf Council will be part of the National Ocean Council. This means that if Congress makes the CLEAR Act into law, then the implementation of the UN Law Of Sea Treaty, as part of the National Ocean Council's agenda, will be "ratified" in a convoluted and stealth manner, in full opposition to the Constitution and its intent. The excuse for this extreme action is because of the emergency in the Gulf of Mexico. Obama and

Congress have always had the legal and military power to force BP Oil to take all necessary action to stop the gusher and clean the oil spew. While there is evidence that the problems in the Gulf have been a result of collusion and planned incompetence, it begs the question; why in world should America's oceans and resources be controlled by Obama appointees? NATIONAL OCEAN COUNCIL MEMBERS: John Holdren, Obama's science and technology advisor, is the co-chairman of this new council. He is also a depopulation enthusiast and advocates sterilization by way of using infertility drugs in water and food as well as forced abortions which he describes in his book "Ecoscience". Ken Salazar, Secretary of the Department of Interior, and its subagency, MMS (Minerals Management Service) has authority over offshore drilling and responsibility for enforcing spill prevention measures. The Department of Interior's BLM (Bureau of Land Management) is the entity that controls federally managed land extending across 30% of America in 11 western states. Last week, Congressman Louie Gohmert said that Ken Salazar personally prevented drilling on land in Utah, Wyoming and Colorado, thereby also preventing energy independence. In addition, the federal lands have been grossly mismanaged and present fire dangers. The federal government is $3.7 billion in arrears for maintenance of the federally managed lands. US Department of Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack, by way of the US Forestry Service and US Fish & Wildlife Service, has been complicit in the decline of our country's food independence. For example, US Fish & Wildlife (along with the Department of Commerce) shut the water off in California using Endangered Species Act; it was later proven that partially treated sewage was the primary culprit in killing the salmon and delta smelt that was previously blamed on farmers. This is phony environmentalism. The US Forestry Service has also misused the Endangered Species Act to limit farmers and ranchers. Remember that the USDA co-owns the Terminator Gene patent with Monsanto that makes seeds sterile. Lisa Jackson is the EPA administrator who has threatened to impose 18,000 pages of new regulations to curb global warming which is based on lies, claiming that carbon dioxide is a danger to human health. Department of Defense Secretary Robert Gates and Department of Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitano: it is unclear how these two federal appointees will enhance environmental 'sustainability' over oceans and coasts. Traditionally, national security threats (like the War on Terror) have been used by the federal government to take control of resources. For example, many years ago when the interstate highway systems were first being built, the Feds got in on the action by claiming that they were building a defense highway system, and they encroached into an area that belonged to the states. Interestingly, there were no overhead structures on highways originally because of the Feds' claim that large missiles would be transported on these "defense" highway systems.

Secretary of State Hilary Clinton, a leading globalist, is likely to plunge our country into international entanglements and subjugation, based on her past performance; an example is her support of the UN Small Arms Treaty, which is contrary to the Constitution. Department of Energy Secretary Steven Chu and Department of Commerce Secretary Gary Locke are logical choices for this destructive council as some of the planned funding for this program will come from permits and leases (oil drilling leases, for example). These agencies will limit America's energy independence. Click here to see the full list of the 24 member council. THE SMOKING GUN: Agenda 21 Sustainable Development is the overarching blueprint for depopulation and total control, and the National Ocean Council is clearly an Agenda 21 program: The National Ocean Council is headed by John Holdren, an avowed eugenicist which is selective breeding through brutal means like forced abortion. The National Ocean Council's own report (Coastal and Marine Spatial Planning, pg. 8) incorporates a section of the 1992 Rio Declaration which is an original UN Agenda 21 document! In fact, the report says that it will be guided by the Rio Declaration in cases "Where there are threats of serious or irreversible damage, lack of full scientific certainty shall not be used as a reason for postponing cost-effective measures to prevent environmental degradation." (pg. 8) This means that regulations will be imposed even if the science is not understood or if the science is based on global warming manipulated data. The 3 primary tools of Agenda 21's phony environmentalism are global warming, water shortages and the Endangered Species Act; the National Ocean Council intends to exploit all of these tools to their full extent. The National Ocean Council's main objective is to sink American sovereignty through the United Nations Law Of Sea Treaty (LOST) with the intended result of domination by the UN over our coasts and the Great Lakes. LOST originated in the 1970s as a wealth redistribution plan to benefit Third World countries. LOST sets rules for commercial activity beneath the high seas and establishes new international bureaucracies and a tribunal to interpret and apply rules to sea activity. And LOST can proceed with those rules, even against US objections! LOST threatens to complicate deep sea mining. LOST sets a precedent that US rights are dependent upon the approval of international entities. LOST also extends to ocean flowing rivers.

REGIONALISM: Michael Shaw pointed out that non-elected councils are increasingly expanding their jurisdiction through air quality boards, water quality boards, sewer systems, transportation districts, metropolitan planning, etc. to gain control over resources. Often, large corporations and financial interests form Public-Private Partnerships with the government within these councils. Breaking areas into regions and placing authority with non-elected councils is a Communist trick used to hijack resources, thereby usurping local and state power by re-zoning the areas that do have Constitutional authority. Appointed bureaucrats are untouchable because their jobs are not dependent upon serving the voting population. And they are usually inaccessible to the public and do not have to face those who are affected by their "insider" decisions. When state and local governments become corrupt, the public is able to confront them eye to eye, but distant bureaucrats can avoid accountability. Regionalism is used as a psychological tactic to intimidate state legislatures into creating the system for a new political and economic order. Obama's Executive Order that has created the 9 new regions amounts to re-zoning, and his appointed bureaucrats are answerable only to him. In David Horton's testimony in 1978 on regionalism, he said that the State of Indiana made this declaration, "Neither the states nor Congress have ever granted authority to any branch or agency of the federal government to exercise regional control over the states." Horton further stated that Congress holds all legislative power that is granted in the Constitution, as opposed to Executive Orders that are not legislative. Therefore, Obama's Executive Order for re-zoning and appointing a governing body to usurp state and local power is Constitutionally invalid. The public must become aware of state sovereignty and the Tenth Amendment to demand that state and local governments assert these Constitutional laws and principles. COASTAL AND MARINE SPATIAL PLANNING REPORT: This is a general overview of the new National Ocean Council's goals based on its 32-page report that uses indirect language and acronyms in order to confuse the public and local lawmakers. Depopulation advocates, globalists and collectivists, like John Holdren, faced opposition a few decades ago when they clearly expressed their objectives, so now documents are written in complicated and clouded language to

fool those they wish to control. This report states that the Council's jurisdiction will extend from the continental shelf to the coast AND additional inland areas will be involved. The National Ocean Council identifies "partners" as members of each regional planning body that will include federal, state, local and tribal authorities, with a top-down hierarchy of control. The intentions of the Council are stated on page 8 of the report that include implementing LOST and other international treaties. The report also states that the Council's plans shall be implemented by Executive Orders, in addition to federal and state laws. This section mentions 'global climate change' which is a new term used as a substitute for 'man made global warming' after manipulated data and lies were exposed in numerous global warming scandals. 'Climate change' is blamed for sea level rise and acidification of oceans; evidence exists that these are more global warming deceptions. The stated goals of the Council include regulating investments, collaborating with unidentified international agencies, controlling public access to oceans and "protecting" ecosystems. This means that commerce and trade will be controlled by the Council, the UN will gain power over American oceans and the Great Lakes through UN sub-agencies, public access will be limited and the Endangered Species Act will be unleashed, with heavy regulations. Incidentally, the Endangered Species Act is based on 5 international treaties. It has never had a successful result: of the 60 species that have been de-listed, not a single species was saved as a result of any restrictions stemming from the Endangered Species Act! The targeted areas for Endangered Species Act regulations are the the Great Lakes, the Gulf Coast, Chesapeake Bay, Puget Sound, South Florida and the San Francisco Bay (the Bay Delta is where the irrigation water for farmers was was cut off using the Endangered Species Act, causing food shortages, an increase in food imports and massive economic devastation). While this report does not clearly outline how the National Ocean Council's schemes will be financed, regulatory permits for all activity on the water and mining (oil) leases will play a part, along with tax increases. The report does indicate that grants and assistance programs will be available so that state, local and tribal authorities will support the Council's "efforts". In other words, the Council will try to buy off the state and local governments to "collectively use" them for a base of support and influence. (pg. 28) Strings are always attached to federal money. The federal government and the Council are reliant on state and local governments for implementation through state and local legal authority, which means that state and local authorities hold the power to implement or refuse the Council's directives, especially under the Tenth Amendment. However, the report does state that disputes will be settled by consensus, if consensus fails, then the decisions will ultimately be made by the President. He is Commander in Chief of the Navy and has the power of the military behind him. Further, the report indicates that legislative changes and more Executive

Orders may be necessary to achieve control. An important point is made on page 5, which states, "Strong partnerships among Federal, State, tribal and local authorities, and regional governance structures would be essential to a truly forward-looking, comprehensive CMSP effort." This means that the states, local governments and tribes have power. Our collectivist government needs the consent of the state, local and tribal authorities, to implement this scheme, otherwise, the feds wouldn't bother to include these Constitutional authorities. If the state, local and tribal authorities are aware of, and willing to act on their Constitutional authority, then they can limit this federal power grab through the Tenth Amendment. The report further states that signing onto the Council's plan would be an "express commitment by the partners to act in accordance with the plan...." (pg. 20) Therefore, it is imperative that all of the states be aware of the Council's intended usurpation and carefully protect their Constitutional jurisdictions and sovereignty. There are 30 states that will be affected by this new council. (pg. 12) The Council's strategy plan will go into effect immediately, fully developing Agenda 21 objectives and undue UN influence within 5 years. Interestingly, one article said that if state, local and tribal authorities choose not to participate in in writing the plans, the plans would be written without them. Therefore, it bears repeating that state and local governments must protect their Constitutional authority when dealing with the Council. The Constitutional authority that states and local governments have can only be taken if the power is given away. SAVING OUR COUNTRY: If your freedom is important to you, the most effective action that you can take is to e-mail this article and Michael Shaw's "Understanding Agenda 21 Sustainable Development" booklet to all of your State Legislators, County Commissioners/Superintendents and City Council members. Tell all of your friends, co-workers and neighbors about Agenda 21 Sustainable Development and how it is destroying our country. The National Ocean Council is detrimental on so many levels and the time to act is now. If state and local officials refuse to stand up against this federal incursion, they must be thrown out of office in favor of representatives who support the Constitution and the Tenth Amendment. Be sure to check back with on July 30th to watch a special video presentation about how a local official stood up against encroachment by the federal government.

Click: www.prisonplanet.TV

From Global Depression to Global Governance The role of the corporate elites’ secretive global think tanks Andrew Gavin Marshall Global Research October 19, 2010

We now stand at the edge of the global financial abyss of a „Great Global Debt Depression,‟ where nations, mired in extreme debt, are beginning to implement „fiscal austerity‟ measures to reduce their deficits, which will ultimately result in systematic global social genocide, as the middle classes vanish and the social foundations upon which our nations rest are swept away. How did we get here? Who brought us here? Where is this road leading? These are questions I will briefly attempt to answer. At the heart of the global political economy is the central banking system. Central banks are responsible for printing a nation‟s currency and setting interest rates, thus determining the value of the currency. This should no doubt be the prerogative of a national government, however, central banks are of a particularly deceptive nature, in which while being imbued with governmental authority, they are in fact privately owned by the world‟s major global banks, and are thus profit-seeking institutions. How do central banks make a profit? The answer is simple: how do all banks make a profit? Interest on debt. Loans are made, interest rates are set, and profits are made. It is a system of debt, imperial economics at its finest. In the United States, President Woodrow Wilson signed the Federal Reserve Act in 1913, creating the Federal Reserve System, with the Board located in Washington, appointed by the President, but where true power rested in the 12 regional banks, most notably among them, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The regional Fed banks were private banks, owned in shares by the major banks in each region, which elected the board members to represent them, and who would then share power with the Federal Reserve Board in Washington. In the early 1920s, the Council on Foreign Relations was formed in the United States as the premier foreign policy think tank, dominated by powerful banking interests. In 1930, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) was created to manage German reparations payments, but it also had another role, which was much less known, but much more significant. It was to act as a “coordinator of the operations of central banks around the world.”

Essentially, it is the central bank for the world‟s central banks, whose operations are kept „strictly confidential.‟ As historian Carroll Quigley wrote: “The powers of financial capitalism had another far-reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalist fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at in frequent private meetings and conferences. The apex of the system was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basel, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world’s central banks which were themselves private corporations.” In 1954, the Bilderberg Group was formed as a secretive global think tank, comprising intellectual, financial, corporate, political, military and media elites from Western Europe and North America, with prominent bankers such as David Rockefeller, as well as European royalty, such as the Dutch royal family, who are the largest shareholders in Royal Dutch Shell, whose CEO attends every meeting. This group of roughly 130 elites meets every year in secret to discuss and debate global affairs, and to set general goals and undertake broad agendas at various meetings. The group was initially formed to promote European integration. The 1956 meeting discussed European integration and a common currency. In fact, the current Chairman of the Bilderberg Group told European media last year that the euro was debated at the Bilderberg Group. In 1973, David Rockefeller, Chairman and CEO of Chase Manhattan Bank, Chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations and a member of the Steering Committee of the Bilderberg Group, formed the Trilateral Commission with CFR academic Zbigniew Brzezinski. That same year, the oil price shocks created a wealth of oil money, which was discussed at that years Bilderberg meeting 5 months prior to the oil shocks, and the money was funneled through western banks, which loaned it to „third world‟ nations desperately in need of loans to finance industrialization. When Jimmy Carter became President in 1977, he appointed over two dozen members of the Trilateral Commission into his cabinet, including himself, and of course, Zbigniew Brzezinski, who was his National Security Adviser. In 1979, Carter appointed David Rockefeller‟s former aide and friend, Paul Volcker, who had held various positions at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the U.S. Treasury Department, and who also happened to be a member of the Trilateral Commission, as Chairman of the Federal Reserve. When another oil shock took place in 1979, Volcker decided to raise interest rates from 2% in the late 70s, to 18% in the early 80s. The effect this had was that the countries of the developing world suddenly had to pay enormous interest on their loans, and in 1982, Mexico announced it could no longer afford to pay its interest, and it defaulted on its debt, which set off the 1980s debt crisis – collapsing nations in debt across Latin America, Africa and parts of Asia. It was the IMF and the World Bank came to the „assistance‟ of the Third World with their „structural adjustment programs‟, which forced countries seeking assistance to privatize all state owned industries and resources, devalue their currencies, liberalize their economies, dismantle health, education and social services; ultimately resulting in the re-colonization of the „Third World‟ as Western corporations and banks bought all their assets and resources, and ultimately created the conditions of social genocide, with the spread of mass poverty, and the emergence of corrupt national elites who were subservient to the interests of Western elites. The people in these nations would protest, riot and rebel, and the states would clamp down with the police and military. In the West, corporations and banks saw rapid, record-breaking profits. This was the era in which the term

„globalization‟ emerged. While profits soared, wages for people in the West did not. Thus, to consume in an economy in which prices were rising, people had to go into debt. This is why this era marked the rise of credit cards fueling consumption, and the middle class became a class based entirely on debt. In the 1990s, the „new world order‟ was born, with America ruling the global economy, free trade agreements began integrating regional and global markets for the benefit of global banks and corporations, and speculation dominated the economy. The global economic crisis arose as a result of decades of global imperialism – known recently as „globalization‟ – and the reckless growth of– speculation, derivatives and an explosion of debt. As the economic crisis spread, nations of the world, particularly the United States, bailed out the major banks (which should have been made to fail and crumble under their own corruption and greed), and now the West has essentially privatized profits for the banks, and socialized the risk. In other words, the nations bought the debt from the banks, and now the people have to pay for it. The people, however, are immersed in their own personal debt to such degrees that today, the average Canadian is $39,000 in debt, and students are graduating into a jobless market with tens to hundreds of thousands of dollars of student debt that they will never repay. Hence, we are now faced with a global debt crisis. To manage the economic crisis, the G20 was established as the major international forum for cooperation among the 20 major economies of the world, including the major developing – or emerging – economies, such as India, Brazil, South Africa and China. At the onset of the financial crisis, China and Russia‟s central banks began calling for the establishment of a global currency to replace the U.S. dollar as the world reserve currency. This proposal was backed by the UN and the IMF. It should be noted, however, that the Chinese and Russian central banks cooperate with the Western central banks through the Bank for International Settlements – which the President of the European Central Bank, Jean-Claude Trichet, recently said was the principle forum for “governance of central bank cooperation” and that the G20 is “the prime group for global economic governance.” In 2009, the IMF stated that the BIS “is the central and the oldest focal point for coordination of global governance arrangements.” The President of the European Union, appointed to the position after attending a Bilderberg meeting, declared 2009 as the “first year of global governance.” The 2009 Bilderberg meeting reported on the desire to create a global treasury, or global central bank, to manage the world economy. In 2009, prior to the Bilderberg meeting in fact, the G20 set in motion plans to make the IMF a global central bank of sorts, issuing and even printing its own currency – called Special Drawing Rights (SDRs) – which is valued against a basket of currencies. In May of 2010, the IMF Managing Director stated that “crisis is an opportunity,” and while Special Drawing Rights are a step in the right direction, ultimately what is needed is “a new global currency issued by a global central bank, with robust governance and institutional features.” Thus, we see the emergence of a process towards the formation of a global central bank and a global currency, totally unaccountable to any nation or people, and totally controlled by global banking interests. In 2010, Greece was plunged into a debt crisis, a crisis which is now spreading across Europe, to the U.K. and eventually to Japan and the United States. If we look at Greece, we see the nature of the global debt crisis. The debt is owed to major European and American banks. To pay the interest on the debt, Greece had to get a loan from the European Central Bank and the IMF, which forced the country to impose „fiscal austerity‟ measures as a condition for the loans, pressuring Greece to commit social genocide. Meanwhile, the major banks of America and Europe speculate against the Greek debt, further plunging the country into economic and social crisis. The loan is granted, to pay the interest, yet simply has the effect of adding to the overall debt, as a new loan is new debt. Thus, Greece is caught in the same debt trap that re-colonized the Third World.

At the recent G20 meeting in Toronto, the major nations of the world agreed to impose fiscal austerity – or in other words, commit social genocide – within their nations, in a veritable global structural adjustment program. So now we will see the beginnings of the Great Global Debt Depression, in which major western and global nations cut social spending, create mass unemployment by dismantling health, education, and social services. Further, state infrastructure – such as roads, bridges, airports, ports, railways, prisons, hospitals, electric transmission lines and water – will be privatized, so that global corporations and banks will own the entirely of national assets. Simultaneously, of course, taxes will be raised dramatically to levels never before seen. The BIS said that interest rates should rise at the same time, meaning that interest payments on debt will dramatically increase at both the national and individual level, forcing governments to turn to the IMF for loans – likely in the form of its new global reserve currency – to simply pay the interest, and will thus be absorbing more debt. Simultaneously, of course, the middle class will in effect have its debts called in, and since the middle class exists only as an illusion, the illusion will vanish. Already, towns, cities, and states across America are resorting to drastic actions to reduce their debts, such as closing fire stations, scaling back trash collection, turning off street lights, ending bus services and public transportation, cutting back on library hours or closing them altogether, school districts cutting down the school day, week or year. Simultaneously, this is occurring with a dramatic increase in the rate of privatizations or “publicprivate partnerships” in which even libraries are being privatized. No wonder then, that this month, the Managing Director of the IMF warned that America and Europe, in the midst of the worst jobs crisis since the Great Depression, face an “explosion of social unrest.” Just yesterday, Europe experienced a wave of mass protests and social unrest in opposition to „austerity measures‟, with a general strike in Spain involving millions of people, and a march on the EU headquarters in Brussels of nearly 100,000 people. As social unrest spreads, governments will likely react – as we saw in the case of the G20 in Toronto – with oppressive police state measures. Here, we see the true relevance of the emergence of „Homeland Security States‟, designed not to protect people from terrorists, but to protect the powerful from the people. So while things have never seemed quite so bleak, there is a dim and growing beacon of hope, in what Zbigniew Brzezinski has termed as the greatest threat to elite interests everywhere – the „global political awakening‟. The global political awakening is representative of the fact that for the first time in all of human history, mankind is politically awakened and stirring, activated and aware, and that generally – as Zbigniew Brzezinski explains – generally is aware of global inequalities, exploitation, and disrespect. This awakening is largely the result of the information revolution – thus revealing the contradictory nature of the globalization project – as while it globalizes power and oppression, so too does it globalize awareness and opposition. This awakening is the greatest threat to entrenched elite interests everywhere. The awakening, while having taken root in the global south – already long subjected to exploitation and devastation – is now stirring in the west, and will grow as the economy crumbles. As the middle classes realize their consumption was an illusion of wealth, they will seek answers and demand true change, not the Wall Street packaged „brand-name‟ change of Obama Inc., but true, inspired, and empowering change. In 1967, Martin Luther King delivered a speech in which he spoke out against the Vietnam War and the American empire, and he stated that, “It seems as if we are on the wrong side of a world revolution.” So now it seems to me that the time has come for that to change. Andrew Gavin Marshall is a Research Associate with the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). He is co-

editor, with Michel Chossudovsky, of the recent book, “The Global Economic Crisis: The Great Depression of the XXI Century,� available to order at

Watch Fall Of The Republic: The Presidency Of Barack H Obama:

Government Prepares To Seize Private Pensions Massive wealth confiscation program would replace 401(k) system with Social Security-run ponzi scheme

Paul Joseph Watson Prison Tuesday, October 12, 2010

The government is preparing to seize the private 401(k) pensions of millions of Americans while enforcing an additional 5 per cent payroll tax as part of a new bailout program that will empower the Social Security Administration to redistribute pension funds in a frightening example of big government gone wild. Public pension plans have been so aggressively looted already by the government that cities and counties face a $574 billion funding gap, according to a CNBC report. That black hole is set to be filled by a new proposal that will ― fairly‖ distribute taxpayer-funded pensions to everyone, by confiscating the private wealth of millions of Americans. Its proponents express staggering arrogance in thinking that they can just steal money people have worked for decades to accrue as if it’s their own. Not only would the government confiscate 401(k) pensions, it would also impose a mandatory 5 per cent payroll tax payable by everyone, according to a hearing chaired last week by Sen. Tom Harkin (D-Iowa), Chairman of the Health, Education, Labor and Pensions (HELP) Committee. ―T his would, of course, be a sister government ponzi scheme working in tandem with Social Security, the primary purpose being to give big government politicians additional taxpayer funds to raid to pay for their out-of-control spending,‖ writes Connie Hair.

The hearing was a platform for advocates of Guaranteed Retirement Accounts (GRAs), a program authored by Teresa Ghilarducci, professor of economic policy analysis at the New School for Social Research in New York. Back in November 2008, Ghilarducci testified to Congress that 401(k)s and IRAs should be confiscated and converted into universal Guaranteed Retirement Accounts (GRAs) managed by the Social Security Administration. ―Y ou don’t hold hearings on something you don’t intend to do,‖ points out the Market Ticker blog. ―I hate it when I’m right. I hate it even more when tens of millions of Americans are going to get reamed to pay for the crimes of the handful on Wall Street, and their crony enablers in Washington DC.‖ As Bloomberg reported earlier this year, pension funds are already being taken by stealth and invested in failed banks. The GRAs would be enforced by means of a mandatory savings tax equating to 5 per cent of an individual’s annual paycheck deposited to the GRA. Social Security and Medicare taxes would still be payable, employers would no longer would be able to write off their contributions and capital gains would be taxable year-on-year. In addition, workers could bequeath only half of their account balances to their heirs, unlike full balances from existing 401(k) and IRA accounts. During a Seattle radio interview in October 2008, Ghilarducci explained the motive behind the plan, stating, ―I’mjust rearranging the tax breaks that are available now for 401(k)s and spreading – spreading the wealth‖ (emphasis mine). However, as we painfully learned in the immediate aftermath of the original $700 million dollar bailout, which was originally sold on the basis that it would be used to pay off bad debt, governments that propose ―spre ading the wealth‖ under socialist-style financial reforms almost always collect the wealth under the pretext of being the saviors before greedily hoarding it all for themselves. The GRA program is being pushed by the Economic Policy Institute, an organization housed on the third floor of the building occupied by the George Soros-funded Center for American Progress. The Center for American Progress is a think tank headed by Bill Clinton’s former chief of staff John D. Podesta, who was also head of Barack Obama’s presidential transition team after the 2008 election. In preparing to seize private pensions, the United States is going the same way as Argentinean government, which in 2008 nationalized the country’s private pension plans, known as AFJPs, confiscating the wealth of millions. ― We have no doubt that here the right to private property is being violated. Not just for us but for society and the world, this is a clear confiscation,‖ said opposition Radical Party’s Ernesto Sanz at the time. How will Americans react to having not only their wealth but their nest egg for future generations brazenly confiscated by the government in one fell swoop? If this doesn’t prompt widespread rioting and civil

disobedience in America on behalf of the besieged middle class then nothing will. Don’t be under any illusions, if you don’t have a private pension and think this won’t affect you – think again. Once the pretext has been created that the state can simply confiscate privately earned wealth, they can then come after anything, your gold, your home, your kids and eventually your very freedom. Once the vampire of big government gets a taste for blood, the teeth will only sink in further, and America’s resemblance to third world tyrannies will rapidly accelerate. ********************* Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Prison He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a fill-in host for The Alex Jones Show. Watson has been interviewed by many publications and radio shows, including Vanity Fair and Coast to Coast AM, America’s most listened to late night talk show.

Watch the video: Joel Skousen: Order Out of Financial Chaos, End of Paper Money and The American Way of Life by clicking:

Watch: Money as Debt II Promises Unleashed by clicking on:

"The courts must be called to our aid, debts must be collected, bonds and mortgages foreclosed as rapidly as possible. When through the process of the law, the common people have lost their homes, they will be more tractable and easily governed through the influence of the strong arm of the government applied to a central power of imperial wealth under the control of the leading financiers. People without homes will not quarrel with their leaders." ~ The Banker's Manifesto 1892

I would like to note that around 2003 many Americans were lured (thanks to the Federal Reserve, the banks, and the federal government), by low mortgage rates which fueled a housing boom. This encouraged new home purchases and a frenzy of refinancing, which in turn allowed homeowners to lower their monthly payments, harvest their growing home equity, and to buy up. Like sheep to the slaughter everyone went, with the blessing of their own government. This was a setup. GL

Fraudulent Financial System The greatest financial scam in American history is the mortgage backed securities scam, and this fraudulent financial system is getting worse, not better. It is a system that is rotten and corrupt from top to bottom. The nation we thought we lived in does not exist. Rather, we are living in a form of economic feudalism, spending our entire lives slaving away for a nobility type rule. That is to say, we are living much like Medieval serfs, with a completely compromised media; the Fourth Estate is dead. In fact, the media is covering up the mortgage scandal. They are hiding the fact that the problem is not the foreclosures, when it's the fraud. The media is engaged in what is called a limit hangout . That is, they are going to admit to some little crimes to draw everyone's attention in, in order to conceal the bigger crime.

The Little Crime The little crime is the foreclosures. We are told the government is going to slap down the banks who are foreclosing. That is the lie that is being sold to the public in order to hide the bigger fraud. The foreclosure fraud came about only to accelerate the process of the foreclosures themselves. And the foreclosures themselves are being pushed forward as hard as possible because that is how the evidence trail of a greater fraud is hidden. The Big Crime The true (big) crime is the MORTGAGE BACKED SECURITIES FRAUD. That is being erased. Earlier this year there were announcements of investigations into the banks, etc. That has all vanished from the headlines. That topic pretty much disappeared when the Gulf oil spill came about. Sadly, the mortgage backed securities fraud has destroyed the lives of tens of millions of Americans; that is the real crime and the real scandal. The Major Players Major players in all this fraud are Citibank, Country Bank, Bank of America, and Bear Sterns. They were taking the same mortgages and reselling them over and over and over again. This is well documented. If they sold the same mortgages and securities several times over, there is no way they can honor all those commitments, which is the over-subscribed investment device. In addition, the only way the scheme works, the only way they get to keep the billions and billions of dollars they made from the sales and commissions of these mortgage backed securities, is if the securities collapse so that the investors don't know. That way they don't find out they over-subscribed. If you don't understand this, watch the movie “The Producers” by Mel Brooks. The storyline of the movie is that they sell 1,000 percent of a show (they're supposed to sell 100 percent), and they deliberately pick a show they believe will flop called “Springtime for Hitler”. The movie turns out to be a surprise success, and they go to jail.

The Time line and TARP The scam that the bankers have been playing on America began in 2006. In 2008, it was beginning to be exposed. That's when the Congress, whose own money is invested in these companies said, Oh, we're going to have to cover this up. These bankers are going to go to jail. It could crash the whole system, and that's our money at risk. So they voted through TARP to buy up all the toxic assets which is a code word for these over-subscribed mortgage backed securities (the bad paper). The Congress started buying back the bad paper using the taxpayers' money. That's what TARP was all about. That is the real scandal that they are hoping the people won't find out about. They are hoping the people will just listen to the foreclosure thing, and believe the government is going to stop the foreclosures. However, it is not the end of it, because the foreclosures are not the crime. The crime is the mortgage back security fraud that led to the necessity for the banks to foreclose everything, to shut it down to cover its tracks. Furthermore, more and more people in the blogosphere are picking up on this story. Check out “Bankers Gone Wild” In addition, Bloomberg is reporting that outside experts are taking a close look at the mortgage backed securities put out by City Group. In fact, back in 2006 they were finding that over 60% of the mortgages were bundled into these mortgage backed securities which they called “defective.” And this has nothing to do with homeowners making payments or not. When they refer to these mortgages and mortgages backed securities being defective they are saying that the mortgages were not of the quality that City represented them to be. Remember they were taking prime and sub-prime and blending them together and passing them off as Triple A rated investment vehicles. They figured that if the whole investment package was profitable (although, maybe not as profitable), people wouldn't complain. But they did.

By 2007 things were even worse. That is, from 2007 to the present. The expert who was examining for Bloomberg says that 80 percent of the Citibank mortgages and their mortgage backed securities are defective. That's four out of every five of the mortgages and mortgage back securities are defective to some degree. However, they are not clarifying this; they are not saying that the mortgages are being sold and resold in different packages. If they are not saying this, then that means there are other problems. The bottom line is that Citi was selling mortgage backed securities that they had to know were not of the quality they were telling their investors they were. Then they tried to cover it up with sloppy paper work. They are trying to say it was sloppy paper work. This is a BIG fraud. Just when you think it can't get worse, it gets worse. There is a foreclosure attorney in California (Jeff Barns), who has gone public saying banks who own the mortgages on homes are engaging in a very slimy, scummy practice. They are going to borrowers who are having trouble making their payments and saying we have this wonderful home loan modification program that the government has put together. We know it is not working, and this is why. The banks are telling homeowners they have to be three months behind in their mortgage payments before the home loan modification program will kick in to save them. They are being told to just go home and don't pay your next three payments, and we will put you in the home modification program and everything will be fine. Homeowners are falling for it and saying great this will help me get caught up on the other bills, and they don't make their mortgage payments, and all of a sudden they discover that the banks had already started the foreclosure proceedings immediately after being told to stop paying for three months. And of course, they get to the end of that three months and they go back and say we need that home loan modification and are told sorry we can't do that you are already in foreclosure, and they proceed to take the homes. THIS IS BEING DONE FOR TWO REASONS

1. The bankers understand these pieces of paper called reserve notes are not really worth anything, and the dollar is crashing right now. So the banks want the hard assets; they want the land. They want the home you spent your life working to pay off. They want it for nothing.

2. Because of this huge fraud that was perpetrated by over subscribing, over selling the mortgage back securities, they need to destroy the paper trail. Every one of those mortgages that's still out there is a jail sentence waiting to happen to someone in the bank's boardroom, and they are basically trying to foreclose, so then they can say it's gone, the paper trail is shut off. So they hope the investors will go away not realizing there's more of them than there ought to be, and that's the end of it. That's why there's a rush to foreclose on everything. Trillions and Trillions of Dollars Because trillions and trillions of dollars have been sucked out of the general population to make good on the fraud, we are all struggling to pay all of our bills. People are falling behind and losing their homes just simply because there's no money out here for people to have high paying jobs so they can pay off their bills. The whole system is locking up right now because the money addicts have grabbed everything for themselves.

Attorneys People must retain attorneys to help them, but the whole system is backlogged to deal this this fraud and will be backlogged for years and years to come. A Rat's Nest Banks that have sold mortgages and don't have a lot of capitol will go out and sell and resell the mortgage to recoup their money. A rat's nest has been created to conceal who's got the mortgage so they can conceal the overselling of the mortgages. This is also going to work against homeowners. Because if you are a homeowner and you want to sell your home, and you can't find the title, the title insurance companies are not going to insure you. Also, if you can't find the note to pay off the old loan when you sell your home (in order to buy a new home), you'll be out of luck. This is going to start impacting homeowners who are current on their mortgages, who have done nothing wrong, and they are going to find their home completely locked up in all of the paper trafficking. There are people who are watching real estate drop, and they want to sell now, to get out now and put their money into gold and silver and live in a rental unit until the property values stabilize. But they can't. They are trapped in their homes as they sink under water because they can't find their titles. It is a complete nightmare. There is No Help Unfortunately, nobody seems to want to do anything to help ordinary Americans. There is absolutely no question that the government is going to come down on the side of the bankers and protect them. There is nothing to illustrate that more than the fact that they are going to double the bailout for the Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac mortgage programs. These organizations got burned on these mortgage backed securities. They've lost a ton of money and rather than go back and start dealing with these huge banks and financial institutions like Bear Stearns and Goldman Sachs that screwed them out of their money, they're saying, well' we're just going to go on and take more money from the American people and just sort of patch over the hole. In other words, you've been screwed by the bankers, but the only solution the government can think of is to shove it in even deeper and harder. They are not going to go back and actually try to deal with the crisis because they understand the true nature of the crisis is of such a magnitude it basically destroys the legitimacy of the entire banking system and of the government itself that allowed it to happen and participated in the crime. The White House The White House has now signaled it is going to protect the bankers. Housing and Urban Development Secretary Shaun Donovan, speaking on behalf of the White House basically said the administration is focused on insuring future regulatory compliance, rather than bothering to look back to make sure that homeowners and investors were not harmed. In other words, they are not going to do anything. They are essentially saying, Okay, you caught us robbing you, but we are not going to give back what we already took. That's why they are trying to put all the focus on the foreclosure problems and say, Well, we're going to stop this. That is not enough.

Suckers This is a terrible evil perpetrated by the financial system on the American people, aided and abetted by the United States government that took the shackles off of the bankers in 1999 by repelling the GlassSteagall Act, and then helped lure suckers into the scam with an $8,000 new home buying tax credit. At the same time they enforced a tax code which encouraged sending high paying American jobs to other countries. This is the intentional take down of the American housing industry, the American home values and the whole housing market. It is an intentional take down to conceal the fact that during the big boom of the mortgage back securities, the big bankers were selling them over and over again, and Congress was invested in the scam. We have a Congress that is of and by the millionaires, and for the millionaires who think about their own wallets before they think about us. THAT IS WHY THEY PUT TARP THROUGH IN 2008 with 90% of Americans saying do not use our tax money to save the bankers from their own recklessness. Congress did it anyway. They said we have to buy back those toxic assets. What they were really talking about were all the phony oversold mortgages because ONLY ONE OF THEM CAN BE REAL. You can't sell the same house several times, because the person you first sold it to is going to be sitting in the house. But if you have a copy of a mortgage and a copy machine, you can sell that mortgage over and over again, and if you make that paper or computer tail complex enough, people won't see the scam. When Joe Blow buys this mortgage backed security from Bear Stearns, he has no way of knowing that the same mortgages that are in there, that he thinks he is invested in, were also sold to Bob Jones over here, they have no way of knowing because that trail of mortgage and title and note goes through that Mortgage Electron Registration system that just made this Gordian knot of linkages that people cannot make their way through. By Design From the bankers point of view, they put billions and billions of dollars on the backs of the American people. They did it with quick profits in their pockets. They were not thinking long term. Because ultimately if they oversold those mortgages they have to make good on all those investments. They have to pay all of those people. UNLESS, the mortgages go away. That's the part that the American people are not yet ready to come to terms with, i.e. the destruction of the housing market and the flood of foreclosures is by DESIGN. It's how they cover the tracks of the original fraud. Symptom and Disease Now the media is trying to make it look like the foreclosures are the whole problem. They are not. They are a SYMPTOM. The mortgage backed securities and the fraud in those, that is the DISEASE. Who is Responsible? Who is responsible? This administration and previous ones. They were helping the bankers along. Just like with Bernie Madoff making off with the loot, the Securities Exchange Commission were watching him for 12 years and did nothing. Instead they were sending him resumes. They wanted to be him.

Regulatory Compliance In order to reassure us that the banks can be trusted and the government is doing its job, they are talking about regulatory compliance; However, that was their job all along. It's the same with the Gulf oil disaster. We had regulations in place, but no one was enforcing the compliance. So when the Secretary of HUD gets up there and says the administration wants to focus on regulatory compliance that is what they were supposed to be doing all along, but did not. The Secretary of HUD is admitting the administration allowed this disaster to happen. That is in effect what he is admitting. And when he says the administration is not going to go back and look at who got harmed, he's basically saying we're going to let them skedaddle with the loot. They robbed you fair and square and we're going to let them get away with it because right now they're writing these huge campaign donation checks for this upcoming election. HR 3808 They made a really big deal about HR 3808, which was this law that was going to make it easier for the banks to foreclose on you even though they didn't have all the paperwork. They just go down the street and say we'll foreclose that one, and that one, etc. They are going to make it easier to foreclose on the houses and bury this whole evidence trail of the fraud without having all their ducks in a row so to speak. Obama made a big deal of doing a pocket veto, he didn't actually veto it. Pocket veto means he just puts it in his pocket and doesn't sign it. But that's not the end of it. BECAUSE AFTER THE ELECTION, THEY CAN BRING THAT THING BACK. And if he signs that then, it will be the ultimate sellout of the American people to the bankers. Americans are Slaves You are being sold into slavery. We were sold into slavery in 1913 by the Federal Reserve Act You are a slave to the debt the banks create. The reason homes cost so much in this country, and we have some of the highest property values in the world, is not because our property is any better than anybody else's. In fact, looking at our crumbling infrastructure, there's not a lot to recommend. The reason housing prices are so expensive is because the banks need it to be that way, so that you spend your entire life working for the bankers, working for the mortgage companies, working for the lords. Working for their lordships. They demand that you work for 30 years for their little, tiny hovel that you live in. We are starting to wake up to the fact that what we live in as a country is a complete fantasy. We have been taking the blue pill (watch The Matrix). We're told we own the home we live in, but we don't. The banks and the government own it. They can kick us out any time they want via Eminent Domain Not only that, but there's all the requirements they set upon us such as permits, etc. We are spending as much of our lives working for the lordships as the medieval serfs did. We are just as duped as they were, and kept in the dark.

Your Form 1099, and your mortgage are what tell you that you are slaves to society's elite, and it is all by design. The Federal Reserve system was designed to trap the people of the United States of America in permanent debt (servitude). The very essence of the banking industry, the reason it even exists is to put people and nations into debt and keep them there. BECAUSE IF YOU CONTROL THAT DEBT YOU CONTROL EVERYTHING. From a banker's point of view, the value of the house is not the house, but THE DEBT IT CREATES and shackles the homeowner to. That debt is worth FIVE TIMES what the house is worth. That is why the things that we buy at the store have become so cheap, shoddy and falling apart, and unreliable. Because our entire financial system and culture doesn't care about products. They're not interested in the products. The products are worthless. BUT THE PRODUCTS ARE WHAT LURE YOU INTO DEBT. What they are selling in the stores are not appliances; they are selling you appliance loans. They're not selling you cell phones, they're selling you cell phone contracts. They're not selling you the car, they're selling you the car loan. THAT IS WHAT IS POWERING THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. It's staggering to a halt. Because when you are putting the country deeper and deeper into debt, there comes a time when it is so much in debt, it can't function any longer. In ancient times they had a jubilee that started the system all over again. These days because the Federal Reserve has worked to enslave 300 million Americans, they are never going to let you go. Not without a fight. When you have the White House coming out and saying we're not going to see how the banks harmed you over the last several years, we are just going to ask them real nice and polite not to do it anymore, then you know the government has completely sold out the people of the United States to the private owners of the private bank (the Federal Reserve). Source: Michael Rivero - NOTE: I transcribed the show and paraphrased in parts. GL



Randy Kelton Returns: How to Take Back What They Took From You ALEX JONES TV - Alex welcomes back to the show Randy Kelton. Kelton hosts the Rule Of Law Radio program and is the founder of Kelton has discussed with Alex how the legal system can be used against corrupt cops, district, city, county attorneys, and judges. Quoting from his Juris-Imprudence, Kelton notes: "No official has any immunity from criminal prosecution. The power to take back control of the legal system lies in that simple realization. The real check to abuse of power has always been in the hands of the people, yours and mine." Alex also covers the latest news and takes your calls. Randy Kelton Returns: How to Take Back What They Took From You – Alex Jones Tv WATCH ALL 6 PARTS WATCH THE VIDEO: PART 1 WATCH THE VIDEO PART 2: WATCH THE VIDEO PART 3: PART 4: PART 5: PART 6: Here's important info regarding the ongoing mortgage crimes and how they can impact all of us. Our friends and neighbors need this information. When lots of houses are foreclosed on in a neighborhood, crime moves in and property values go down. EVERYONE needs to view this information so anyone who finds themselves facing foreclosure understand what is 'really' going on and knows the best way to respond. And it is not refinancing or abandoning their homes. Thanks, AL. ~ GL

From: "Ginny" <> I have transcribed the following Alex Jones show focusing on key points from Parts 1 through 3 of a 5 part series (see below). If you own your home outright, are making payments on your home, or are a renter you may ultimately be affected by the mortgage fraud. With that said, I urge you to watch all five parts, and share them with everyone you know. Finally, what has been done to American homeowners was a setup. That setup involved two former presidents (Democrat AND Republican), who knew EXACTLY what they were doing when they contributed to the mortgage fraud via the cancellation of the GlassSteagall Act and subprime loans The international bankers could not have pulled this off without the cooperation of their puppets. ~ Ginny

Randy Kelton: Massive Mortgage Fraud Exposed! 10/28/10 - Alex Jones Show Glass-Steagall Act of 1933 ALEX JONES TV Ending the Glass-Steagall Act was the start of the housing crash : first with Clinton [who ended it in 1999], then Bush [subprime loans]. Glass-Steagall protected the borrowers from the lenders. Under the guise of making housing available to the poor, they took these protections off, and about the same time they started securitizing notes. This created an opportunity for people to go into business as mortgage companies. They didn't care about the mortgage. They just created the mortgage and sold it. They got the money, make a profit and walked away. So it made it profitable to sell these to investors, and the more expensive the loan product the more profit they made. Graph: Housing Prices for the Last 100 Years. There was a large drop [of housing prices] at the turn of the century. There was a peak in the 20s and a peak in the 40s, then it dropped down, and in the year 2000, the graph went almost straight up. There is a reason for that. There was a drop down in 1907 because people were allowed to bet on stocks, whether they were going to increase or decrease without actually purchasing the stock. Those were derivatives . It caused the stock market crash in 1907, so the Legislature forbade it. They forbade the practice, made it a felony, until the year 2000. In the year 2000, they removed that restriction. So with the Glass-Steagall Act gone, and government oversight of the lenders was non-existent, they essentially unleashed the money changers on us. Convincing everybody to do the one thing that had always been forbidden and speculate on their homes, and to take their good stable loans in which they were building their equity and trade them in for speculative loans, that they would possibly make a lot of money on. Foreclosed Housing Glut Houses are being bulldozed. Detroit looks like a war zone, nobody there. [It's happening in Nevada]. This is going to happen even more. It's happening right now. The banks are foreclosing on so many homes, they can't sell them. They have to take them back. They can't sell them into the market because it will drive the prices of housing down so much that the housing industry will collapse completely. They already have every state with a good number of people upside down on their mortgages. If they repossess these houses and then put them back out there for sale [things will get much worse]. What we are looking at is a major housing shortage very soon. Nobody's building now. It has ceased. The only construction going on is what has already been funded. [No one] can afford to build houses now.

Loan Modification Loan modification is supposed to lower your payments for a period of time and then come up back to where they were. It lowers your payments for a period of time and then they triple. Miss one payment after modification, they foreclose instantly. IT'S ALL A SET UP TO FORCE YOU INTO FORECLOSURE. (Alex): it's a way to get you to waive your rights. The only way the lender makes the big money is to foreclose. He doesn't care about your property – [It's] derivatives – he'll make eight to 10 times the amount of your principle if it forecloses. ALL HE WANTS TO DO IS FORECLOSE. After that anything in this becomes a liability. That's where we have an advantage. That's where we can take them to task and do something to stop all of this. The courts are turning against them BECAUSE THE POLITICIANS ARE IN TROUBLE. If we don't do something quickly, this country will be forced into by far the worst depression its ever seen. Because all these sales of the security instruments with no hard trace of where they've been creates property nobody can invest in. When we can't get foreign investment there's no way for us to come out of this depression we're going into. They’ve Already Sold It Down The Road

You're paying in to finally own this house, and they've already sold it down the road to all these foreign countries and corporations. This affects everybody. Not just people who are upside down. That's why they are taking houses that are paid for or they don't even have a note for because it was sold into derivatives. Because lawyers are finally suing and busting all this open they [banks] ceased many of the foreclosures because it's killing them, and they're looking for a political remedy in Congress to tell them they are allowed to do all this. But then if Congress does do that (and they are signaling they are), (my emphasis), then there is no private property left in this country. This is a BIG Deal

Alex: This is a big deal. Randy: This is THE deal. There is a good chance this country will come apart over all of this and in terms of remedies I may be suggesting something that would lead to that. If we are going to fix this problem, one of the things we need is statutes forbidding the paying of derivatives [in other words they eat their losses]. We can't go back and undo what's been done, we should stop the payment of all derivatives. These people have bought them as insurance. They [derivatives] are a fraud. Gold and Silver The state of Georgia has before its House, legislation that would declare gold and silver as legal tender. They are looking at pulling out of the dollar. That is the best thing the states could do to stabilize their economies economically. Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Recommends states pull out of the dollar You CAN Stop Foreclosure There are a number of consumer protection laws in place to protect the public from predatory lending practices. The Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act is one of them and The Truth in Lending Act, Regulation Z (12 CFR 226) is another. We use these and others to craft a remedy for you that will allow you to stop foreclosure in its tracks. In An Emergency If you are at foreclosure's door, go down to the court house where the sale is to take place, when they call your property, step up and tell them, "There is a claim on this property; buy the property you buy the claim." This will keep anyone from bidding and the bank will have to take the property back. Probably the best solution when you are out of time. Also, when you sue the bank. If an essentially innocent third party purchases the property, the question before the court will be, "Who has a right to possession." The fact that you may have a claim against the lender will not be considered. By stopping anyone from bidding, the bank must retain the property and then, if you sue the bank for the fraud we find here, the bank will usually stop all efforts to force you out of the building as, if they do, they are responsible for the property and they cannot insure an empty property. The bank will want you to remain in the property until the suit is litigated, which could take a very long time. This Computer Is Not An Attorney This program is designed to take your input, run an analysis on it, then merge your data into a lawsuit document. The particular document has been filed in the court a number of times and is intended to be generic. It will address certain issues that pertain to your case in terms of dollar amounts, but the issues brought are issues that exist in every consumer mortgate loan we have seen. It is designed to be used in an emergency to stop foreclosure. Not Intended To Replace Counsel This program is not intended as legal advice, but rather, instruction in how to stop the lender and give you time to seek out counsel. It is also the result of considerable research. The issues in this lawsuit have been taken from suits already filed by attorneys in cases. You can file the suite immediately to stop foreclosure, but we suggest you secure counsel to help you with the case. We have been locating and training attorneys around the country to deal with this issue and can give the list we have. If you have your own counsel, we can talk to him and bring him up to speed on the fraud issues common to most all consumer mortgages. Mediation Services We can also provide you with a mediation service if you are unable to negotiate with the lender. Once you have the information provided, you will be able to specifically demonstrate precisely how much fraud is involved in your note. Then, instead of going to the lender with your hat in your hand for a loan modification, you can go into mediation with your boot up their collective behinds. You Can Fight the Banks The money changers are stripping the American people of the equity in this country. If we do not stop them they will wind up enslaving us all. They have used fraud and trickery to get people to speculate with their

homes, now they intend to strip them of their homes and equity, then sell them back at inflated prices. Loan Modification Fraud The banks are using this loan modification scam to force people into foreclosure. They offer you a modification then tell you that you do not qualify unless you are a couple of payments behind. They then offer to modify and ask you to produce all your private information while they process the foreclosure. If you question the foreclosure notices, they tell you not to worry about that as you are doing the modification and everything will be fine. The will then stall you until just before foreclosure, deny the modification then sell the property. Forensic Audits Absent Remedy Are Worthless There are a lot of companies doing forensic audits and most are, we believe, acting in good faith toward the people they are trying to help. The problem is, the audit does nothing but tell you that the lender has violated certain laws. We are focused on remedy and the audit is not remedy. What do you do with the audit? We suggest, do not waste your money on an audit unless you intend to give it to an attorney who understands consumer law so he can sue them as noting will stop the bank form foreclosing on your property but a nice hefty law suit. If you have had a forensic audit and have the the printout and are wondering what to do with it, contact us, we will show you how to turn that audit into remedy. How Things Really Work 1) Briefly, how it works is this, the Lender would secure a large loan from a large bank, convert that loan into 20 and 30 year mortgages, then sell the promise to pay to an investor. 2) Usually a Real Estate Agent would contract with a seller to find a buyer, then bring both seller and buyer to a lender who would secure the title from the seller using the funds borrowed for that purpose then trade the title to the buyer in exchange for a promise to pay over a stipulated term. The lender, however, has created a 20 or 30 year mortgage with money the lender must repay within 6 months, therefore, as soon as the closing is consummated, the promissory note is pooled together with others and sold to an investor. 3) Using the instant case as an example, a $139,200.00 note at 7.8980% interest over 30 years will produce $352,108.80 The lender can then offer up the security at say 50% of the future value to the investor. The investor will, over the life of the note, less servicing fees, realize a profit of $180,466.72 . The lender can then pay back the bank and retain a handsome profit in the amount of $52,429.60. The lender, however, is not done with the deal. 4) The lender who signed over the promissory note to the investor at the time of the trade, did not sign over the lien document. The State of Kansas Supreme Court addressed this issue and stated that such a transaction was certainly legal, however, it created a fatal flaw in that, the holder of the lien document, at time of sale of the security instrument, received consideration in excess of the lien amount, and therefore, the lender could not be harmed and the lien became a void document. 5) This begs a question, if keeping the lien would render it void, why would the lender not simply transfer the lien with the promissory note? As always, follow the money. The lender will hold the lien for three years, file an Internal Revenue Form 1099a, claim the full amount of the lien as abandoned funds, and deduct the full amount from the lender's tax liability. The lender, by this maneuver, gets consideration a second time and still the lender is not done profiting from the deal. 6) After sale of the promissory note, the lender remains as the servicer for the investor. The lender will receive 3% of each payment the lender collects and renders to the investor pool. However, if the payment is late, the lender is allowed to assess an extra 5% and keep that amount. Also, if the loan defaults, the lender stands to

gain a considerable amount for handling the foreclosure. 7) The lender stands to profit far more from a note that is overly expensive in the first instance, then slow to pay in the second, then ultimately fails in the third, than from a good stable loan. And where, you may ask, does all this profit come from? It comes from the equity the lender convinced the borrower to invest in the new purchase, and still the lender is not finished profiting from the deal. 8) The last nail was driven in the American financial coffin on the last day of Congress in 2000 , the Graham Bailey Leach Act, was when they removed a restriction that had been in place since the economic collapse of 1907. At that time, investors were allowed to bet on stocks without actually buying them. This unbridled speculation lead directly to an economic collapse so the legislature banned the practice, until the year 2000. The money changers got their way on the last day, the last act of the session, when congress opened the process again and it took only 8 years to crash the stock market. 9) The lender was not done profiting from the loan he created as he was then free to bet on the failure of the security. 10) The unsuspecting consumer was lulled into accepting the pronouncements of the Real Estate agents, the Lenders, Appraiser, Underwriters, and Trustees as all were acting under the cover of government regulation. Unfortunately, the regulations in place to protect the consumer from just this kind of abuse were simply being ignored. 11) The loan origination fee from line 801 of the HUD1 settlement statement is the finder's fee paid for the referral of the client to the lender by a person acting as an agent for the borrower. Hereinafter, the person or entity who receives any portion of the yield spread premium, or a commission of any kind consequent to securing the loan agreement through from the borrower will be referred to as "Agent." The fee, authorized by the consumer protection law is restricted to 1% of the principal of the note. It was intended that the Agent, when seeking out a lender for the borrower, would seek the best deal for his client rather than who would pay him the most. That was the intent, but not the reality. The reality is that Agents never come away from the table with less than 2% or 3% of the principal. This is accomplished by undisclosed fees to the Agent in order to induce the Agent to breach his fiduciary duty to the borrower and convince the borrower to accept a more expensive loan product than the borrower qualifies for. This will generate more profits for the lender and, consequently, for the Agent. 12) It is common practice for lenders to coerce appraisers to give a higher appraisal than is the fair market price. This allows the lender to increase the cost of the loan product and give the impression that the borrower is justified in making the purchase. 13) The lender then charges the borrower an underwriting fee in order to convince the borrower that someone with knowledge has gone over the conditions of the note and certified that the meet all legal criteria. 14) The entire loan process is carefully contrived and intended to induce the unsophisticated borrower into accepting a loan product that is beyond the borrowers means. 15) The trustee, at closing, participates actively in the deception of the borrower by placing undue stress on the borrower to sign the large stack of paperwork without reading it. The trustee is, after all, to be trusted and has been paid to insure the transaction. This trust is systematically violated for the purpose of taking unfair advantage of the borrower. 16) With all this, it should be a surprise to no one that this country is having a real estate crisis.

A PRIMER ON HOW WALL STREET PULLED OFF THE GREATEST MORTGAGE INVESTMENT SWINDLE IN HISTORY WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE US GOVERNMENT! by Michael Rivero 1. SOME HISTORY This story begins back before the United States was the United States. The original thirteen colonies printed their own currency, and it worked very well at empowering commerce and turning the young America into a powerful growing economy, free of the poverty and unemployment that even then crippled London. But the bankers of Europe, long used to private banks issuing the public currencies, were horrified by the American approach and saw it as a threat to their deeply cherished religious belief that the gods intended for the bankers to have all the wealth of the world. So, the Bank of England lobbied King George III to impose the Currency Act on the colonies, which forbade the colonies to use their own money and required them to borrow their lawful tender from the Bank of England, at interest. It took only a few years for this scheme to reduce the formerly prosperous and productive colonies down to the poverty and unemployment typical of London at the same time period, as depicted in the literature of Charles Dickens, among others. While the state-run American schools teach that the revolution was about the Stamp act and the Tea tax, it was primarily the rage created by the enforced impoverishment of the Currency Act which fueled the rebellion. Why the Currency Act is not mentioned in the public schools will become apparent further on.

2. THE ORIGINAL AMERICAN ECONOMY Following the American Revolution, the Founding Fathers reverted back to the system which had worked so well before the Currency Act.

As the above diagram shows, the Founding Fathers of this nation set up a simple economic system that did not rely on a private central bank. Government issued the public currency and spent it into circulation where it was used by the public free of interest. Then the money was taxed back into the government's hands, then to be re-spent back into circulation. For each fiscal year the money issued equaled the money collected. Nothing was lost. The dollar was based on a weight measure of silver, which meant the value of a dollar was fixed and not subject to the whims of government or bankers.

3. THE FIRST BANK OF THE UNITED STATES This is a system which has worked very well for the civil population throughout history. It made the new nation immediately prosperous. This alarmed the European banking clans, which feared the American inspiration might spread to other nations (as it did to France in 1793). Where Britain's military might failed, politics succeeded and spurred on by Alexander Hamilton, the first Bank of the United States was granted a 20 year charter in 1791. Almost immediately, the spiraling debt in the government budget, championed as necessary for international commerce by Hamilton, began to drain the livelihood of ordinary Americans. The furor over the debt was one of many issues that led to the famous duel between Hamilton and Aaron Burr which resulted in Hamilton's death on July 11, 1804. As a side note, the pistols which were used in the duel are today in the possession of J. P. Morgan Chase & Co. Hamilton continues to be lionized by the private banking cartels he championed. "Everything predicted by the enemies of banks, in the beginning, is now coming to pass. We are to be ruined now by the deluge of bank paper. It is cruel that such revolutions in private fortunes should be at the mercy of avaricious adventurers, who, instead of employing their capital, if any they have, in manufactures, commerce, and other useful pursuits, make it an instrument to burden all the interchanges of property with their swindling profits, profits which are the price of no useful industry of theirs." --Thomas Jefferson By 1811, the owners of the First Bank of the United States had become rich while ruining the lives of ordinary Americans. Congress had prudently limited the charter of the bank to 20 years and it expired in 1811. A move to re-charter the bank failed due to public opposition. "The Bank of the United States is one of the most deadly hostilities existing, against the principles and form of our Constitution. An institution like this, penetrating by its branches every part of the Union, acting by command and in phalanx, may, in a critical moment, upset the government. I deem no government safe which is under the vassalage of any selfconstituted authorities, or any other authority than that of the nation, or its regular functionaries. What an obstruction could not this bank of the United States, with all its branch banks, be in time of war! It might dictate to us the peace we should accept, or withdraw its aids. Ought we then to give further growth to an institution so powerful, so hostile?" --Thomas Jefferson

4. THE WAR OF 1812 The following year, with the conclusion of Britain's wars with Napoleon, the Bank of England demanded King George reinvade the United States to force them back into the clutches of private central banking, this time with the Bank of England. Thus was initiated the war of 1812, a war like any other war; created and waged for profit.

5. THE SECOND BANK OF THE UNITED STATES The war of 1812 failed, and again political and monetary pressure succeeded where military force had failed, and in 1816, President Madison chartered a Second Bank of the United States, in part to deal with the expenses created defending the nation from Britain a second time and the runaway inflation caused by private banks issuing their own banknotes without restraint. Like the First Bank of the United States, the second one was granted a 20 year charter. By the time the charter was due to expire, the nation was once again struggling with debt and poverty while the bankers were growing richer every day. As a result, Andrew Jackson opposed the renewal of the bank charter and made it a major platform of his campaign in 1832. "Gentlemen, I have had men watching you for a long time and I am convinced that you have used the funds of the bank to speculate in the breadstuffs of the country. When you won, you divided the profits amongst you, and when you lost, you charged it to the bank. You tell me that if I take the deposits from the bank and annul its charter, I shall ruin ten thousand families. That may be true, gentlemen, but that is your sin! Should I let you go on, you will ruin fifty thousand families, and that would be my sin! You are a den of vipers and thieves. I intend to rout you out, and by the Eternal God, I will rout you out." -- Andrew Jackson In 1835, an unemployed painter, Richard Lawrence, attempted to shoot President Jackson twice, with both pistols failing to fire. Lawrence gave as his reason for the attack that with the President dead, money would be more plentiful, an obvious reference to Jackson's veto of the re-chartering of the Second Bank of the United States. As a footnote, following the loss of its charter, the Second Bank of the United States attempted to continue as an ordinary bank, but went bankrupt in 1841.

6. THE PRIVATE CENTRAL BANK ECONOMY The following diagram shows the principle difference with the central bank system as opposed to the original economic system of the United States.

As you can see, the main difference between the economic system created by the Founding Fathers and the current system is that the control of the printing presses has been given over to the private central bank. The government no longer prints up and spends the money it needs to operate, but BORROWS the money from the private central bank, at interest! Then the money is spent into circulation and winds its way through the population, and is then collected back in taxes. But here is the problem. Taxes now have to collect back MORE money than the government spent in order to pay the interest back to the private central bank. Over time, relentlessly, the private central bank is acquiring wealth from the population, in essence charging the people a fee for doing what the government itself originally did for free. That is the major difference between the economic system created by the nation's founders (the reason we fought a war to be free of the Bank of England) and the system we have today. It is because we have been sold back into the debt slavery of a private central bank that the history of the Currency Act and its impact on the American Revolution is marginalized in the state-controlled schools. We are brainwashed into believing that the Revolution was about soggy tea! \"If the debt which the banking companies owe be a blessing to anybody, it is to themselves alone, who are realizing a solid interest of eight or ten per cent on it. As to the public, these companies have banished all our gold and silver medium, which, before their institution, we had without interest, which never could have perished in our hands, and would have been our salvation now in the hour of war; instead of which they have given us two hundred million of froth and bubble, on which we are to pay them heavy interest, until it shall vanish into air... We are warranted, then, in affirming that this parody on the principle of 'a public debt being a public blessing,' and its mutation into the blessing of private instead of public debts, is as ridiculous as the original principle itself. In both cases, the truth is, that capital may be produced by industry, and accumulated by economy; but jugglers only will propose to create it by legerdemain tricks with paper." --Thomas Jefferson

7. SILVER MONEY VERSUS PAPER MONEY But the banks were still constrained by the Coinage Act of 1792, which defined a dollar as 371.25 grains of pure silver, matching the common silver currency in use around the world at the time, or that weight of gold which would match in value 371.25 grains of pure silver, 24.75 grains, 1/15 the weight of the silver in a silver dollar.

US Silver Dollar

US Gold Dollar (same scale)

It wasn't the coin that was the money, but the metal the coin contained. Of course, carrying around large amounts of silver was difficult, so paper certificates were issued, both silver and gold certificate, as a convenience. But those paper certificates were not the money. They were claim checks. They were accepted as items of value because you could walk down to the banks and turn the claim checks in for the appropriate amount of

silver or gold. But the metal was the money, not the engraved coins and not the paper. The bankers could only loan out as much money, based on silver or gold, as they had the silver and gold to cover in their vaults. The adherence to gold and silver as a unit of value was a major limitation on the banker's activities.

8. CIVIL WAR AND LINCOLN'S GREENBACK Then in 1861, the Confederacy broke free of the United States. Abraham Lincoln sought financing from the bankers for the war effort, but balked at the usurious high interest rates the banks demanded. Declaring that he would not enslave the white people to the bankers to free the black people, Abraham Lincoln exercised his Presidential Authority to issue a new government currency; the greenback.

However in order to make the currency work and to cover the escalating costs of the War, Lincoln was forced to abandon convertibility, meaning that the paper notes became the money and were not convertible to silver or gold (despite the flood of silver from the Comstock strike of 1857, which eventually led to Nevada's rapid statehood and Federal taxation in 1864). While there was inflation at the time, the government-issued currency, free of interest to a private bank, worked well during the war years, and Abraham Lincoln declared his intention to keep issuing the Greenbacks after the war's conclusion. This did not please the world's bankers at all. An 1865 London Times editorial directed against Lincoln's debt-free Greenbacks said it all: "If that mischievous financial policy which had its origin in the North American Republic during the late war in that country, should become indurated down to a fixture, then that Government will furnish its own money without cost. It will pay off its debts and be without debt. It will become prosperous beyond precedent in the history of the civilized governments of the world. The brains and wealth of all countries will go to North America. That government must be destroyed or it will destroy every monarchy on the globe." Following Abraham Lincoln's assassination, Congress voted to end the Greenbacks, but did not restore convertibility. Banks could issue notes without regard to actual bullion reserves and a period of intense post-war inflation and speculation resulted.

9. THE GOLD STANDARD In 1900 President McKinley kept a campaign promise to bring back convertibility by signing the Gold Standard Act, making the Gold Standard the basis for all US currency, even though much of the coinage issued remained silver. McKinley did this because of the public perception that the US Banking system was weak and corrupted, and because the gold strikes in California, Alaska, and Colorado bolstered the US Treasury's stock of that metal.

One year later, President McKinley was assassinated by Leon Czolosz, who explained his attack at his execution saying,"I killed the President because he was the enemy of the good people – the good working people."

10. THE FEDERAL RESERVE In 1910, a group of private bankers met at a private island named Jekyll Island to plan the imposition of yet another private central bank on the people of the United States. As part of the ruse, they abandoned the unpopular name "Bank of the United States" and chose the name Federal Reserve to grant themselves the illusion that this was a government agency, when in point of fact it is just another privately owned central bank. Pretenses to the contrary notwithstanding, the Federal Reserve is no more "Federal" than Federal Express. It is a privately owned bank. Three years later, in 1913, Congress voted the Federal Reserve act and President Wilson signed it, redeeming a campaign promise to his financial backers. Six years later, as his Presidency came to a close, Woodrow Wilson wrote. “I am a most unhappy man. I have unwittingly ruined my country. A great industrial nation is now controlled by its system of credit.We are no longer a government by free opinion, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of a small group of dominant men.” -- Woodrow Wilson 1919 Because of the earlier disasters with 20 year charters, the Federal Reserve was granted a 100 year charter due to expire in 2013. A later Congress amended the Federal Reserve act to make the charter permanent.

11. THE CRASH OF 1929 For a while, the new Federal Reserve was still bound by the requirements of the Gold Standard. Under the law, they were required to have enough gold on hand to redeem 40% of the paper notes they had issued. The Federal Reserve claimed that this requirement limited their ability to deal with the financial crash of 1929, and after years of lobbying, finally persuaded incoming President Franklin Roosevelt to abandon the gold standard entirely in 1933 and to confiscate all gold and gold certificates in order to make the gold available to the US Government for war funding purposes. In looking back at the crash of 1929 it became obvious that reckless speculation had created the over-valued market bubble, while easy credit for buying stocks on margin drew in working-class people; people who did not have risk capital to play with, to form each succeeding layer of a rapidly-building pyramid doomed to eventual collapse. In the wake of the melt-down, Congress passed the Banking Act of 1933, otherwise known as the Glass-Steagall Act, which created the FDIC to restore public confidence in the banks and stop the runs. Glass-Steagall also included a ban on bank holding companies from owning other financial institutions, which was seen as a major contributing factor to the reckless speculation which precipitated the crash.

12. JOHN F. KENNEDY The Federal Reserve completed their plan for the economic subjugation of the American people in 1964, one year after the assassination of President John F. Kennedy. Silver coin and certificates were still in general use; money that came from the government and was used free of interest. Since the money was something of value and owned by whoever held it, the banks made no profit off of the use of that money and more to the point, could not manipulate its value. Then President John F. Kennedy signed Executive Order 11110 on June 4th, 1963. This order authorized the Treasury to issue a new government currency, the US Note, based on silver in Fort Knox, recycled from the huge magnets used in early Uranium enrichment at Oak Ridge. This allowed the Kennedy administration to purchase four billion dollars worth of goods and services without having to borrow the money from the Federal Reserve, and signaled Kennedy's intention to restore the nations' economic system to the model used by the Founding Fathers.

John F. Kennedy's United States Note. Five months later, John Kennedy was assassinated and his US Notes withdrawn from circulation. The Warren Commission, now widely acknowledged to have been a cover-up, included as a member John J. McCloy, President of Chase Manhattan Bank and President of the World Bank.

13. THE END OF SILVER MONEY. The following year, all silver coins and silver certificates were withdrawn from circulation. The media proclaimed the new clad coinage and the Federal Reserve Notes to be just as good as the silver money, and the entrapment of the American people was complete. From then on, all currency in circulation was worth what the private central bank said it was worth, and over time, it has been declared worth less and less. Just see how many "dollar" notes it takes to buy an original US Silver Dollar today!

14. THE TRAP OF THE FEDERAL RESERVE Unlike the economic system of value instituted by the Founding Fathers, the Federal Reserve System is a debt-based economy. All money, whether issued through the government, or by member banks to the public, is the result of a loan from that Private Central Bank. And therein lies the trap, because the moment that first Federal Reserve Note went into circulation, more money is owed to the banking system than actually exists! The debt can never be paid off. The system perpetuates only so long as an ever-larger group of new borrowers can be found to create new money to pay the interest on the old money. That is what makes it a pyramid. More money is created out of thin air in response to a loan, but the total debt still exceeds the total money supply. That is why the government and media always talk about the “growth” of the economy. “Growth” may sound like a good thing to the unenlightened, but in a debt-based economy, “growth” means “nation and its people deeper in debt-slavery". And because it is a pyramid, if the economy does not grow, that is, if more new debt cannot be created to service the interest on the old debt, the pyramid collapses, which is what is happening now. The Federal Reserve System is designed to suck the real wealth out of the nation and put it in the pockets of the bankers, and now that they have succeeded, the system is breaking down, too cash-poor to operate efficiently, just as it did in the colonies in the early 1770s under the Bank of England. The system is broken because the bankers have all the wealth, and absent a new source of wealth to pay the bankers’ interest charges and fees, the system is locking up. Of course, it is all paper debts and make-believe obligations. The money owed to the bankers by the government never existed in the first place. It’s just part of the scam by which the bankers enslave the world, which is the real essence of banking; to hold nations and people perpetually in debt-servitude or indentured service, with the government bribed to not take action to ameliorate the situation! “This is the very essence of the banking industry; to make us all, whether we be nations or individuals, slaves to debt!” Watch the video:

15. DEREGULATION AS THE DOORWAY TO DISASTER In 1999, the Gramm-Leach-Blily repealed the provision of the Glass-Steagall act that prohibited bank holding companies from owning other financial institutions, and dropped the barrier that separated banks and investment houses, allowing them to engage in each otherâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s business. This created a repeat of the exact same financial environment that had led to the crash of 1929. Those politicians who had championed deregulation, like Senator John McCain (a veteran of the Keating S&L Scandal of the 1980s), avoided keeping any oversight over the recently unchained financial system to ensure that past crimes were not being repeated. As a result, almost immediately after the repeal of Glass-Steagall, the banks and investment houses began to acquire and "flip" homes, to drive the prices up. The reason for the flipping should be obvious. Banks make their money off of interest on loans. The more people are forced to borrow, the more they have to work to pay the banks back. From a bank's point of view, a house that sells for only a few thousand dollars is useless. The ideal is that same house costing so much that a borrower will spend 30 years working off that paper debt, often paying the banks many times more in interest than the house itself originally cost. From 1999 through 2006 housing prices soared. Adjustable-rate mortgages became the norm, with low lead-in teaser rates to draw in new borrowers. Aiding the process was the US Government itself, which baited the trap with an $8000 tax credit for first-time home buyers.

16. MORTGAGES AS INVESTMENT DEVICES Let us start by looking at how Mortgage companies worked up into the mid 2000s.

Click for larger image In a normal mortgage, the lender, who is a member bank of the Federal Reserve system, prints up a bunch of cash (or enters the amount of the loan into a computerized bank account) to loan to the mortgage applicant. This is not a joke; the money the bank hands to you to buy a house, or car, or iPod, is created out of thin air the moment you sign the loan agreement, credit card slip, or mortgage papers. Admit it; you thought the money for loans came from the bank's depositors, didn't you! Because after all, that's what you were taught in the state-controlled schools as a child! And they would never lie to you, would they? "If the people understood the rank injustice of our money and banking system, there would be a revolution before morning" -President Andrew Jackson The mortgage lender, who is allowed to print up the money they loan out (up to a legally defined limit), makes their profit from the borrower, who is not allowed to print up the money he or she hands back to the bank, but must trade their labor

for money with which to pay the banker. Because of compound interest, the mortgage borrower actually repays the banker many times the original cost of the home! Let us say that you take out a $100,000 mortgage over 30 years at 8% interest. That works out to $733.76 per month, which does not seem too bad (until you start adding in insurance and property taxes, but that is another story). $733.76 per month is $8,805.12 per year. Over 30 years that comes out to $264,153.60 paid out to the banker! In other words, while the builder of the house earns $100,000 after buying the land. buying materials. and building the house, the banker earns $164,153.60 purely for having the right, granted by the US Government, to run a printing press! If you or I created money the same way, we would be thrown in jail for counterfeiting! Remember that from an investor's point of view, the value of a home is not the home itself, but the debt the home creates and shackled the homeowner to, worth many times the cost of the actual house! That debt, which is pure profit, is sold to Americans as the "American Dream"; to work 30 years to pay the bankers many times what the house actually cost! (Some dream). Fortunes were being made and the politicians were neck deep in the greed. But there was a new wrinkle.

Click for larger image Starting in 2006, Wall Street operators got the ideas of taking debt obligations, and collecting them together to sell to other investors. The mortgage lenders would take their mortgages and "bundle" them, then sell the entire bundle for a flat fee. The advantage was that the mortgage lender recovered his money in a single large lump, while the investor buying the bundled mortgages would accept their return on investment over the lifetime of the mortgages. For long-term investors such as investment banks and pension funds, this was an ideal investment so long as all the mortgages were paid on time every month. The investment looked sound as long as real-estate prices kept soaring, and nobody was taking too close a look at the individual mortgages. Because the banks and mortgage companies were passing the mortgages onto outside parties, there was little incentive to look too closely at the borrowers, while financial incentives encouraged the mortgage writers to over-inflate earnings and home values on the applications to push the deals through. The mortgage bundlers, drunk on the instant profits falling like manna from heaven, started taking some reckless steps. Mortgage analysis companies like Clayton Holdings were reporting to the clients at the big banks that many of the so-called sub-prime mortgages did not meet basic underwriting requirements, either for the private banks or for the three "F"s, Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and FHA. But the mortgage bundlers blended the sub prime with prime mortgages and sold off the bundles as "Mortgage Backed Securities" or "Collateralized Debt Obligations". In other words, the mortgage bundlers knew many of the mortgages in those bundles were not going to perform well, but did not tell the investors who bought them, then invested in "derivatives", basically betting those MBS and CDOs would fail!

17. IT ISN'T THE FORECLOSURES, IT'S THE FRAUD! "I suddenly realized I had joined the wrong mob." -- Lucky Luciano, comparing Wall Street to the Mafia

Click for larger image The problem is that some of the mortgage bundlers were greedy! They needed more mortgages to feed the giant mortgagebacked-security bubble they were inflating. So they started luring in borrowers with borderline credit into "sub-prime" mortgages. Since members of the US Congress were invested in the very companies that were reaping giant profits on those mortgage-backed-securities, Congress voted through an $8000 tax credit for first-time home buyers to bait them into the scheme! But still there were not enough new mortgages. Investors were clamoring for more mortgage-backed-securities to buy. Then the bankers had an inspiration. They realized that while you can only sell a house to one owner at a time, you can in theory sell the mortgage over and over, since it is a piece of easily copied paper or more likely a computer record in MERS, the Mortgage Electronic Registration System, a computer system created to evade title transfer fees and to speed up the churning of the mortgages as they shuffled from one investment company to another! MERS initially helped conceal the over-selling of mortgages, but eventually the scam became known, and numerous major banks have been exposed for selling the same mortgage into multiple mortgage-backed securities, generating vast profits for the bundlers. Now, from the point of view of the mortgage bundlers, they might not have seen this as a fraud. Nobody wants to see themselves as a villain, and the bundlers may have decided they were simply following the reserve system of banking to the next level. Under the reserve system of banking, for every real dollar in deposits you have in the vaults, you can create and loan out 8, or 10, or 30, depending on the current reserve requirement imposed by the top bank, the Federal Reserve System. The mortgage bundlers may have decided that for every real mortgage they held, they could create 3, or 4 , or in one case 20 out of thin air with which to collateralize the investment package. As long as everyone does not come in to get the actual mortgages at the same time, the system would work the way the reserve money supply does in the banks, in which only enough real money is on hand to cover expected transactions with customers, and the rest for the bankers to play with out in investment land. While this "reserve" approach to mortgages may have looked okay to the bankers, who saw the world through moneycolored glasses, it is in fact a crime! In February 2009 CNBC broke the story that many of the mortgage bundlers had pledged individual mortgages as collateral over and over into different CDOs, when legally, they can be pledged as collateral only once. Watch the video:

Chris Whalen tells CNBC's Larry Kudlow that Bear Stearns will be exposed as having sold the same loan to different investors on numerous occasions. This is why many homes are being foreclosed on by more than one bank at a time.

Click for larger image But there is another problem with over-selling mortgages. For every copy of a mortgage bundled into an investment, there is an investor expecting a mortgage payment every month. Obviously the home buyer, who has signed only one mortgage, is making only one mortgage payment. For the extra copies of that mortgage there are no monthly payments coming in. As long as only a few mortgages in the bundle are underperforming, nobody noticed, but as the jobs left America and more and more home buyers started to fall behind, the risk that the over-selling scheme would be exposed to public scrutiny and condemnation (not to mention arrest and prosecution) began to be apparent!

18. MERS Because mortgages were changing hands so many times, the regulatory fees for a transfer became a major cost factor for the mortgage bundlers. To get around the fees and generally speed up the process, a system was created called the Mortgage Electronic Registration System, or MERS. All notes were transferred into MERS legal ownership and then could be assigned and reassigned willy-nilly all over the financial system without the usual paperwork and fees. By mid 2008 the wheels were starting to come off the boom times. The automatic interest rate increases on those adjustable-rate mortgages started kicking in, and due to the high prime-rate at the time, those increases in monthly payments were enormous, with no increases in salaries and wages to cover them! The US Government, at the same time it had taken the chains off of Wall Street had continued a policy of tax credits that encouraged American corporations to offshore high-paying manufacturing jobs. Caught between a rock and a hard place, between higher mortgage payments and declining wages and salaries, Americans started defaulting and the banks started foreclosing.

19. THE MELT-DOWN And here is where the system began to really break down. Because the mortgages and titles had been traded around in the creation of the mortgage-backed securities, the companies servicing the mortgages (i.e. collecting the payments) could not locate the actual mortgage note. In the cases where the same mortgage had been pledged as collateral on more than one mortgage-backed security, the paperwork trail led to more than one owner-of-record. By the end of the year, it had become apparent that a massive fraud had been committed by the mortgage bundlers, and that a great many of the mortgage-backed securities held by investors and pension funds were in fact without collateral.

While the mortgages were being paid and returns on the investment paid, nobody noticed. But as homes started to default it became apparent that investors did not in fact have any collateral behind most of those collateralized debt obligations! Lawsuits followed by investors trying to recover money from the banks. In a telling move, the US Government has moved to protect the banks!

Click for larger image

20. TARP AND THE BAILOUTS Those mortgage-backed securities with multiply-assigned mortgages ARE the "Toxic Assets" Congress was screaming about when they forced the Troubled Asset Relief Program through Congress in the fall of 2008, despite overwhelming public opposition. The mortgage bundlers had stuck key financial institutions with fraudulent mortgage-backed securities, and Congress voted to loot the public to purchase the useless paper and hide it from public scrutiny. Why? Because the members of the US Congress had their own fortunes invested in those fraudulent mortgage-backed securities. Had the institutions collapsed, members of Congress would have been ruined as well. So they saved their own investments by dropping the losses on the American people! This is why, even though the public opposed TARP, members of Congress were so happy when the bill finally was forced through the Congress.

Commercial real estate was caught up in the mortgage-backed securities mania, and eventually the US Government used $3 trillion in taxpayer funds to deal with that growing catastrophe!

In other cases, the Federal Government has been exposed as intentionally concealing the scale of the losses from the American taxpayer, even to the point of hiding billions in bailout payments, further fueling speculation that the major "Too Big To Fail" banks have indeed already failed and are technically insolvent. We are not talking about a few crooked bankers, but a system-wide culture of criminality that makes Bernie Madoff-withthe-loot, the NASDAQ founder who swindled his own investors for $65 billion, look like a choir boy! This brings us to the interesting sidebar of John McCain's candidacy for President. All seemed to be going well for him until in a move that surprised many political observers, McCain chose as his Vice President Alaska Governor Sarah Palin. McCain's claim that he needed a female Vice President seemed reasonable, but there were far more qualified women out there such as Hawaii's Governor Linda Lingle, who was not even contacted by McCain's campaign. In hindsight, it almost seemed McCain was intentionally destroying the credibility of his own campaign, and now a possible motive surfaces. If it was already known that the mortgage-back securities had become toxic assets, and that the taxpayer was going to be made to foot the bill, what better plan for the Republicans that had created the mess to drop the task of screwing the American people onto the Democrats, including a man willing to do anything to be America's first black President! And it appears to have worked as the same Republicans that created this financial mess appear poised for a mid-term return to control of the White House.

21. FORECLOSURE-GATE But while the US Government using taxpayer money was buying back the fraudulent uncollateralized mortgage bundles, the holders of the genuine mortgages were still faced with a problem. The trail of documents through MERS was a hopeless rats' nest! Mortgage Service companies were forced to go into court without all the required documents, and judges, failing to see the actual debt note or title before them,. were starting to throw foreclosure cases out! Representative Marcy Kaput got up in Congress advising homeowners to demand the foreclosers to prove they owned the actual loan! So a new creature came into being, the "Foreclosure Document Mill", small start-up companies which for a fee would "recreate" missing paperwork to allow the foreclosures to pass a judge's scrutiny. But the foreclosure mills were also faced with the confusion in the MERS system and under pressure to perform, were hiring virtually anybody willing to engage in a little "gray" paperwork, hiring Wall Mart floor walkers, former beauticians, factory workers, and putting them in offices with no formal training to process foreclosure paperwork. According to one whistle blower, workers who produced large amounts of "re-created" documents were rewarded with cars and jewelry! Computerized processing systems cranked out foreclosure lawsuit paperwork by the reams! The problem was that nobody was checking to see if the documents were actually correct or accurate, or if the people being foreclosed were actually behind in their payments. Even worse, lawyers were walking into court with foreclosure documents they knew were forged! The rush was on to file as quickly as possible ahead of the expected backlog of cases hitting the courts. In at least two known cases, foreclosure proceedings were started against home owners who did not even have mortgages! Companies that contracted to serve the legal papers on the homeowners never delivered those papers and many people were unaware they had been foreclosed on until the Sheriff showed up to change the locks!

22. INTENTIONAL FRAUD The corporate media is still trying to say this is all a bunch of simple errors for which nobody should be held accountable, but already testimony is surfacing that major banks like Citicorp knew exactly what they were doing and that very well the investments they were selling at huge profit were really junk! MERS itself has come under scrutiny, both because it is clearly a device to evade government fees and regulation, and secondly because no legislative body approved its creation and implementation into the home mortgage system. There has been no review of the system by any outside party. That massive fraud did take place is beyond doubt, and the US Government in connivance with the bankers, conspired both to conceal the true nature of the cause of the economic crash and to dump trillions in dollars in losses on the American

taxpayer. And behind it all remains the core problem that lenders and home-owners often do not know where the notes and titles are to be found! But with individual mortgages being sold out as many as 20 different times, the mortgage bundlers faced a huge problem. Every home payment made has to be repaid to the investor in the MBS for every time that mortgage was resold, that is to say for every dollar paid by the home-owner, the mortgage bundler is on the hook for up to $20 owed to the holders of the mortgage backed securities. In that context, the banks have a huge motive to foreclose on homes to limit the losses on those oversubscribed mortgage backed securities! Once the home is foreclosed, payments on those over-subscribed mortgage backed securities stop and the criminals who over-sold those mortgages are off the hook. It is not unlike the Mel Brooks movie "The Producers" in which the producers intentionally choose what they think is a terrible script, "Springtime for Hitler", which they hope will close the first night. The producers then over-subscribe the investment in the play by 1000%. 100% is spent producing the show, with the other 900% to be pocketed after the show fails and the investors, unaware of the extra shares in the show, accept their losses and leave. In the film, the play is a surprise hit and the producers go to jail. Hopefully, the same thing will happen to the financial companies who played the same game. If the over-selling of mortgages into mortgage backed securities was intentional, and given how many different financial companies did it, this seems certain, then the same financial institutions that profited from the selling of mortgage backed securities intended to crash the housing market to cover their escape. They took mortgages and sold them as mortgage-backed securities over and over again, then foreclosed the properties to end their obligations to the over-subscribed mortgage backed securities. This is why nobody cared whether home buyers were actually qualified for the mortgages, as the mortgages were never intended to be repaid, only foreclosed on! However, the investors and especially the foreign banks that bought those over-subscribed mortgage-backed-securities are not quietly accepting their losses! Bank of America is being sued by PIMCO, the New York Fed, and several European banks. Two class-action suits have been filed against the owners of MERS. Sooner or later the fraudulent over-selling of those bundled mortgages must come out. And the bankers will stand exposed as the criminals they really are.

23. SEARCHING FOR A WAY OUT So, how do we fix this mess? MERS is a Gordian Knot of trails between lender and borrower and holder of the titles. Sorting through the mess, even if possible, will take years both in the computer files and in the courts. The only solution I can think of (short of armed rebellion and guillotining the culprits) is rather drastic, and not even original with me. In Tom Clancy's book "Debt of Honor" a stock market crash is exacerbated when the computer systems used to track transactions are sabotaged. That seems a good metaphor for the runaway mortgage-backed Securities market compounded by MERS allowing (or fraudulent bankers causing) mortgages to be placed in multiple investment bundles. The inspiration in the book is a phrase heard often in science;"If you didn't write it down, it did not happen!" And in the book, the solution is to simply discard everything that happened after the last good record and restart the machinery at that point. The stock market re-opens with the last good trade before the computers were sabotaged and everybody goes home happy, eventually. Of course, real life will not be that simple. The mortgage bundlers have made fortunes off of these deals. If they can claim innocent victim of a computer error, then they will not be willing to surrender the fortunes they made; they will resist any solution that involves losing their profits, no matter how ill-gotten they may be. They are quite happy with the world as it is now. The Government will not, indeed cannot ever admit error, even though, like the Gulf Oil Disaster and the Bernie Madoff scandal, the government's job was to prevent this from happening, not bait more victims into the scam with a tax credit.But having swindled the American people out of trillions of dollars to buy back and conceal the fraudulent non-collateralized mortgage securities, the US Government is now clearly an accessory to the crime, if after-the-fact. The original fraud with the mortgage-backed securities was covered up ahead of the 2008 election, and it appears Obama is trying to do the same for the 2010 elections, announcing a Federal criminal investigation which will supposedly look into the bankers' possible illegal activity, but in reality is intended to block criminal investigations already underway in all 50 states. CNBC reports that

Congress may simply retro-actively declare the fraud to be legal, ending all investigations and indemnifying the bankers from criminal prosecutions. That the relentless looting of the public treasury to cover-up this disaster has harmed the nation is beyond doubt. Trillions that might have paid for new schools and roads and hospitals has vanished into the black hole of Wall Street, to buy up bad paper and feed it to the shredder before the public finds out that once again, as is typical of a fascist economy, the poor are made to pay for all! People without mortgages, people who have never bought a home, are all harmed by this disaster. We are all victims of the rampant and reckless greed that consumes the money addicts in the halls of power. 43 million Americans are on food Stamps, and according to Barron's Magazine (October 11, 2010), unemployment is at 22%, which is depression levels. Meanwhile, Wall Street executives will collect bonuses this year totaling 8% of all the US cash in circulation! Ultimately, the homes taken by MERS must be restored to their rightful owners. The people who bought what they thought were honestly foreclosed homes in good faith must of course be compensated and provided with equivalent properties. Beyond that, it is time to take a close look at the true nature of banks, especially the Federal Reserve, and to understand that banks do not serve the public, they serve only themselves!

Watch The Forgotten Man - Jon McNaughton at

"I believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. If the American people ever allow private banks to control the issue of their currency, first by inflation, then by deflation, the banks and corporations that will grow up around [the banks] will deprive the people of all property until their children wake-up homeless on the continent their fathers conquered. The issuing power should be taken from the banks and restored to the people, to whom it properly belongs." Thomas Jefferson, (Attributed) 3rd president of US (1743 - 1826)

Watch: Wall Street: Conspiracy Theory with Jesse Ventura Conspiracy Theory with Jesse Ventura • Clickable Episode Guide → Pentagon • Gulf Oil Spill • Great Lakes • JFK Assassination • Police State • Wall Street • Area 51 • Plum Island • Apocalypse 2012 • Manchurian Candidate • Secret Societies • Big Brother • Global Warming • 9/11 • HAARP PLAYLIST FOR ALL EPISODES:

The Essence Of The Banking Industry... RalleyWolf | September 13, 2009

The very essence of the banking system. To make us all slaves to debt. Those who control the debt, control everything.

Cold Fusion: A Story of Suppressed Technology Proponents Ridiculed by Official Science Destroyed & Silenced This documentary was produced as an episode of the US TV series "Phenomenon: The Lost Archives" and it originally aired in 2000, the last year a TV series like that could likely get made. It tells a vile story of large-scale corruption in science and the personal destruction of an accomplished American scientist, who has since forfeited his US citizenship and become a national of France. His elder work partner had a more deadpanned response: "People were telling us, 'What are you trying to do? Break the laws of nuclear physics?' And that's exactly what we were doing and succeeding, you see." Ten years have come and gone since this show aired and 21 years since Pons & Fleischmann offered their discovery to the world. We've heard a lot more about the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan in the intervening years than we have about cold fusion.


Thanks very much for this article by Peter Byrne. It tends to confirm much of what Walter Burien told me last July about the UC Regents and CalPERS. All the while that Schwarzenegger was cutting California State workers' pay, scape-goating state workers for the so-called "budget deficit," he has been helping himself to state workers pension funds -- sharing in the enormous, hidden profits of back-door investments of those funds. This is a huge conspiracy and it is real. These scum are not only criminals and war profiteers; the larceny by which they enrich their private coffers also serves the elites' larger missions of eternal war and destruction of the middle class. - Bob WATCH WALTER BURIENâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;S "The Only Game in Town" - The Way Our Government Can Be!

The regents club Conflicts of interest are nothing new at the University of California, but they may be getting worse. By Peter Byrne This article was published on 10.07.10.

Last fall, amid an unprecedented state budget crisis, the University of California Board of Regents took extraordinary measures to cut costs and generate revenue. Lecturers were furloughed, classes eliminated. The regents—governing body for the vast public university system—also reduced admissions for in-state students while increasing the cost for out-of-state students. And to the consternation of tens of thousands of students, the regents raised undergraduate tuition by a whopping 32 percent, with more hikes to come. It now costs about $30,000 per year to attend the UC system as an undergraduate, including tuition and expenses. Even with student aid, it‘s a sum beyond the means of many students and their families. But while education is taking a beating, this investigation reveals that some members of the board of regents have benefited from the placement of hundreds of millions of university dollars into investments, private deals and publicly held enterprises with significant ties to their own personal business activities. Conflicts of interest have arisen because some members of the regents‘ investment committee, individuals who are also Wall Street heavy hitters, modified long-standing UC investment policies. Specifically, they steered away from investing in more traditional instruments, such as blue-chip stocks and bonds, toward largely unregulated and risky ― alternative‖ investments, such as private equity and private real-estate deals. The activities of two regents in particular—Richard C. Blum, financier and husband to Sen. Dianne Feinstein, and fellow financier Paul Wachter—are spotlighted. (― Students strike back,‖ an SN&R story in this series from February 18, detailed Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger‘s conflicts of interest as an ex officio regent who sits on the investment committee.) State Sen. Leland Yee (D-San Francisco) was asked to review the findings of this investigation prior to publication. ― These are amazing conflicts of interest,‖ he concluded. ― They happened after the UC Regents‘ investment committee drastically changed policy away from investing in fixed-income securities and into risky private equity buyout funds—thus enriching several regents with ties to those funds.‖ Other ethics experts agreed. Robert Weissman, president of Public Citizen, the liberal good-government advocacy group based in Washington, D.C., was also appraised of the findings of this investigation prior to publication. ― A third-grader can see that what the regents on the investment committee are doing is unethical,‖ he said. ― It goes far beyond the ‗appearance‘ of a conflict of interest. These are core conflicts of interest.‖

Richard C. Blum, financier and husband to Sen. Dianne Feinstein, serves on the UC regent’s Investment Committee. Allegations of conflict of interest have arisen because, during his tenure, UC has invested hundreds of millions of dollars where Blum had concurrent business interests. PHOTO BY MONICA JENSEN This is the last in a series of reports sponsored by the community-based journalism website and partially funded by SN&R. For a link to the full report, go to is a nonprofit, open-source project of the Center for Media Change and a pioneer in the realm of microfinanced journalism and “community powered reporting.” Peter Byrne is an investigative reporter and science writer Related stories this week: Three for the file Financial dossiers on a few UC regents point to conflict potential. Related stories: Billion-dollar baby The University of California invests $53 million in two diploma mills largely owned by a regent. Problem? SN&R, 06.24.10.

A history of conflict The regents are—and always have been—a fabulously politicized body. On June 23, 1974, the Los Angeles Times published an investigation titled ― UC Regents: An Elite Club That Runs a Vast University.‖ The story revealed that many of the regents were millionaires with little or no background in education policy. Most had plenty of experience leveraging political connections for pecuniary gain. This wealthy group of socialites, lawyers, oil men and industrialists was out of touch with students and the common people, the Times observed: ―T hey drive fine cars and own boats and airplanes. They belong to the best clubs and play tennis on their own private courts.‖ And in their dealings with each other, ― The camaraderie and gentility of a private club are maintained. … Most regents consider it bad form to discuss their finances.‖ In the past half-century, the financial pedigrees of many regents have created particular challenges for avoiding conflicts of interest. In 1965, free-speech movement activist Marvin Garson responded to a call by the California Federation of Teachers to ― investigate the composition and operation of the Board of Regents.‖ He produced a welldocumented study noting that, ― taken as a group, the Regents are representatives of only one thing—corporate wealth.‖ In 1970, the California state auditor found that regent Edwin W. Pauley, owner of Pauley Petroleum, had personally profited when university officials steered $10.7 million dollars into one of his company‘s business deals. Following this and other revelations, the regents passed a conflict-of-interest policy prohibiting university officials from ― making personal gain out of university transactions.‖ The regents were also increasingly bound by state laws enacted to monitor the ethical behavior of public officials. In 1972, voters passed a statewide proposition requiring open meetings of public bodies, which includes the regents. And two years later came the California Political Reform Act of 1974, which prohibits public officials from even the appearance of using their position to influence governmental decisions that might be personally beneficial. To increase transparency and accountability, each regent must now file an annual economic disclosure report listing his or her assets in California. Notwithstanding these safeguards, conflicts of interest continued to arise: • In 1978, the state auditor found that UC was improperly investing in a corporation that included a regent on its board of directors. • In the early 1990s, the state auditor reported that some regents were improperly availing themselves of lavish travel and entertainment allowances. This audit unleashed a storm of public outrage, since the regents had simultaneously raised tuition. • In the mid-2000s, a series of media exposés were published concerning a variety of problems at UC, including excessive salaries and benefits for UC administrators; the regents‘ mismanagement of the nation‘s nuclear laboratories; and the hiring of an investment firm (Wilshire Associates) with business connections to then-regent Gerald Parsky, a financier. Today, UC‘s current operating budget is $20 billion. The various endowment and retirement funds totaled $63 billion at the end of 2009. With such an enormous amount of public funds in play, the regents are bound to meticulously adhere to state laws and university policies that prohibit self-dealing. It is incumbent upon those individuals who are charged with overseeing the UC pension and endowment funds to avoid influencing or voting on investment decisions that potentially, actually or even appear to affect their personal business affairs. Many members of the current crop of regents have failed to consistently hold themselves to these ethical standards—especially when it comes to private equity investments.

The private equity fiasco Private equity investing is attractive to sophisticated investors and large institutions because it has the potential for large returns. But unlike deals that take place on public stock exchanges—where sales and purchases are public information and regulated by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission—the realm of private equity is opaque, largely unregulated and extremely difficult to exit should a deal go bad.

UC students across California protested last spring when the regents raised undergraduate tuition by a whopping 32 percent. PHOTO BY DAVID COHN

It was 2003 when regents Blum, Wachter and Parsky, who left the board in 2008, consolidated control of UC‘s investment strategy. Bypassing the university treasurer‘s in-house investment specialists, the regents investment committee hired private managers to handle many of these new kinds of transactions. This action increased management costs and limited transparency (since these external managers are not subject to public record laws). Soon, the amount of money placed in private equity had more than tripled, and by March 2009, the university‘s books carried a balance of $6.7 billion in 212 private equity partnerships, which consist primarily of leveraged buyout funds—more than 10 percent of the investment fund total of $63 billion. These have not proven to be prudent investments.

UC‘s private equity returns, as of spring 2009, were running at a negative 20 percent since the inception of the investment, according to the treasurer‘s most recent annual report. According to operating reports made to the investment committee by the current UC treasurer, Marie Berggren, much of the loss to the portfolio was tied to the souring of leveraged buyouts during the recession. In a leveraged buyout, private equity firms act as a ― general partner‖ by arranging private investment opportunities to purchase companies or real estate. The general partner finds ― limited partners‖—typically institutions, pension funds or wealthy individuals—to invest in that fund. (The limited partners have little or no say in how the fund operates, since it is being managed by the general partner.) The capital provided by the limited partners is used as a down payment for the purchase, and a large bank loan covers the remainder of the sale price. Although leveraged buyouts can be lucrative for both the limited and general partners, the buyout can also take on a predatory quality. In this scenario, the limited partners have the most to lose. Here‘s how the darker version of these deals go down: Once a company has been acquired, the investors can offload the responsibility for paying back the large bank loan onto the company itself. At the same time, the new owners can strip the acquired company of cash and other valuable assets to pay dividends to the general partners. Looted companies often collapse from a lack of operating capital brought about by trying to pay off the combination of the unsustainable debt burden and the dividend payouts. Collapse can cause the limited partners to lose their entire investment. The private equity firm‘s general partners may survive because they can charge their investors management fees regardless of a deal‘s outcome. While less predatory leveraged buyout acquisitions can certainly benefit both the acquired company and all of its investors, the companies involved in the UC deals discussed in this story, for the most part, do not fall into the beneficial category.

In 2009, Berggren reported that the average annual ―inter nal rate of return‖ for the retirement plan‘s private equity portfolio since 1979 was a mere 1.8 percent. But fixed-income investments had generated an average annual rate of return of 6 percent over a similar period. The only sector of the portfolio that fared worse than private equity was private real estate. After the financiers took control of the investment committee, the university‘s allocation to private real-estate deals increased from nearly zero to $4.5 billion in less than a decade. By mid-2009, the private real-estate portfolio had lost an astonishing 40 percent of its value. Nonetheless, this notable shift in strategy toward alternative investments—leveraged buyouts, in particular—has had clear benefits for individual regents. And good government experts question the ethics of these investments. ― The investment committee‘s act of increasing UC‘s allocation to private equity was an extraordinary conflict of interest,‖ said Public Citizen‘s Weissman. ― Some of these regents obviously had vested interests.‖

Throwing good money after bad The private equity losses should not have surprised the regents. In 2008, Berggren stated in her annual report to the investment committee that private equity and private real-estate investments were ― overweighted‖ relative to other financial vehicles during the boom years. She also noted that the regents‘ preference for private investment was disproportionately impacting UC during the economic recession. Amazingly, in the face of the disastrous performance of private equity and private real estate, Wachter and Blum have continued to advise Berggren to increase UC‘s investments in these two ailing sectors. At the February 2009 meeting of the regents‘ investment committee, Wachter, then the committee chair, observed that although private equity and real-estate investments were already ― overweighted‖ in the portfolio, they should be ― even more overweighted.‖ At an investment committee meeting three months later, Blum, who was then the chairman of the board of regents, urged his colleagues to continue on the same questionable course. According to the meeting minutes, ―Cha irman Blum expressed concern that the University might become too risk adverse.‖ At the same meeting, Wachter suggested that UC buy bundles of distressed real-estate and mortgage debt to profit off of the collapse of the housing market. (Though a matter of continued debate, experts say such investments are a risky undertaking, since another wave of home foreclosures is expected.) Recently, Wachter has championed increasing the volume of UC‘s investments in risky timber and oil ventures. But the entire investment committee is not in lock step with Wachter‘s and Blum‘s predilection for alternative investments. Regent George Marcus, a real-estate executive who sits on the committee, has consistently opposed them. In a March 2010 meeting, he described this strategy of overemphasizing private equity as the equivalent to ― gambling in Las Vegas.‖ Blum would not respond to repeated written requests for comment. In an e-mailed statement, Berggren‘s spokeswoman Lynn Tierney said, ― It‘s misguided to assume that there‘s a conflict of interest simply because there‘s an overlap between personal investments by University of California Regents and investments made by the UC Treasurer‘s Office. The real issue is whether Regents communicate with the Treasurer‘s office about specific investments.‖

Anatomy offers deals Blum Capital, based in San Francisco, handles a $2 billion portfolio. Regent Blum is the chairman of the investment firm‘s board. He is also a principal executive and an owner of Fort Worth‘s $45 billion private equity firm, TPG Capital, which has a history of partnering with a New York-based private equity firm called Apollo Management. Wachter, meanwhile, has disclosed multimillion-dollar holdings in a range of Apollo Management funds. During Blum and Wachter‘s seven-year tenures on the regents‘ investment committee, UC has invested nearly $750 million in private equity deals involving Apollo Management, Blum Capital Partners and TPG Capital. Several of these deals received contributions from the California Public Employees‘ Retirement System, the country‘s largest public pension fund, for which Blum Capital Partners is a paid investment adviser.

A protester gets ready in Sacramento’s Southside Park to head to the Capitol for the final leg of last spring’s 48-day March for California’s Future. Protesters hoped to spotlight the state of California’s cashstrapped education system, including at the UC level.

What follows are summaries of just a few cases in which UC had invested and where Blum had concurrent business interests; one of PHOTO BY WES DAVIS these deals (Harrah‘s Entertainment) involved Wachter.

These facts were ascertained from reviewing thousands of pages of U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission filings, commercial databases, UC public records and press accounts.

1. Harrah‘s Entertainment Las Vegas, Nevada

The company: Harrah‘s Entertainment operates 52 casinos in seven countries. The deal: In 2008, investment firms TPG Capital, Apollo Management and The Blackstone Group partnered in a leveraged buyout of Harrah‘s for $30.7 billion. The Blum connection: In 2008, Blum disclosed investments worth ― over $1 million‖ in various TPG funds (including funds named TPG IV and TPG V). He was also a TPG Capital owner and executive. The Wachter connection: Since becoming a regent, Wachter has disclosed investments worth ― up to $1 million‖ in two Apollo investment funds (Apollo VI and VII) that provided capital to the Harrah‘s deal. UC‘s investment: At the time of the Harrah‘s transaction, UC had $75 million invested in the same two Apollo Management funds in which Wachter was invested and which were themselves invested in the Harrah‘s deal. During that period, UC also held $4.1 million in two TPG Capital funds, including one that helped finance the Harrah‘s deal (TPG V). The investments in the TPG funds were made by several UC campus endowment foundations overseen by the regents while Blum—a TPG Capital executive who was himself invested in the Harrah‘s deal (via TPG V)—served on the regents‘ investment committee. UC also had $120 million invested with a private equity fund run by The Blackstone Group (Blackstone Capital Partners V), which participated heavily in the Harrah‘s buyout.

In total, UC‘s general endowment and retirement funds committed $200 million to four private equity funds that financed the Harrah‘s buyout, a deal in which Blum and Wachter each had significant financial interests. The fallout: Since the buyout, Harrah‘s has hemorrhaged capital due to the overall decline of the gambling industry amid the global recession. Its ability to generate enough cash to pay back limited partner investors such as UC has been hampered by the $12.4 billion acquisition debt that Apollo Management, TPG Capital and The Blackstone Group placed on the books of the casino empire after acquiring it. UC‘s investment in the private equity funds that participated in the Harrah‘s deal had lost up to 40 percent of their value as of March 2009.

2. Washington Mutual Seattle, Washington

First American Corporation (now CoreLogic) Santa Ana, California

The companies: Before its acquisition by New York‘s JPMorgan Chase, Washington Mutual was one of the country‘s largest banks. In the fall of 2007, it stunned investors by declaring a loss of ILLUSTRATION BY JASON CROSBY several billion dollars in the sub-prime housing market. Simultaneously, the New York attorney general sued a title company, First American Corporation, for conspiring with WaMu to inflate real-estate appraisals. The price of WaMu and First American stock fell through the floor. The deal: In June 2008, in a major miscalculation of risk factors, TPG Capital bought a $7 billion stake in WaMu, becoming its largest shareholder. The Blum connection: Blum participated in the WaMu investment through an interlocking series of TPG Capital funds (including TPG V and a related fund named Olympic Investment Partners). Blum Capital Partners also invested heavily in First American shares when the price plummeted following the allegations of appraisal collusion. UC‘s investment: In 2008, the UC Berkeley campus endowment fund invested $4.1 million in two TPG Capital funds that financed the WaMu deal (TPG V and TPG VI). UC retirement fund managers made a bad bet by increasing their stake in WaMu bonds sevenfold, from $31 million in 2006 to $215 million by the end of 2007. Through its external managers, UC also purchased First American stock when its share price fell, putting $7 million into the failing company by the end of 2009. The fallout: The Federal Deposit Insurance Commission seized WaMu in September 2008, selling its assets on the cheap to JPMorgan Chase. Stockholders were wiped out. TPG Capital is reported to have suffered a loss of $1.3 billion, which would likely negatively affect the fund that UC had invested in (TPG V), although this information is not public. By the end of 2008, the value of UC‘s investment in WaMu bonds had declined by $48 million. First American continues to struggle financially and in the courts.

3. Univision Communications New York, New York

The company: Univision Communications is the dominant Spanish-language media company in the United States, operating 62 television stations and 69 radio stations.

The deal: In March 2007, a consortium of five private equity investment companies led by a former UC regent named Haim Saban acquired Univision Communications in a $13.7 billion leveraged buyout. The private equity investors were Saban Capital Group, TPG Capital, Madison Dearborn Partners, Providence Equity Partners and Thomas H. Lee Partners. The Blum connection: Blum participated in the Univision deal through his investments in two TPG Capital funds (TPG IV and TPG V). His spouse, Sen. Dianne Feinstein, disclosed Univision as an asset in 2007. Blum also maintained a financial interest in the deal by virtue of being a principal executive and owner of TPG Capital. UC‘s investment: A member of the UC investment committee, Saban resigned as a regent in 2004. Saban then put together the Univision deal. During the acquisition, UC campus endowment funds had invested $4.1 million in two relevant TPG Capital funds (TPG IV and TPG V). Additionally, UC had invested $150 million in the two Madison Dearborn funds that financed the Univision buyout (Madison Dearborn IV and Madison Dearborn V). The fallout: Following the buyout, Univision‘s new owners—including TPG Capital and Apollo Management— placed the $10 billion debt from the buyout on the company‘s balance sheet, creating a financial burden. The value of UC‘s investment in one Madison Dearborn fund decreased by 17 percent as of the spring of 2009, while the other showed a gain of 18 percent. Apollo Management and TPG Capital collectively charged its investors, including UC, a $200 million transaction fee for managing the deal.

4. Glenborough Realty Trust San Mateo, California

The deal: Glenborough Realty Trust was sold to Morgan Stanley Real Estate in a $1.8 billion leveraged buyout that took the company private in November 2006. UC‘s investment: UC invested $42 million in the Morgan Stanley private equity investment fund that bought Glenborough. The Blum connection: In addition to his executive position with the global real-estate giant, CB Richard Ellis, Blum‘s business interests include the purchase and sale of real-estate companies for his personal portfolio. At the time the Glenborough deal was approved by UC, Blum owned Glenborough stock worth about $2.5 million, and he sat on the company‘s board of directors. The SEC disclosure statements filed by the real-estate company prior to the sale show that as a member of its board of directors, Blum would see direct financial benefit if UC invested in the Morgan Stanley fund that financed the buyout. Details of the deal: Glenborough owned scores of high-end office buildings in a half-dozen major cities, including San Francisco. Private equity suitors regularly came calling on the Glenborough board of directors, hoping to buy the profitable company. Morgan Stanley won Glenborough‘s hand with a $1.9 billion offer via one of its private equity investment funds (MSREF V). Public records show that before the sale, UC held $8 million in this Morgan Stanley fund. After the sale of Glenborough was announced, UC increased this amount by $34 million, for a total investment of $42 million. The Morgan Stanley fund put up a cash payment of $325 million to realize the Glenborough deal (UC‘s contribution, via the Morgan Stanley investment fund, was equivalent to 13 percent of the cash that was made as a down payment). The majority of the remaining $1.8 billion purchase price was leveraged by a loan from Deutsche Bank Securities. The original members of the Glenborough board of directors, including Blum, sold their stock at a premium price. Fallout: Glenborough was saddled with a tremendous debt load from the acquisition, and it struggled mightily to meet the loan obligation. The deal turned out to be a bad investment for UC. By the end of 2009, due to the collapse

of the real-estate market and the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2DC;s debt burden, the value of UCâ&#x20AC;&#x2DC;s investment in the Morgan Stanley fund had plummeted to $3.5 million, recording an apparent loss of $38.5 million.

Watch: The American Dream by the Provocateur Network westiesworld4u | January 02, 2011 | The AMERICAN DREAM is a 30 minute animated film that shows you how you've been scammed by the most basic elements of our government system. All of us Americans strive for the American Dream, and this film shows you why your dream is getting farther and farther away. Do you know how your money is created? Or how banking works? Why did housing prices skyrocket and then plunge? Do you really know what the Federal Reserve System is and how it affects you every single day? THE AMERICAN DREAM takes an entertaining but hard hitting look at how the problems we have today are nothing new, and why leaders throughout our history have warned us and fought against the current type of financial system we have in America today. You will be challenged to investigate some very entrenched and powerful institutions in this nation, and hopefully encouraged to help get our nation back on track. The video creators understand that how the monetary system works can be very confusing to some and have done a brilliant job in explaining how the whole system is set up to keep you forever in debt. This is not what the original founding fathers of America had in mind. Also, this is not just an American problem. It's the same scam in nearly all countries around the world!! Buy the high quality video from the website, Watch the video:

Let’s Reclaim History As We Go Into 2011, And The Unknown Future Saman Mohammadi Truth Excavator December 29, 2010 We’re led to believe that the United States government is a positive force in the world but this is not true. I’m not saying it couldn’t be in the future, in fact, once there is a regime change in Washington, America will become the greatest country in the world again, but as it is now, the deceitful and manipulative leaders in the CIA, the Federal Reserve, the White House, the State Department, and the Pentagon are the most destructive force in the world, and pose the greatest existential threat to human civilization, and world peace. This is not the American government that the American people elected. This is not an American government that the American people elected. It is not a government at all. It is a gang. And this gang which runs Washington is bipartisan, unethical, and treasonous. They are engaged in a grand conspiracy against freedom, peace, America, and the world. No doubt, if the true defenders of freedom and peace emerge victorious against this criminal gang, there will be public executions on Pennsylvania Avenue in the decade ahead. All this is overwhelming, and scary. Nevertheless, it is true. The historical reality that the world must learn to accept, especially the American people, is that the American government was hijacked from the inside by right-wing fascists and oligarchs over the course of many decades, starting in 1913 with the creation of the private Federal Reserve Bank that has the monopoly of credit, followed by the establishment of the National Security State in 1947, the history-changing assassination of President John F. Kennedy in 1963, and finally, the government-engineered attacks on September 11, 2001. These four events stand out in my mind as the major turning points in the last hundred years of American history. What was once a great and mighty constitutional republic was transformed into a dictatorship, a global killing machine, the bully of the world, all the while posing as the white-hat defender of democracy and freedom. This new history is not all that hard to come to terms with after we take some essential first steps into topics like the JFK assassination and the 9/11 truth movement. Learning about new spheres of knowledge, history, and reality is similar to discovering new lands. Both are journeys into the unknown. Pioneers of thought and discoverers of previously uninhabited places share a lot of qualities with each other. Both take a great risk with their whole being, not just their reputation, and once they’re successful in their exploration of new ideas and new lands they give something new to humanity. As a culture we have lost knowledge about the substance of history, who shapes history, who tells it, and why they tell it a certain way. Winston Churchill said “History is written by the victors.” Victors can be whole nations, or they can be certain factions within a particular nation like oligarchs, industrialists, and financiers, or the people at large. When America won WWII, American soldiers received new homes and new loans to go to school, but American oligarchs got an empire. Who was the true victor, then? Obviously, it was not the American people. They were lied to a generation later by their highest ranking leaders about a new war in Vietnam that didn’t need to be fought. Such grand deceit and government lies about war has been part of American politics from World War II up to now. If we want to recapture the history of the last century we must realize that history is not a sequence of events that proceed

unrelated and unconnected. History is cause and effect. The murder of John F. Kennedy meant the war in Vietnam could be expanded, and the CIA would remain intact and powerful enough to influence world events. That is how history flows. What matters is not popular vote, but the perception of any given event, and the understanding of history. History is full of visionaries like JFK, Martin Luther King Jr, and Robert F. Kennedy who are killed by the status quo of their era. Understanding why these three men were killed is not rocket science. They were the true voices of freedom and peace, and because of their influence in society and capability to sway public opinion they were assassinated. History is filled with the dreams of oligarchs, populists, radicals, psychopaths, revolutionaries, visionaries, and peacemakers. Sometimes men of good will triumph, and sometimes they don’t. In one era people witness the birth of a new nation, and in another era people witness revolutions, coups, and other kinds of national transformations. Once more in history the American people must throw off tyranny’s chains. Unlike before, tyranny is coming in the form of a transnational police state, and its chains are spread out across the Atlantic, binding both Europe and North America in slavery. The main justification behind this police state is that all Western nations face the threat of terrorism. But this is a false justification. The War on Terror is in reality a War on Citizens. 9/11 was not done by Al-Qaeda, but by leaders in the United States government, and the Israeli government. The Bush administration simplistically portrayed the new global fight against terrorism that was sparked by the government staged 9/11 attacks as “Us vs. Them” – us representing the forces of civilization, and them, identified as stateless terrorists and states that sponsor terrorism, representing the forces of barbarism and savagery. But people knew this picture of reality wasn’t true even in the immediate moments after the attacks happened. Critics of the new War on Terror paradigm pointed to U.S. militarism abroad, and the CIA’s legacy of overthrowing democratically elected leaders as evidence that the United States government is not innocent. But the truth about the origins of the War on Terror, and the 9/11 attacks go much deeper. The truth about 9/11 shows that the psychopathic individuals who control U.S. foreign policy, and their equally criminal partners in Israel and England, are the greatest source of terror and conflict in the world. The hardliners in Iran come after the Washington-Tel Aviv-London Axis on the list of the biggest existential threats to humanity and civilization, but there’s a big gap in between them. The only hope for peace in the world is regime change in Washington, London, and Tel Aviv, not Tehran. Of course, regime change in all four countries would be the best outcome. Make no mistake, we are all in the fight for human civilization and the destiny of humanity, but the biggest forces of barbarism that we must oppose are not in Afghanistan, Pakistan, or Iran, but in Washington, Tel Aviv, London, Ottawa, and Melbourne. The War on Terrorism that is being waged by Western governments is a criminal war and anybody who continues to defend it will become spiritually and morally bankrupt. Waking up to this new history is paralyzing at first, but it is better to be awake then to continue to live in a vegetative state, believing a false reality. As a result of this new political awakening, we are all feeling individually and collectively what Franz Kafka felt in the beginning of the last century, the feeling of a “seasickness on dry land.” I think it is a good feeling because it’s good to be aware that something isn’t right, that something must be addressed, and repaired. Better to feel this than to feel nothing, or to feel the wrong thing like when those crowds in Washington experienced jubilation after the crooked, selfserving Barack Obama was declared the new President. Suppressing true emotion and real knowledge is not good. Sometimes we need to go through a dark night of the soul, both individually and collectively. We will come out stronger. Our lives will be better. And we will pass on a brighter future to those who will come after us.

Refusing to face a crisis doesn’t make the crisis go away. John F. Kennedy knew he had to face the Cuban Missile Crisis from a sober and independent standpoint and come to his own conclusions rather than trust the information given to him by his military and intelligence advisers who had another agenda than that of peace. President Kennedy was a true leader, in the tradition of Washington and Lincoln, and his death was a great loss, but the loss of history is even greater. We must remember what he did, and why he did it. He did it for us, not just America, but for all of humanity. Author and peace activist James W. Douglass has done an unbelievable job in reclaiming history, and preserving John F. Kennedy’s flame. His book, “JFK And The Unspeakable: Why He Died And Why It Matters,” must be read by all who are interested in reclaiming history. “The story of why John Kennedy died encircles the earth. Because JFK chose peace on earth at the height of the Cold War, he was executed. But because he turned toward peace, in spite of the consequences to himself, humanity is still alive and struggling. That is hopeful, especially if we understand what he went through and what he has given us as his vision. At the climax of his presidency in the missile crisis, John Kennedy turned a corner. Although JFK was already in conflict with his national security managers, the missile crisis was the breaking point. At that most critical moment for us all, he turned from the remaining control his security managers had over him toward a deeper ethic, a deeper vision in which the fate of the earth became his priority. Without losing sight of our own best hopes in this country, he began to home in, with his new partner, Nikita Khrushchev, on the hope of peace for everyone on this earth–Russians, Americans, Cubans, Vietnamese, Indonesians, everyone–no exception. He made that commitment to life at the cost of his own. What a transforming story that is. And what a propaganda campaign has been waged to keep us Americans from understanding that story, from telling it, and from re-telling it to our children and grandchildren. Because that’s a story whose telling can transform a nation. But when a nation is under the continuing domination of an idol, namely war, it is a story that will be covered up. When the story can liberate us from our idolatry of war, then the worshippers of the idol are going to do everything they can to keep the story from being told. From the standpoint of a belief that war is the ultimate power, that’s too dangerous a story. It’s a subversive story. It shows a different kind of security than always being ready to go to war. It’s unbelievable–or we’re supposed to think it is–that a president was murdered by our own government agencies because he was seeking a more stable peace than relying on nuclear weapons. It’s unspeakable. For the sake of a nation that must always be preparing for war, that story must not be told. If it were, we might learn that peace is possible without making war. We might even learn there is a force more powerful than war. How unthinkable! But how necessary if life on earth is to continue. That is why it is so hopeful for us to confront the unspeakable and to tell the transforming story of a man of courage, President John F. Kennedy. It is a story ultimately not of death but of life–all our lives. In the end, it is not so much a story of one man as it is a story of peacemaking when the chips are down. That story is our story, a story of hope.” – James W. Douglass. (2008). JFK And The Unspeakable: Why He Died And Why It Matters. New York: Simon & Schuster. Pg. 384 – 385. The quote is an excerpt from the Afterword, written on January 6, 2010, that appears in the paperback version of the book.

Tax Exempt Foundations and Think Tanks: The Process of Invisible Power Old-Thinker News | December 11, 2010 By Daniel Taylor

―Philanthropy is the essential element in the making of Rockefeller power. It gives the Rockefellers a priceless reputation as public benefactors which the public values so highly that power over public affairs is placed in the Rockefellers‟ hands. Philanthropy generates more power than wealth alone can provide.‖ – Myer Kutz Rockefeller Power (1974)

Some have suggested that the large foundations are monopolizing development. The hidden influence of tax-exempt foundations and think tanks in the halls of power has dramatically impacted our society, and in turn the world. The Rockefeller dynasty paved the way for eugenics in 20th Century America and heavily influenced the education system. Now Bill Gates‘ various philanthropic institutions are impacting the globe, with a new initiative promising to make the next several years the ―Decade of vaccines―. These institutions are impacting the globe to such an extent that some have suggested that the large foundations are monopolizing development. The United States has seen a shift of power to individuals who have been called ―action intellectuals‖. Who‘s agenda are they serving? We didn‘t elect these individuals, but large foundations are functioning like national governments. The United Kingdom‘s Ministry of Defense has picked up on this trend in its Strategic Trends program. The MoD‘s Global Strategic Trends – Out to 2040 document foresees ―…the emergence of a global elite, a powerful network of individuals and institutions that sits above the level of individual states and influences the global agenda…‖ Our health, society and future are all impacted by these elites. Who are they? What agenda are they pursuing? A look back… The U.S. Congress first investigated the activities of the large foundations in 1915 under the Commission on Industrial Relations. The Commission found that, ―The domination by the men in whose hands the final control of a large part of American industry rests is not limited to their employees, but is being rapidly extended to control the education and social survival of the nation. This control is being extended largely through the creation of enormous privately managed funds for indefinite purposes, hereafter designated ―foundations‖, by the

endowment of colleges and universities, by the creation of funds for the pensioning of teachers, by contributions to private charities, as well as through controlling or influencing the public press…‖ Again in 1953 the Reece Committee found that tax-exempt foundations were wielding an unprecedented amount of influence over American society, including the education system. Norman Dodd served as the chief director of research for the Committee. In the monumental interview below, Dodd outlines what he found: Watch the video: Foundations serve another, much less discussed purpose. The wealth of the individuals who own the large foundations is protected from taxation. The Rockefeller Foundation was conveniently founded in 1913, the same year that the income tax was ratified. John D. Rockefeller Sr. pioneered this art of so called ―scientific giving‖, and modern day philanthropists have followed in his footsteps. When John D‘s public image became tarnished by his notoriously ruthless nature in his business dealings, he hired the PR man named Ivy Lee. Lee suggested that Rockefeller begin giving away his wealth, and give it away he did; with strings attached. Gary Allen explains in The Rockefeller File, ―He [Rockefeller] would ―give‖ money away to foundations under his control and then have those foundations spend the money in ways which brought even more power and profits to the Rockefeller empire. The money ―given‖ away would be bread cast upon the waters. But bread that always had a hook in it. John D. Jr. was to refer to this as the ―principle of scientific giving.‖ The influence of large foundations on American society is documented by Dr. Lily E. Kay in her book The Molecular Vision of Life: Caltech, the Rockefeller Foundation, and the Rise of the New Biology. Kay writes, ―Their numerous projects and the unprecedented scope of their financial and institutional resources shaped the development of culture and the production of knowledge in the United States. Through education, public opinion, stimulation of specific research agenda, and the promotion of selective categories of knowledge and research, the Foundation played a key role in the creation of a hegemonic bloc…‖ Foundations Today In May of 2009 several top philanthropists met at the home of Sir Paul Nurse, president of Rockefeller University. David Rockefeller Jr, Bill Gates, Warren Buffett, George Soros, Michael Bloomberg, Ted Turner and Oprah Winfrey were all in attendance. According to the London Times, the meeting was so secret that, ―…some of the billionaires‘ aides were told they were at ‗security briefings‘‖. The Times reports, ―Over dinner they discussed how they might settle on an ―umbrella cause‖ that could harness their interests.‖ The Times interviewed a guest at the meeting, who said that the group wanted to meet in secret because they didn‘t want their statements ending up in the media, ―painting them as an alternative world government.‖ A brief overview of the activities of these groups will show that they have been acting as an alternative world government, and that they have been for decades. Through their grant-making power and immense wealth, they can effectively choose which scientific research projects are funded, what education reforms are initiated, and in turn the entire direction of society at large. In an interview with the Seattle Times, UN Secretary General Ban Ki-moon was asked, ―Some say the emergence of super rich philanthropies like the Gates Foundation has undermined the effectiveness of the U.N. and its member organizations, like the WHO.‖ Moon responded, ―On the contrary that is what we really want — contributions from the business community as well

as philanthropies. We need to have political support, but it doesn‘t give us all that we need. NGOs and philanthropies and many foundations such as Bill Gates Foundation — they‘re taking a very important role…‖ In October of 2007, the Global Impact Investing Network was established by the Rockefeller Foundation. The GIIN will ―help solve social and environmental problems‖ by encouraging investment that will bring both profit and produce real world change. The GIIN is taking John D‘s ―principle of scientific giving‖ to another level. This conglomerate of various banks and foundations will attempt to mold industry and society by investing in selected social programs and ―screening‖ out investments for Co2 emitters and others deemed to be unworthy. A few of the banks and organizations involved with GIIN include:           

Acumen Fund The Annie E. Casey Foundation The Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation Calvert Foundation Capricorn Investment Group Citigroup Deutsche Bank Equilibrium Capital Generation Investment Management J.P. Morgan The Rockefeller Foundation

Think Tanks: A profile on an “action intellectual” “Herman Kahn has been a major figure in one of the most fascinating shifts of power in U.S. History: from identifiable public leaders to the „action intellectuals.‟” – Life Magazine, December 6, 1968 Herman Kahn is known as one of the founding fathers of future studies. After working for the RAND Corporation, Kahn founded the Hudson Institute in 1961. The satirical film Dr. Strangelove is largely based on real documents and ideas that came from RAND. The December 6, 1968 edition of Life Magazine details Kahn‘s career, and the larger implications of an unprecedented shift of power to unelected ―action intellectuals.‖ ―…Herman Kahn has been a major figure in one of the most fascinating shifts of power in U.S. History: from identifiable public leaders to the ―action intellectuals.‖ As counselors to the decisionmakers, men such as Kahn often have access to future technology (what is known, but not yet disclosed) and official intelligence (what is known, but not yet revealed, about the capacities and plans of other nations). Thus, decisions – based on private knowledge, analyzed by private consultants and debated in private – can become public policy. This is a process of invisible power. At its extreme this influence can commit a nation to social programs and military actions which have neither been fully explained nor publicly debated. One day, as that power pervades and grows more sophisticated, it may so affect the course of government that any nation‘s policies may be locked in, as if by automatic pilot, years before the men who are elected to govern ever take office.‖ Whose agenda are they serving? We didn‘t elect these individuals. The historical record is ripe with open admissions on part of the elite to use their philanthropic power to manipulate society at large. The world is now in their sights. Whether the elite‘s intent is good or bad, are they giving us a choice?

Websites for additional research: ADDITIONAL NON-MAINSTREAM NEWS SITES AND INFORMATION Tyranny Comes to America -- online download: Watch: Jesse Ventura's Conspiracy Theory: Watch: Fall of the Republic: PSYWAR: The Real Battlefield for the Mind: End the Fed! www.EndTheFed.US International Forecaster: Restore the Republic: Campaign for Liberty: John Perkins: INFOWARS: The Crowhouse: Oath Keepers; FREE DOWNLOADABLE DOCUMENTS:"><img Understanding CAFRâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s: and

Get food, get prepared! Sources for storable food, water and more! Water Filteration: Food Dehydrators:

-------------------- Important Documentaries --------------------

If you watch these films, you will fully understand what our country is facing. If you turn on the autoplay feature, they will automatically advance to the next segment or video. You can also expand the window and pick out whatever video you feel like watching.

"It is well enough that people of the nation do not understand our banking and monetary system, for if they did, I believe there would be a revolution before tomorrow morning." - Henry Ford

A MUST SEE VIDEO PLAYLIST There is an urgent need for everyone to try and understand how the elite international bankers are using propaganda and control of the news media to convince the population of the world to accept a one world government. If you watch these documentaries, you will awaken to the truth and help create a world that works for everyone, not just a handful of ultra-rich elites. "None are more hopelessly enslaved than those who falsely believe they are free." - Johann Wolfgang von Goethe


Watch: The World According to Monsanto:

STUDY THIS INFORMATION TO DRASTICALLY IMPROVE YOUR HEALTH! HealthRanger7 Additional Website: My passion is to help equip people so they can live healthier lives. Most 'main stream' health information is not helpful at all. Why else is there such an increase in cancer, diabetes, obesity, high cholesterol, heart diseases, migraines, multiple sclerosis, fibromyalgia, Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, autism, ADHD, asthma, arthritis, epilepsy, allergies, chronic fatigue, etc? The main causes of disease are: - Stress (suppresses the immune system). - Vaccines (damage brain and immune system). - Dental Amalgam fillings (contain 50% mercury). - An animal-based diet (meat and dairy products). - Artificial sweeteners (aspartame, Splenda, etc). - Fluoride (in toothpaste, drinking water, food). - Genetically Modified Foods (cause cancer). - Transfats or (partially) hydrogenated oils. - Flavor enhancers (such as MSG).

Other health dangers include: - Full Body Scanners (they cause cancer). - Energy-saving light bulbs (contain mercury). - Mercury (in seafood, soda's, food, vaccines). - Aluminium (in vaccines, deodorants, cookware). - Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (toothpaste, shampoos). - The Gardasil or Cervarix HPV vaccine for girls. - Sunscreen lotions (many contain aluminium). - Bisphenol A or BPA (in plastic bottles, cans). - Soy or Soya products (milk, flour, tofu, etc). - Sugar (suppresses the immune system). - Canola Oil (used in many restaurants). - Cholesterol-lowering drugs (statins). - High Fructose Corn Syrup (HFCS). - Many food additives (E-numbers). - Psychotropic (SSRI) medication. - Stimulant (ADHD) medication. - Phthalates (in soft plastics). - Mobile & cordless phones. - Synthetic air fresheners. - Teflon (in cookware). - Mammograms. - WiFi radiation. - Microwaves. - Pesticides. Doctors usually ignore this information. All they have been trained to do is 'treat' symptoms with drugs that cause many adverse side effects! Instead of treating symptoms, doctors should focus on the causes of disease. A high fat, animal-based diet consisting of meat and dairy products acidifies the body, clogs up arteries, reduces blood flow and the oxygen level in the body. A low level of oxygen combined with the toxins in processed foods leads to a weakened immune system. This is the cause of most diseases. In contrast, an alkaline diet of plant-based foods will result in a strong immune system. With a strong immune system the body is able to fight off diseases and heal itself. 150 years ago, most people ate a plant-based diet as animal-based foods were too expensive. Most diseases we suffer today were almost unheard of back then. "My people are destroyed for lack of knowledge." Hosea 4:6 (KJV)

"With all thy getting, get understanding." Proverbs 4:7 (KJV) "Let thy food be thy medicine and thy medicine be thy food." Hippocrates, the founder of medicine. Nearly all diseases can be completely reversed and cured through the use of a plant-based diet! ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Video playlist 'Dangers in our Food': Video playlist 'Gevaren in ons Voedsel': Excellent health resources: http://shirleys-wellness-ca... ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Do you find it difficult to lose weight and life healthy? The solution is actually quite simple. Avoid all artificial sweeteners, flavor enhancers and (partially) hydrogenated oils/fats (trans fats) as they cause of obesity and disease. Have your dental amalgam fillings removed SAFELY. Avoid fluoridated water and fluoride toothpaste. Don't use microwaves as they destroy up to 97% of the nutrients in your food! About Me: Read the book 'Fit for Life' by Harvey Diamond. This book will transform your life, in fact you'll never have to diet again for the rest of your life! Avoid harmful food additives (E-numbers): Remove heavy metals and other toxins from your body with Zeolite powder, a 100% natural mineral. Fulvic acid is the most powerful free-radical scavenger. It neutralises and removes heavy metals and other toxins from the body, increases oxygen absorption and reduces acidity. Chlorella also removes toxins from your body. Goji berries have the highest level of antioxidants. Vitamin D3, which is produced through exposure to sunlight, is essential for good health and will prevent many diseases! Rice, almond or oat milk, the healthier alternatives to dairy or soy milk: Cure skin conditions, pains and other ailments with comfrey, a medicinal plant: Cure diseases with Miracle Mineral Supplement: Kill infections with colloidal silver: Are your cosmetic products safe? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Have you been diagnosed with cancer? Cancer is really a reduced immune system disease. The many toxins in our food and environment make the body acidic, weaken the immune system, leading to cancer. Conventional cancer treatments chemotherapy, radiation and surgery try to remove the symptoms of cancer but don't address the underlying causes of the disease. In fact, chemotherapy and radiation weaken the immune system and cause cancer!

Breast Cancer Deception: Video playlist 'Cures for Cancer': Before starting cancer treatments, please visit: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Have you been tested HIV-positive? Do you believe HIV causes AIDS? Find out the shocking truth! ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Does your child have a neurological disorder? The huge increase in neurological disorders such as ADHD, autism and dyslexia is most likely caused by vaccines since they contain harmful toxins such as mercury, aluminum and formaldehyde. This causes damage to the child's brain and immune system. The secret behind vaccines: Reversal of neurological disorders is often possible through biomedical intervention! Chelation can safely remove the toxic metals contained in vaccines. Hyperbaric Oxygen Therapy can heal brain disorders and other diseases. Vaccines are actually the main cause of SIDS or crib/cot death! The fraud behind flu vaccines: More information about vaccines: Make a difference!

Tyranny Comes to America  

"The courts must be called to our aid, debts must be collected, bonds and mortgages foreclosed as rapidly as possible. When, through the pro...

Read more
Read more
Similar to
Popular now
Just for you